Home

Genesys User Manual

Contents

1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Drawing No Sheet Yel R EB11731 gt A QQCH 8T1 ONgr1 872 813 8T4 BTS 8T6 817 8T8 MasterMix AFL DC gt Ep a e aa a a A o a ara Pal o 5it 4 4 L R E o AL lt From Rev 1L L R PEL l Yel oe CH 8T2 0 CH SoftWare ES To 8T1 A Setup Stereo l o Sl OR 51k Y gt Mix DC gt e or LCR 1 Ye A L L SS 4 lt From Rev 1R gt To Mix L es Master Mi MON Software l gt nec 4
2. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Drawing No Sheet o EB11731 1 Inst ja DC Inst in Grn Symbols Ins2 in Grn Ins2 ge SE HK VP XLR CN he AE Dyn n Gen he eae CH I P Stage acid Control of vn te is l 48v i i E Masiva Processing Matrix e 3D 25 15W D con Red 3 G Ea ee a a 3 y Instto Mon Grn Jo O 1 4 Jack O lt DC HPF Ins2 to Mon Grn en Hi Z Jd Dyn to Mon Gr O lt DC e y Grn Ord Resetable Grn Q m Redes y EQ to Mon Grn je T lt 48v Pad DC g Q Power up default Lai y ae IS el CD Center detent i H La Hk l i a o e o rs a ls a e ti E o a o e a
3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Ene SINEN ed gt Monitor Sel 8T1 2 via 2T EB11731 3 et Q 8T1 Sig Led 812 to 8 Similar e Me A gt Optional ADC i p LS Monitor gt gt gt l o 8T1 o p PER 8 TRACK 871 gt AFL Relay Sig Bus gt 4 a POST gt 2T Mixer SOLO Yel Pan Yel AFL eo ge AER aan Q i pc gt STL AFL L s i lt SMe a A a a o a A A A Lat Master Mix i R JERI j l Ls it ics shoe a i lt Yel _ CH l To AFL L a 8T1 INS INS ON E s h Q 8T1 AFL gt Mix pc gt STL Pre gt F ER l Ak l B N fran ae R ae 4 To AFL sti soo cur PP a Mix Bus gt S p gt sl iCute gt i Hii pea Ep Mix lt el eF T gt 8T SOLO CUT BUS l 7X l es O mail SS i Eff El i oc 999 R TOON i gt M9 Prt rere sone 17 gt 8T SOLO ENABLE BUS 1 i 1 l 1 l PASA aa aa lA EAS AA EE gt 5 e lt lt 8T AFL ENABLE BUS Tas p Dy or vel mo ent Automation gt DC gt gt a zi e 8T1 amp Yel 24 se A IZ _11 rly E E 1 Freeze ki l Optional i lt lt Automation ce E i 8T1 Shown 812 8 Similar L gt DAW Control fa Sune aoe ee ae El ot
4. Signal Name ae Hi Lo Scrn 1 Key Input 1 24 12 25 2 Key Input 2 10 23 11 3 Key Input 3 21 9 22 4 Key Input 4 7 20 8 5 Key Input 5 18 6 19 6 Key Input 6 4 17 5 7 Key Input 7 15 3 16 8 Key Input 8 1 14 2 224 General Fuses Ratings Location Console AC IFP IEC Black DC Heatsink Main PSU AC Distribution GD 48w 18v A 48 18Y 1858Y 54 5 5Y Fuse Fuse Fuse Mtr Mon CH Fuse Fuse Fuse Distribution Fuse Fuse Ratings AC Fuses Main IEC input fuse T6 3A H250v x 2 Distribution fuse T10A H250v DC Fuses 18V T10A 250v 5V Meters T5A 250v 5V Channels T12 5A 250v 5V Monitor T12 5A 250v 48V T2A 250v Please note that the AC Distribution block shown on the left comprising of 3 x IEC connectors is not fitted to the 16 channel add on modules 225 Appendix A Processing Cassettes Switch Settings On each of the EQ and Dynamics cassettes there is a block of eight dip switches the first four of which need to be set so that each card is addressed correctly The switch settings below are the same for both EQ and DYN cassettes Board ID NB Board ID The presence of these switches mean that cassettes Position SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW 4 SW 5 6 7 amp 8 cannot just be removed from one section of the console 1 8 off off off l and then reinserted into 9 16 ON off Off ON for 32 bit another at wil
5. 7 O The all in one alphanumeric keypad is used for entering filenames on screen when in the Filing screen The image to the left shows the implemented functions in colour and their functionality is described below The keys coloured in green are the alphanumeric keys You also have a DEL and key The DEL key has the same functionality as the Delete or DEL key found on a Microsoft Windows compatible keyboard The Txt key in red sets the Text mode on or off it switches the green alphanumeric keys from letters Txt led on to numbers Txt led off Text mode is entered by pressing the Txt button on the bottom left Txt led on In Text mode the buttons enter text in the same way as a mobile phone keypad in that pressing 8 once will enter a letter a pressing it twice rapidly will enter b and so on O acts as a space in Text mode The brown coloured keys provide additional control functionality The is the Start key found on a Microsoft Windows compatible keyboard The Alt Ctrl Tab Return and Enter keys represent their equivalent keys found on a Microsoft Windows compatible keyboard The blue keys are equivalent to the navigational arrow keys found on a Microsoft Windows compatible keyboard They allow navigating around lists moving backwards forwards through typed text whilst entering filenames etc A full sized keyboard can be plugged into a spare USB
6. for manufacture or otherwise I L disclosed without prior written l l l l l l l l l l l l l fi l l I l Monitor S nsertion 0 EN 10dB Trim gt ES gt 80Hz gt gt ES Mix L amp R gt To LR H i gt l i SLSOPA l l i l i To 8T Meters l i i i SLSOPB Aux 1 gt gt To L and R i i Monitor i i i l F ES Insertion o En 10dB Trim o l l Aux 2 gt ds To L and R gt S a T gt gt gt l CI l t i rl i LSLSOPA l l l l l y E To 8T Meters LSLS OPB Aux 3 gt T gt To L and R i q E INTERNAL Monitor fe i il l Insertion SELECTOR RS Ma T rN 10dB Trim o Aux 4 gt gt To L and R p ae a gt S 5 T l G z gt Yel ES Yel Pink Noise gt l a i RS LS OP A r o lt 0t o AA A E he a y RS LS OP B Aux 5 gt gt To LR je je i i 08 Sel RTB i gt Lat La Yet amp Toggle Cycle Red a ren Pes LS Selector L Aux 6 gt gt To LR a 1 OFFa PFL gt P lt 2 PFL T gt 000 000 i DC gt IRIB Yel g A B M1 M2 i Power up Yel Yel Yel Yel if gt l Default i T an ES o H Cue 1 L amp R gt gt To LR ee A nace o o o Dc R a From Afl gt z Di gt lt i External l He He He i le Mix Duss 000 000 RTB Cut by Lat Lat l i A z gt Cuel Cue2 Slate gt l Cue 2 L amp R gt To LR rn 0dB is TB and TB
7. Drawing No Sheet EB11731 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Drawing No Sheet EB11731 4 ISO i Hore Rev 1 SHOWN REV 2 4 SIMILAR 21 Mixer System o Chan Mon amp 8T l A Ej ON je lt Solo cut DC wits l olo Pan Ba i Master Mix l Cut Grn Q To Mix L AFL T 5 Grn eS T rm T ee ee Master Mix L R i Lat i Ie a a ToMix R 871 2 Lat lt 2T Tone i e MONO RENAL gt Master Mixt q ap US A G Yel l Grn amp A IU 2 eines S P lt ci fo Rev 1 AFL fi NN d l Pan Bal gt width 660 ee a a S l 8T1 0 P ar o Be Ero L o AN Y Grn Mix 2T computer gt Rev 3 ojee eo do m a 8 8T1 INS SEND Y Cut Return gt po LE I ae r T E p gt EAS 2T 0 P Mix Tone 1 l a yy Phasal T OdB Rev 1R i Pod 3TOAFLR Level pid B RO es Er a TPL gt p o A p O J et gt o l 000 F o p ee Elle a Y p gt LS Monitor 9 T gt A HoN 4 gt AFL Rela l i 3db Pan in Mono 1 f css 9 O y UN oe y Y aN UY l P lt 6db Bal in Stereo PESOS i i eka qp Si dod i L 8T2 INS SEND gt gt gt AN La PP 2TR o p i als CUES e a cobb l DE RETA i Lat l Y Rev to Cue 1 2 a 873 14 Yel Pre Grn Q ON 4 oc gt Hje lt izp level Lat gt 2T Meter L oTa Mh e gt Cue 1L o pl 10d8 Ss ZA Yel Q REV 8T3 0 P gt qh gt 2T Meter R l a s 1 C Cycle ly l pane oo Red Q DAW 8T1 3 5 7 873 INS SEND gt _
8. o Tools PRE channel controls 2 racks 8 mic c Debug ma disha Pet ai A Fa i Fir Lith a im mms ome ms m s s da haga i fem E haga Y ar ll ian bapi 4 mu A BOL ALTA wii naji Melt Theat i IHH Tal Ha Before using the Genesys with an Apple Logic Pro system please ensure that both systems are properly configured as outlined on page 25 This involves e Setting the IP addresses on Genesys and the DAW computer e Connecting the network ethernet cabling e Installing the ipMIDI driver Genesys Setup gt Go to Settings Services and make sure Apple Logic Pro is selected at the top of the screen gt For 1 select the MIDI Port then the console 8 block of faders on which you wish these DAW tracks to appear NB The 8T faders are referred to in the pull down list of options as Master gt Repeat for all the other available MIDI Ports and fader blocks on the console NB This mapping must match that set in Logic Pro The same MIDI Port cannot be used more than once including the one set for Midi Timecode The 8 block of faders can only be linked to a single MIDI Port and not repeated The DAW control is limited to controlling a maximum of 48 Logic tracks or 6 MIDI Ports this does not include the MIDI Port used for MTC gt Once set click OK Follow the on screen instructions to re launch the software to apply the new changes
9. C Go Back gt Install Neve FireWire Card Driver Standard Install on Macintosh HD This will take 5 6 MB of space on your computer Click Install to perform a standard installation of this software on the disk Macintosh HD Introduction Destination Sel Installation Tyge nstallatid umma y Change Install Location 2 Py Y wae y Go Back Install Install Neve FireWire Card Driver EL When this software finishes installing you Y must restart your computer Are you sure h A you want to install the software now Introduct im Destinati er 8 Installatil Cancel Continue Installation of Change Install Location gt or Go Back Install Install Neve FireWire Card Driver Installing Neve FireWire Card Driver Optimizing system for installed software Introduction Destination Sel Installation Type Installation summaf y d Install time remaining About 2 minutes Continue Installing the DAW FireWire driver on a MAC Before starting drag the Neve FireWire dmg driver file from the CD onto the Mac Desktop or download the driver from the AMS Neve website to the DAW computer desktop so it can be installed from there gt Double click Neve FireWire dmg to start the install gt Double click NeveFireWire 3 5 2 8028 pkg gt Click Continue gt Click Continue gt Click Install
10. ccccsseeceeereeeneenenes 154 SUTFOUNC Externa Sidi ala te taney 71 surround ES MONILONI NG iesieta aaae 42 Switch Setting Sii a 226 SWILCNDIOCK Lisa 127 SWIG DOCK Zi 127 A Seeman Mute ln oaks 16 38 54 63 76 SYNE A a 136 SPP A A A dawaniouasinaan en 118 T TalkDacka iaa lanas 77 83 113 203 TalkDa ck MIC caian 92 Tasca Mrena aaa 126 ihe See Te E E E EEE EEE E O 16 83 TBARS a aT a E poets t anne 84 TB TE eaaa a a ana 78 TMG DEXA Dian ria dana A A 131 TRG SOG A A A AA 99 ME EI aer 71 o A meseueae 95 A Sota diretastatielae Gaetan A 48 TOL AES TRAN SMS Sata rule ne Geen 153 TO CUBA tada ad 55 Windows Desktop ccccocccccncorcccccccna ranma rr 121 To DAW via Fire Wire ccsccceceeeeessanesennenes 150 152 TO MON nes 48 TOMO INVCGS ar AA OA 54 TONE sra a osa 60 61 TONG TO 2 Tas aana aaa R Ea E 82 Tiida 81 105 201 WUE MOM CONSO Ch aaa 121 U Update OVE ara ta 156 update FIMWarG is 118 USB O OP raa erea aa 17 92 110 O e a a 16 71 72 V VGA areas whiny AA AA aae 17 NGA Zin 17 Vista SUD DOM eirin ia EAA aio 122 Maa 91 92 W WEK O tienes 133 WELCK Talca 128 WELLS IN tota ilids 141 WEEK OUT etiani a aa 141 WIPTE RN 55 WINdOWS asii A LE 32 WINCOWS Z rsio E eg ennemae walc 18 155 Windows 7 DAW Computer ssssssssssssrssrsrssrens 27 Windows 7 Genesys Computer s ssssssssrsrssrss 25 231 WINdOwS VIS taria asa 18 Word Clock 149 WOTFTACIOCK mail ia odi a alia
11. 184 Sana nar a bel bee bel Ela e e COT gt In the left Devices column select Mackie Control 2 and click Reset button do the same by selecting all the other Mackie controllers too and each time click the Reset button gt Click OK to close the Devices dialogue You have now setup 16 DAW tracks to control with Genesys Similarly to setup a console with 32 channel faders with DAW control the following setup would apply Genesys software set as 1 8 as MIDI Port 1 gt 9 16 as MIDI Port 2 gt 17 24 as MIDI Port 3 gt 25 32 as MIDI Port 4 In the DAW Device Devices Setup window gt Add a Mackie Control device and set the MIDI Input and MIDI Output to 04 Ethernet MIDI gt Add a Mackie Control device and set the MIDI Input and MIDI Output to 03 Ethernet MIDI gt Add a Mackie Control device and set the MIDI Input and MIDI Output to 02 Ethernet MIDI gt Add a Mackie Control device and set the MIDI Input and MIDI Output to 01 Ethernet MIDI Operation The following presumes all hardware software has been configured correctly and the DAW button is lit and the Genesys is a 16 channel console If the DAW has been configured incorrectly or there is no DAW communication the message Waiting for DAW Port x will be displayed on each panel when you press the DAW button where x is the number of MIDI Port assigned to that panel Due to the limitation of the 4
12. Press and hold down LOCK on the Main Monitor Panel then press RTE SEL All of the Channel Strip SEL leds will flash Most of the strip controls will have their functionality blocked out apart from those indicated in white left Make any changes Press the RTE SEL button to save your changes and exit Master SEL mode To Allocate Processing Elements Across Channel and Monitor Paths Enter Master SEL mode Pressing the EQ button will toggle between the lighting the adjacent led to indicate the EQ is in the Channel path or lighting the EQ led in the TO MON section to indicate the EQ is in the Monitor path The DYN INS1 and INS2 buttons work in the same way Press the RTE SEL button to save your changes and exit Master SEL mode To Set the Order of Processing on the Channel and Monitor Paths Enter Master SEL mode gt Press ORD the CH led will light The process led s will flash for any elements that are in the Channel path Press the buttons in the order you wish the processing to appear gt Press ORD again the MON led will light if processing is in the monitor path already The process led s will flash for any elements that are in the Monitor path Press the buttons in the order you wish the processing to appear Press the RTE SEL button to save your changes and exit Master SEL mode 48 Channel and Monitor Path Drag and Drop Order Processing ORD Button O Channel Processin
13. 6 only via 8T routing on later versions it can also be routed to 8T 7 amp 8 as well and the Channel path can be routed to 8Ts 1 2 3 4 on 53 Preventing feedback loops earlier versions of hardware it could also be routed to 8T 7 amp 8 as well This is a hybrid state designed to work when the console is working in Stereo Pan Surround and group modes It can also be used to set up local routing in conjunction with the SEL button gt 8T on later consoles This button is now used to show interrogate if any gt 8T s are routed from the monitor path selecting gt 8T will display the monitor routing in the Meter up stand on the 8T leds SWP Swaps the large Fader amp Cut with the Small monitor knob amp Cut within the Channel and Monitor paths It will also swap mix data when Automation is present SOLO Solos the path in either Momentary Latching or Interlock mode CUT Cuts the path s audio And also cuts the pre fade auxes in Mixdown mode The CUT can be temporarily over written by the adjacent SOLO button and if automation events have been written TO MON leds Indicates the status of processing If any of the INS1 INS2 DYN or EQ leds are lit this indicates a process present and switched in circuit on the Monitor path The order of the channel processing can be set in SEL Mode and the ORD screen There are circumstances under which it is possible to create a feedback loop on t
14. When linking the Dynamics using the F4 and F5 buttons all of the these controls are linked and will hold the same values Local Link Mode In Local Link mode the compressors within an 8 fader section can linked together to form any size links in any combination so that all the link members being compressed are treated as one and compressed identically It is always the loudest signal within this link group that causes the compressor to action once the threshold has been reached regardless of which signal this actually is Creating links will always link that path with the path to it s right Links can be any size from 2 to 8 wide in any combination It is possible to set up a single 8 wide link It is not possible to link across different 8 fader sections of the console A typical linking example would be channels 1 amp 2 linked together and channels 4 amp 5 linked together to form two link groups It would then be possible to include channel 3 to join these links together to form one complete link but noting that channel 3 would also be included in the link group if selected To isolate channel 3 it would be necessary to remove the compressor from the channel or the monitor path by using the DYN button turned off on the channel strip to isolate it Global Link Mode In Global Link Mode all of the compressors across the entire width of the console will act as a single compressor across all of the signals fed
15. ac eee Master SEL mode E LOCK E FILING 4 gt Master SEL mode is entered by holding down the LOCK button on the Main Monitor Panel and then pressing RTE SEL All of the SEL buttons on the Channel and 8T strips will flash to indicate the console is in Master SEL mode This is purely a setup mode that allows you to set the Pre Post state of auxes set loudspeaker locks the order of processing on the channels etc Once in Master SEL mode the majority of the console s audio functionality is blocked out NOTE In this Mode with the LCR type module fitted it will be possible to tell which CH modules are transformer type using the CHM led below the Mic encoder display 1 CHM led not flashing electronic mic input 2 CHM led flashing transformer mic input In this manual all text relating to Master SEL mode is shown with a shaded background gt Exit Master SEL mode by pressing RTE SEL Master SEL Mode on the Channel Strip Master SEL Mode on the 8T Section When in Master SEL mode most of that strips functionality plus the ability to change any of the audio is suspended The SEL led will flash to indicate you are in Master SEL Mode It will then be possible to set up Auxiliary Pre Post states selecting INS1 INS2 EQ or DYN in the CH or MON path and ordering the processing Also indication of transformer and non transformer LCR modules will be Shown as well using the CHM led b
16. gt Optional ADC i p IMR L Send l gt i cun gt gt Mix L 0 level il Optional ADC i p L 7 N ix L o p o g Mee gt ze 19 Aux 4 0 P l l l J Da L IMR Bo Gr 1 on L gt Cue Mix Mtr and Mon Oe SG a oe E l NY 1 f l 1 T a l i Aux5 P e A H a ae L i i ee da m gt Optional ADC i p gt O 4 l l ARE OE ga POR to EOS A A AI gt Ny gt gt Aux 5L 0 P 7 i E i Mix bus A de gt Optional ADC p I I AT gt gt Aux 5R 0 P STSEL 8 i ST SEL gt Saat a l on La AA da ia IA E os TE i i gt Monitor Sel and Cue mix R gt 55 7 gt Cue Mix Mtr and Mon j 3 PN A cee Op he Vee og ARV pee eet AN ux Mix R ES gt 2T Meter Sel a an gt Optional ee i p l J gt RO Ode m 1 Optional ADC i p fron Ax al gt G gt Aux 6L O P Cut gt gt mee se ia gt Optional ADC i p IMR R Send KX Mix R o gt gt Aux 6R O P uae f man gt 8 a oes MRR IMR EnG on I P Levet i i i Master 0dB DC gt O O Cue Mix Mtr and Mon l y I l i ale gt O Y me a y lt DC L l l L Oe ae es est yt A A A E lt lt tonat 31 07 12 1 K Automation MOD DATE ISS Mix L R l AMS Neve Ltd owns the copyright 00D er exis Title GENESYS SYSTEM BLOCK LCR AMS 4 lt je i REA DRAWN CHECKED APPROVED AMS Neve Ltd VBDC F il A Automation O AMS Neva Ltd z098 RAP MES
17. Setup Neve FireWire Card Installing Please wait while Setup installs Neve Firewire Card on pour computer Extracting files C Program Files NeveFireWire Uninstall dil o Cancel Favorites DICE WINDOWS DRIVER RELEASE NOTES Requirements Operating System Windows XP 32 and 64 bit with Service Pack 2 see Note 1 Window ith Ser see Note 2 or have already installed an S800 1394b Firewire eed to apply a hotfix from Recomm d m 4 2 8GHz EM64T or better 64 XP 3000 or better e RAM Please also consult your audio applications requirements My Computer Software Installation The software you are installing has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the software vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway STOP Installation Setup Neve FireWire Card Completing the Neve FireWire Card Setup Wizard To complete the installation of Neve FireWire Card Setup must restart your computer Would you like to restart now Yes restart the computer now O No will restart the computer later The install will start and the progress
18. 228 Dynamics Cassette ssssnsssrnnrnanrenranranrnunn 20 30 E Embedded AES SYNC arkun A E ces 123 ENCORE PIUS aia ln 23 112 A E 20 33 48 54 85 87 96 226 EQO Casse Eea oe a 19 EO Cassetta a a a a a 30 E AAA EE AEAEE TTET TETE E A E 17 Ed a 122 EXit JO WINAOWS a 121 EXP artritis e 101 Expandet eno cis 101 EA EE A AE ata ia c 16 44 57 62 75 EX als 44 73 75 EXT A aa 71 EXT Lita 44 73 74 153 Ties ote iD ara ecos 73 EXT Ari doit 73 EXT DUON tua ina arial 209 Extender Controller cccccccsesceccseeeseereueueeuneeuess 174 External desmadre ERT 44 EXE La dai 44 Externals 5 20 OPON einna a a 73 F ESA 95 IN 175 185 Fader aca paa a 114 Fader SEL SUS ri a a T 175 185 FADS eaeoe ao 172 FADS and BAN KS a cavers cannes 182 190 FAST FORWARD sados 89 173 183 191 FECOUD ACK oada a S 54 FILING idilio 67 109 FireWire 123 125 127 131 143 148 151 152 Firewire fuel GAuUgYe occococcococcononcn nora 149 FireWire Installer ccccccseeeeeseccseceeeureeuueneuenaens 144 FireWire MONITO airis 148 Firewire Monitor Board ccccccsseecceceuseueueneueeeunes 131 Firewire Sync Master c ccccccseeeeee scene eeeeeeeees 125 Firewire SYNC SIAVES cccceccseeeseseeneeeeeeeeesneaneses 125 LN CPU E E E E E 16 46 FEOMU Cl Eine tasar 41 FONE Aldao dera aEs 41 Fuel Gala alas 123 Full Genesys ReDOOt ccccssesseeeeeeseneeeeuntesentenas 122 EW6453 Cup asiten 157 G
19. F5 changes the Auxes being controlled by the encoders from A E respectively on all tracks i e if you have more than one Aux per track up to 5 can be controlled by the encoders per track gt Press F1 to control Aux A and then hold down F1 and press the encoder it will toggle the selected Aux for that track on the first row of Auxes in Pro Tools between Pre and Post fader Press F2 to control Aux B and then hold down F2 and press the 170 EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System encoder it will toggle the selected Aux for that track on the second row of Auxes in Pro Tools between Pre and Post fader The same applies to Auxes C F3 D F4 and E F5 The Pre Post state will be displayed on the screen PANS Press PANS the button will light and the screen shown left will open The encoders now control the Pans gt Use the fader SEL buttons to select which tracks you wish to assign to the 4 DAW encoders or use the 8 P gt buttons The fader SEL buttons will light red to indicate which tracks are being controlled by the encoders e Pressing or gt sets the DAW encoders to control the next or previous 4 tracks e When 1 4 faders SEL is on red encoders are controlling Pans 1 4 e Press gt and you will now be controlling Pans 9 12 e Press gt again and you will now b
20. I P 2 gt DMON does exactly the same as I P 2 mode but now feeds the Neve FireWire output into the console monitor return input allowing for Neve FireWire mixdown 66 ROUTE SEL Section LOAD SAVE au l RIE ROUTE SEL This section enables the setup routing to the 8T and Main Mix Outputs plus simple storing and loading of console snapshot stores FILING Lights yellow and acts as the On Off for this panel allowing Stores to be saved or loaded via the stores screen LOAD On the first press it will turn the TFT screen over to the Snapshot Recall Stores page where a file can be selected Once a selection has been made on screen then pressing the button again will load that particular Store to the console via the Load Store pop up SAVE On the first press it will turn the screen over to the Store Recall screen It will then be possible to create a Store On the second press a dialogue screen will ask you to name the file so the store can be saved as a future starting template Enter a filename and then click SAVE GZ e 112 3 4 5 6 7 0 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 Sree eee eee eee ee ee E E E T tm to at 6013010515001 a a Yt n EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System The above screen can also be opened directly On any Channel strip hold down the SEL button and then press the adjacent gt 8T button On any 8
21. In this way continue to add Extender Controllers until you match port for port the settings in the Genesys software Therefore you will have one Master and up to a maximum of five Extenders depending on the size of your Genesys console and the MIDI Ports allocated in the Genesys software Once finished all of the controllers should be bordered by a grey box to indicate that they are all in the same control group Fedei Taah Waiki J Idbght inas Taia ma 14 Larial ha gt Once all these parameters controllers and MIDI Ports have been set close this screen Operation The following presumes all hardware software has been configured correctly and the DAW button is lit and the Genesys is a 16 channel console If Logic has been configured incorrectly or there is no DAW communication the message Waiting for DAW Port x will be displayed on each panel when you press the DAW button where x is the number of MIDI Port assigned to that panel Due to the limitation of the 4 character display on the faders the Logic track names will be truncated when displayed on Genesys The four DAW encoders found at the bottom of the Monitor Panel as shown in the image to the left in red are used to control DAW parameters levels and buttons The console faders on Genesys control the DAW faders In DAW mode when controlling Sends Aux Pans Plug ins e The F5 button is used as a FLIP control With the F5 button lit FLIP mode
22. Launches the Update Driver Software Wizard for the selected device gt Right click it and select Update Driver Software Select Browse my computer for driver software Select Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer gt Install the driver that ends with 1394 OHCI Legacy Click OK to install the driver Reinstall the Genesys driver as shown on page 134 If you are using Genesys software V3 3 build 1 or later then you will need to update the FireWire driver This driver is available from our website for either Mac or PC http www ams neve com Products Music Genesys Genesys aspx Download this driver relevant to your DAW Mac or PC then run and install it PC You can check it has been installed by going to All Programs AMS Neve Ltd Neve FireWire Card gt Click OK on the small information screen that opens 155 Mac must be running OS X 10 6 or above software You can check it has been installed correctly by going to Applications Neve FireWire card Reverting to the Standard Windows FireWire Driver If you were previously using a FireWire device with the Windows Compliant FireWire driver and now need to update your FireWire driver please follow these steps gt With your interface disconnected find your FireWire IEEE 1394 controller in Device Manager from Start Menu Control Panel System gt Click Update driver File Action View Help e 9 E H e PRS 4 ay
23. Lights blue and turns on the SWP led on each channel 63 This control also globally swaps the Large Fader amp Cut with the Small Fader amp Cut within the Channel and Monitor paths MIX Puts the console into Mix down mode and cancels the Mic LN inputs to clearly indicate Mixdown Mode It will change the audio feeds to the Channel and Monitor auxes from Pre cut Pre fade to Post cut Pre fade within the channel This will allow the Pre Fade Auxes to be Pre Cut for recording but Post Cut for mixing It will also set the Master CH DAW I P 2 and the Mon DAW RET to be On and will also turn DAW Channel IP2 and DAW RET to be on locally on each channel enabling both the channel path and the monitor path to return for mixing CH SAFE Lights yellow and stops the channel SOLO buttons from affecting the channel Solo Cuts when selected It also causes the AFL PEL led to flash and the AFL to switch into the LS monitor path if a Channel SOLO is selected It will also allow SIF and PFL in the Monitor Section to be selected It will also turn SOLO LINK off if selected If CH SAFE is not selected then the Solo system will be destructive In this mode all channel CUTS will be deactivated if a channel solo is selected MON SAFE Lights yellow and stops the Monitor SOLO buttons from affecting the Monitor Cuts It will enable the AFL PFL led on the Monitor Panel to flash and the AFL to be switched into the LS Monitor
24. Rev Returns 3 2 amp 1 These three boards are the same as Rev 4 above but only contain the Left and Right input for the relevant Rev Return 204 Genesys Audio Specification Record Mode Mic Input Electronically Balanced to Insert Send Headroom gt 27dBu 1kHz lt 0 5 THD N Frequency Response Typically 0 05dB 20Hz to 20kHz Distortion THD N Typically 0 002 1kHz measured at 20dBu 10Hz to 80kHz filter Noise EIN lt 127 5dBu 20Hz to 22kHz filter 60dB gain input terminated 150 R Line Input to Insert Send Headroom gt 27dBu O 1kHz lt 0 5 THD N Frequency Response Typically 0 05dB 20Hz to 20kHz Distortion THD N Typically 0 001 1kHz measured at 20dBu 10Hz to 80kHz filter Noise lt 92dBu 20Hz to 22kHz filter Line Input to Direct Output Headroom gt 27dBu 1kHz lt 0 5 THD N Frequency Response Typically 0 1dB 20Hz to 20kHz Distortion THD N Typically 0 001 1kHz measured at 20dBu 10Hz to 80kHz filter Noise lt 90dBu 20Hz to 22kHz filter Mix Mode DAW Return Input to Mix Output Headroom gt 27dBu 1kHz lt 0 5 THD N Frequency Response Typically 0 1dB 20Hz to 20kHz Distortion THD N Typically 0 001 1kHz measured at 20dBu 10Hz to 80kHz filter lt 90dBu 20Hz to 20kHz filter no
25. gt ue Aux 5R ae WY ya y K 53 53 oggle Cycle sw DC gt 0 O gt R A Aux5 6 l Je o Aux 6L 2 ia Postg on pe gt Pi Lo gt Mix AMS Neve Ltd owns the copyright T 7 tl EE 3 Mon Post Sel a l a a e ENS TS SYS TEM BEOCK ECR 4 Mon Pre DC gt pe gt To Aux 6R for manufacture or otherwise Power up Mix disclosed michour prior written So aa consent o e company DEPOR US tee BUN a DRAWN CHECKED J APPROVED AMS Neve Lta IA AMS Neve Ltd 2006 Billington Road and PBI SUB s urnley Lancashire Englan VBDC Filename EB11731 sbk RAP Tel 44 1282 457011 Fax 44 1282 417282 31 07 12 DATE ISS AMS NEVE Drawing No EB11731 Sheet 2
26. Depending on how your Mac is configured at this point the Installer may ask you for a password before it can continue the install If so enter the password and click OK You will be informed that the Mac must reboot once the install has finished gt Click Continue Installation The install will start and the progress displayed gt Once the install has finished click Restart and the Mac will reboot Once it has rebooted the driver will be installed and ready to use 146 Software Operation gt When the Genesys console is running click Settings FireWire Setup to open the FireWire setup page Board Mapping This mapping only needs to be done once or when cards are added or removed or when the console is reconfigured Board Mapping Board Mapping s The screen only shows those cards that have been detected on boot up ra with DIP rneath Tts associated slave so for example on a 64 fader system that only has 3 Master and 3 Slave cards only the first three rows on screen will be available for mapping as Shown left Click the Board Mapping button to open the mapping screen Each Master card needs to have its dip switches set to unique settings Please turn to page 127 to see how to set the dip switch addressing In the console this Master card s associated Slave card must be in the immediate next 8 fader section without any other 8 fader sections in between For each of t
27. Install USB driver As the installation process begins a progress bar will appear left If an error message appears stating that installation has failed please repeat these steps again to Auto Install gt Once USB Driver installation is complete reconnect the 4081 USB cable ONLY gt Click OK Follow the on screen instructions until another progression bar appears showing the progress of the 4081 connection gt Once 4081 connection has been established you can reconnect all other USB cables 165 Overview of 4081 hrs mins frms Genesys Ch Assign Pro Tools PRE Setup USB Serial Options Ri R2 R3 R4 R5 ORG R7 R8 R9 RIO RM RIZO RIGO RIG RS R16 Porr ue OFF LINE OFF LINE OFF LINE OFF LINE OFF LINE OFF LINE OFF LINE OFF LINE G OFF LINE Y OFF LINE OFF LINE Y OFF LINE OFF LINE Y OF LINE OFF LINE EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE System Controlling 4081 from Genesys As the Genesys software starts up after power up it will automatically detect how many racks are connected and display this information at the bottom of the screen Click the 4081 Mic button on the Genesys screen to open up the software control and setup window shown to the left Under each of the numbered racks a small 4081 graphic will be displayed for each unit detected The word OFFLINE will be displayed where no unit has been detected Pio R2 Re nd Re RB Re Ra RG RAG Radic Res a RIA eb Once
28. Master Fader ccccsssccccccnncecccnsecnsennesenesenesennnennues 88 ST FaderSininia ada in 89 CUT SOLO ana ario 89 ARA DISP Van 89 MAIN MIX Fadesa aa 89 SEL GLID Edrene e eret ea 89 TRANSPORT Ke VS iii ica 89 MASTER AUTOMATION DuttOns cccccccecnecennnenees 89 KEYPAD iia 90 Meterbridge CHANNEL MeteFS c smicas a 91 MD os coca 91 MT add 91 A icwerancetycs daneatals a 91 SiG vssccgaeeheneaes O 91 OR aee aa toa on tian A E 91 REV RETURN MetersS sssceceeeeeseceennssecennsesesnnees 92 MEX Resta cei al ass 92 O ea oe 92 MASTER METER S CCtION ccccccccennnseccnssenesenesenneens 92 DA Waite 92 SOLD aa 92 11 USD ras 92 TalkbacieMici isis 92 O E E es A ETE 92 A OO 93 SE Er o S 93 PEA ON 93 O EE E A E E MTS CONT ROR cree OR TOE eee re oe 93 DAWN tico bass 93 PSU STATUS 0 AS 93 BO E E er dewisier siutiwe E A 96 ECONO laa 96 To create a link of EQS ococccccccncccnaran anna 97 To Interrogate EQ LiNkS 0 o ccoocccccoccccccnnnnnnnnnnnn o 98 To Copy EQ Settings From One Path To Another 98 DIN ol 99 COMpresSO russian as di 99 Locat UMK MOGO aia rai tries 100 Global Link MIO GO Sour as 100 FLES ESDUTONS as enaa ite aeeiee eens 100 Gate Expander aaa 101 Els ES DU ON Sai a 101 2 TREK Gee ere ae na os RN ee aR ee eee eee oe 102 Group MOB rta 102 MIE dad is 102 DA Wisin dra 103 Setting Sapa 104 ES SENGS aena o adase 104 OF TO MON da 104 SUD TO DOWNMIX aaa 104 NO at seks cath anne AEN amie el
29. Opti LD A O P ooo DH A AA 09 SE L e gt Ins 2 i priona l i l A A SN SS ee Se Se A AS l gt EQ gt To Aux Pre Post cut control To Ye A tr I I Mix gt do A Ch I P oi DAW Meters gt Vu Channel Option gt Ins 1 Switching l Daw Send gt D a Meter l BA ee ee pee a I gt Mon VLi red Daw Reto iy PPM i EQ l DAW Control ai 26 L l o Send amp Return gt Chan Mic gt o al Sht 5 loc 8 gt e i Pt o l 3 Q E SE i Yel T L d t Line gt do Spt lt CH i 0 Red 0 e on Lo lt CH 1 p g rm i KaRed E B l l i l i Daw gt qo L Sp lt DAW Send Mode Master a i f i I L al gan E VU PPM Peak 26 T ho Peak hold Dim Set J Masters DLN L L o lt DAW Ret I l l l Sig Led E o A E A A eee da ood ae ig Le yn l Mon I P Stage X Send amp Return E et dp o 4 4 Daw E Send a a q A aa A OI A ARAS AA Lat l Chan Pre Cut Pre Fad E Ee re a H gt gt To 8f SIG lt l Mon Pre Cut Pre Fade gt gt D l l o Si ox 1 Ta 5 To Monit gt Grn 1 amp 9 Compressor o Fader and l in cut VP2 g Sig Bus Yel 508 091 i Red 1048 gt Link to next ch i l Z an SoftWare To SIG Led l gt Control and Direct La Lat l o p Sel l l l q l l l l C
30. Sets the monitoring and controls the various sources sent to the loudspeakers AUX 1 6 gt Lights yellow when selected and will send that Aux outputs to the speakers Aux 1 4 to MON L amp R Aux 5 and 6 L amp R to MON L amp R respectively CUE 1 8 CUE 2 When selected will light yellow and send that Cue outputs to the loudspeakers MIX When selected will light yellow and send the Main buss output to the speakers 8T gt Lights yellow when selected and sends the 8T mix to the loudspeakers The setup to determine which 8T goes to which loudspeaker is done by either putting the Monitor Panel into Master SEL Mode or from the on screen Settings Setup page and using the 8T to MON matrix 2T gt Lights yellow and selects the 2T mixer output to the main monitoring Will only work if INT is also selected and is always interlocked with 8T even when in Sum mode In non SUM mode all the above buttons above will be interlocked In SUM mode any combination of the above can be heard The AUX CUE MIX 2T and 8T buttons form the internal monitor will only be heard if INT is selected and Externals 1 to 4 will only be heard if EXT is selected EXT 1 amp EXT 2 When selected will light yellow and selects either of the 6 wide External inputs to the monitor system gt For EXT 2 pressing the button again will light the D EXT led as well so the 2nd set of 6 wide External paths will be taken from the AD DA cassette
31. Windows XP DAW CoOmputer ccceeeeeeeeeaues 27 Windows Vista DAW Computer cccceeeeeeees 28 DAW Control over Ethernet Driver ipMIDI 28 Windows Vista 7 DAW Computer 06 29 Mac OS X DAW COmputerr ccceceeeeeeeee eee eee 29 Modules OVCrVviCW ssssccccccsnnssseeesccesnnnesesnusesauueess 30 Channel 1a put ModUlBuaii n da 30 Rev Return MOdule ccccceceeceseeseneeeeneteeentenaaes 30 Dynamics Cassettes EQ Cassettes AD DA Cassettes Channel Meter panel cccccccecescucureesuceenauenaes 30 Console Hardware ConsideratiOns sceessseenesnues 30 REMOVING MOCUIES cceceeeeeeeseessneneeeeeesseeeuanes 30 Inserting Modules ciirsa inai aa 30 FIOLDIUGGING soriana dos 31 Genesys Power Up Down 19Procedure sssccssssess 32 Power Up Procedure cccssseeeecceesscesseneeneeeeenteuas 32 Power DOWN ProOCe CUure sssccccecesecseneeeeeeeenseeues 32 Master SEL MO Boissier 33 Master SEL Mode on the Channel Strip 33 Master SEL Mode on the 8T Section 33 Master SEL Mode on the Monitor Panel 33 An Overview of the Genesys Signal Flow 35 Recording in Stereo and 37 Mixing In SUFFOU Dd 39 Configuring Genesys for Surround cocccocccono ros 39 Routing Monitor Path 10 6 to 8T 5 6 39 Routing Monitor Path 1 16 to 8T8 o 39 Pan NINO cas uvenuaveeiuns seunuias 40 Surround Setup to hear the su
32. click on Filing then click Save Starting the Download Procedure gt To automatically check and update the Genesys software from the main screen click System then click Check for Updates 192 Neve Genesys Software Update N Checking Online for an Update Please Wait Neve Genesys Software Update Em s You already have the latest version of Genesys Software Please check for updates again later Neve Genesys Software Update wD 4n update for the Genesys is available to download J P Your Versionis V3 3 Build 6 Latest Version is 3 3 Build 7 Please Read the Release Notes for the Latest Version see below Note Fir re updates to the console Before updating it is recommended that you save backup a snapshot of the console via the Filing menu Proceed with the download Yes No 02 February 2012 Build 7 EP v6 0 Build 25 FireWire Fixes Improvements Please Note Build 6 changes below 08 December 2011 Build 6 EP v6 0 Build 25 if GUI Improvements New Main Screen and Buttons Downloading Genesys Software Version V3 3 Build 7 Please Wait Voz Neve Genesys Software Update 23 y The latest Genesys Software has been downloaded and is ready to install Genesys Software needs to exit to install the new software Do you want to install it now AN Setup Genesys Applications ej a Welcome to the Genesys Applications Setup Wizard Thi
33. i DAW Control i AAA AS ES A E E A D A i hg a Re ns ht Re Ne AO A a aa aly A A he Sa See Sa la onto ga EP Ne TEN ee th pen em See A E E ar A IT ode Erte aR tet ag Ohya Ai ap Ro BET het cont ey Mle ptt Rye dE hd ee Aux1 amp 2 D Toggle Cycle Aux1 amp 2 on Q Grn Aux2 Sel Q MN ARANA O A A A E E SS A RA RAS I re 1 Pres Yel Aux 1 2 gt a host a a AUX MASTER 0 P S Power up ae gt Ur ae en eee i Default Aux1 amp 2 on Sel l DC gt O00 A Tae ogee ve tgs A Aux6 Sel Q Yel z po Auni L Aux gt Optional ADC i S Ad cee gt FS h i o E rx From A gt gt STe ah Esa From Aux gt Z y p gt Aux 1 0 P Ny Mo Gn on Rene e E a de as gt Cue Mix Mtr and Mon From Mixdown master gt moegi i rado 7 fe gt mae 1 Posta Sel o nd A IN A E From CH Mix L Power up t A ee N oper eee gt Optional ADC i p F CH Mix R Default From Rev 1 4 R gt gt AN pom l Trom AUX gt gt CD gt Aux 2 O P l F e rn on gt Cue Mix Mtr and Mon pc gt _56 _ tet te eee A a E Yel Q MASTER MIX D P S Av i gt Optional ADC i p I E ae OS gt lt D gt TL Aux 3 0 P A O RE EN ES ES A A AR ANA AAA A A A ee i l l a rs o A a oe x NL Bee Ea ol Fhe ee St nN a l gt Monitor Sel and Cue Mix L mR on Ea LS Cue Mix Mtr and Mon G Mix L INS ON i i lt lt Mix Tone gt 2T Meter Sel oc gt S3 Grn l l l Lat gt O OAC gt sae E
34. if present instead All the Externals buttons will interlock unless SUM is selected EXT 3 8 EXT 4 When selected will light yellow and select either of the Stereo External inputs to the monitor system Externals 5 20 Option Extra Externals are available 5 20 for monitoring purposes rs NB This feature requires supporting hardware so will not available on all consoles Before accessing these extra monitoring inputs please ensure the EXT button is lit on the Monitoring panel These extra externals are accessed by pressing the RTE SEL button this will open the standard routing screen and then pressing both of the arrow buttons underneath together This will open the Externals screen The and gt buttons on the ROUTE SEL section of the Monitor Panel set the function of the 1 8 routing buttons either setting their function to Externals 5 12 button lit or 13 20 gt button lit A yellow highlight bar will appear around the block of externals that are currently assigned to buttons 1 8 The 1 8 routing buttons will now turn the corresponding external in that block on or off gt Button 1 will turn Ext 5 or Ext 13 on or off gt Button 2 will turn Ext 6 or Ext 14 on or off etc If the SUM button is not pressed the selection of Externals will be interlocked If the SUM button is pressed it will be possible to listen to more than one External at a time In this case there is no limit t
35. l ah a j l g OA lt fo gt H gt l Yy lt lt l l fi Mix R gt oo 4 o gt 1 s i i rel 33 dh 0 A E A Ite a RMON SAFE oc n Yel lt 8T CH MON O lt AR gt Y GRES EXT 1 4 S ves os SAFE sare SAFE ta silt rae As VL DC gt O O vel CRM L gt o t o LD lt From Ext 1 4 Sel L 1 Mom DC gt el ejl l CH SAFE ar Hr D aa O iS Pct ate oe Pm L Po 31 07 12 1 Toggle Cycle Latch DC gt _ ACHIEVED WITH SOFTWARE AND LOGIC CIRCUITRY iss l l gt K CRM R gt oe 1 Mixo o Pe ak lt From Ext 1 4 Sel R ein Sale MOD DATE ISS i 2 CRM i Ny Cuel TB DC gt Lat AMS Neve Ltd owns the copyright 3 l Power up al Pl l gt pyrig Jl En 58 lt a0 era cos Title GENESYS SYSTEM BLOCK LCR AMS Cue 1 shown Cue 2 similar disclosed without prior written NEVE l l l VBDC Filename FR11731 sbk consent of the company DRAWN CHECKED JAPPROVED AMS Neve Ltd AMS Neve Ltd 2006 Billington Road RAP Burnley Lancashire England BB11 5UB Tel 44 1282 457011 Fax 44 1282 417282 Ext 1 6 gt
36. on the console rear will be fitted with blank panels instead SMN 812 411 EQ SMN 812 412 DYNAMICS SMN 812 409 AD DA I LL J IL J E L O L JL JL L JL J O J L J O U ya 2 oh E CHANNEL AES RX DLINE AES RX DMON 1 2 ze S OUT MASTER AES TX DAW SEND AES SYNC IN OUT sa L Bee PREMRE E N Roc CIL SE Y ES O gg Id A IS NS 21 Monitoring Digital Converter System Part number SMN 812 410 m k AAAA J gt EL o PL KY he ge Aut KF J i OO 2 i SVIDEO RCA y E A J I JI JE JI I Ji Ik ct ti g n os O O O E e A o O H e fR j AES TX 8T AES TX AUX 2T L R ele Ly R OUT IN Baur IN cur MONITOR AES RX DEXT AES SYNC IN OUT 2T I P SERIAL FIREWIRE WORDCLO This single card regardless of console size enables the Main Mix 2T 8T and Auxiliary Sends to be sent from the desk digitally as well as accepting a 5 1 Digital Surround External into the monitoring system to be sent to the loudspeakers It is sub fitted beneath the computer card and consists of 2 x 25 way D type connectors for AES plus FireWire connector as well as BNC connectors for digital sync I
37. or Post the Pan control If the Pan led is lit red then the audio will be Post pan and will rely on the pan control to determine how much of the signal is sent to those routed destinations If a signal is sent to 8Ts 1 2 and 7 and the route is Post pan with Pan in the centre position the audio will be sent to 8T7 Centre with a 9dB drop in signal sent equally to 8Ts 1 and 2 This 9dB divergence between Centre and Left amp Right is fixed If the Pan led is lit yellow then audio will be Post pan and will rely on the pan control to determine how much of the signal is sent to those routed destinations If a signal is sent to 8Ts 1 and 2 and the route is Post pan with Pan in the centre position the audio will be sent to 8T1 Left and 8T2 right equally with a 4dB drop in signal sent equally to 8Ts 1 and 2 If the Pan led is not lit then the route will be sent Pre pan and therefore rely solely on the routing as a mono source If a signal is sent to 8Ts 1 2 and 7 pre pan the audio will be sent equally to 8Ts 1 2 and 7 If an independent level into the Centre or Sub is needed then as discussed the auxes in conjunction with either the gt 8T7 gt 8T8 buttons can be used These buttons divert the Aux feed away from the Aux busses and into either the 8T7 or 8T8 path This allows for subs and solid centres to be created with no panning involved Surround Setup to hear the surround mix in the console loudspeakers us
38. to its original position on VGA 2 if the cable was moved to VGA 1 gt Power On the console gt The console will start Windows and the Genesys software will launch automatically The console software will now be at factory default settings IMPORTANT If any additional software has been installed since purchase i e Encore or Recall you may need to reinstall and re enter the software licenses In order to do this contact AMS Neve for technical support 200 Audio Monitoring Boards Accessible from the rear of the console the Monitor Boards handle the Cue mixes Inserts Outputs and have various trims and system connectors in place The majority of the signals that appear on the connectors on these boards do not appear on the 25 way D type connectors Regardless of the console size all of the following four Monitor boards and four rev returns will always be present in the same configuration Viewed from the rear from Left to Right these boards are Monitor Board 4 Cue mix lo Two jack sockets each handle the Left and Right of each Cue Mix SZ f Eh dp haat There is also a jack socket for the Return Talkback mic the adjacent trim pot providing OdB to 40dB of trim OOOOOOO0 The 15 way D type female socket fitted to Monitor Board on the extreme right hand rear of the console provides access to the DC Remote Control functions of the console as well as the producers microphon
39. 15 way D type 1 Red O 0 7v 2 Green O 0 7v 3 Blue 0 0 7v 4 N C 5 Digital ground 6 Red Return Analogue ground 7 Green Return Analogue ground 8 Blue Return Analogue ground 9 N C 10 Digital ground 11 N C 12 N C 13 Horizontal sync TTL 14 Vertical sync TIL 15 N C 209 Relays 1 amp 2 are a closing set of contacts operated by the EXT button on the Genesys keypad This facility is used for switching the VGA feeds one each from Genesys and the DAW to enable the system to operate on one TFT screen for both machines Monitor Section Connectors The five pairs of D type connectors shown here will be present on every console regardless of console size Jo JJ Jo of Jom MONITOR EXTERNALS LS 0 PS MONITOR MSERTS COASGLE OUTPUTS AT INSERTION Monitor External Inputs 1 amp 3 25 way D type Signal Name ita Hi Lo Screen 1 External 1 Input Left 24 12 25 2 External 1 Input Right 10 23 11 3 External 1 Input Centre 21 9 22 4 External 1 Input Sub 7 20 8 5 External 1 Input Left Surround 18 6 19 6 External 1 Input Right Surround 4 17 5 7 External 3 Input Left 15 3 16 8 External 3 Input Right 1 14 2 Monitor External Inputs 2 amp 4 25 way D type Signal Name ie Hi Lo Screen 1 External 2 Input Left 24 12 25 2 External 2 Input Right 10 23 11 3 Exte
40. 15 way D type DC Remotes 15 way D type Reverb Returns IMR L R Inputs Ya TRS Jack sockets All other line level Inputs Outputs 25 way D type DA 88 convention Return Talkback Mic Input Ya TRS Jack sockets 207 Console Connector pin outs Computer Cassette JC a l IL I Jt j VGA 1 o 0 Ta AC JOK SVIDEO RCA pr gt 2 1394 RS485 FN i 105 00000 E a e II lll C mnn ee ee a eee DC CI N ZO CS ET 9 248 Y AES TX BT AES TX AUX 2T L R MIX L R re MONITOR AES RX DEXT AES SYNC OUT 2T p SERIAL ARES MRE Siea USB 1 5v Red 2 Data White 3 Data Green 4 GND Black Mouse 1 Data 2 N C 3 GND 4 5v 5 Data Clock 6 N C Shell Shield Keyboard 1 Keyboard data 5v signal level 2 Keyboard reset not used 3 Ground Ov 4 5v 5 Keyboard clock 5v signal 6 N C Shell Shield RJ 45 Twisted pair networking 1 TX 2 TX 3 RX 4 BD3 5 BD3 6 RX 7 BD4 8 BD4 Timecode XLR 208 Screen 2 Hi Lo RS 232 9 pin D type 1 Ext RS 485 Data 2 Ext RS 485 Data 3 NC 4 Reserved 5 Signal Ground 6 Relay Contact 1 7 Relay Contact 2 8 NC 9 Reserved VGA Hi density
41. 25 24 12 2 AES RX 2 DLINE 3 4 11 10 23 3 AES RX 3 DLINE 5 6 22 21 9 4 AES RX 4 DLINE 7 8 8 7 20 5 AES TX 1 Direct Output 1 2 19 18 6 6 AES TX 2 Direct Output 3 4 5 4 17 7 AES TX 3 Direct Output 5 6 16 15 3 8 AES TX 4 Direct Output 7 8 2 1 14 129 AES RX DMON Connector Sign l hame Pin number Shield Hi Low 1 AES RX 1 DMON 1 2 25 24 12 2 AES RX 2 DMON 3 4 11 10 23 3 AES RX 3 DMON 5 6 22 21 9 4 AES RX 4 DMON 7 8 8 7 20 5 r E a 6 7 E 8 a Channel Slave Audio Link These should only ever be connected to the corresponding port of the same name on the associated Master card 1 to 1 2 to 2 and 3 to 3 Please see section on Cabling starting on page 140 130 Monitor Section Overview PE O10 LIL IN 8T AES TX AUX 2T L R MIX L R OUT ie T AES TX ma MONITOR AES RX DEXT AES SYNC IN OUT 2T I P FIREWIRE ORDCLO This card provides e The 8T Outputs sent digitally in stereo pairs e A 5 1 Digital externals Input to the monitoring system All Aux Sends sent digitally in pairs for mono auxes e 2T mix input e MIX L R sent digitally e AES Sync Input and Output e 1x Serial In and 2 x Serial Out connectors for daisy chaining communication purposes e 2x FireWire ports for daisy chaining purposes e Wordclock In Out BNC connectors If this card is set to be the sync master it can ta
42. 4 amp P keys When pressed they are used to scroll up down the Channels 8Ts and Revs so you are able to route them to the 8T and Mix Outputs This routing information will be displayed on screen e The Routing system on the Monitor Panel does not form part of the Store system Only a route present or absent when the store is created will be recalled e If routes have already been made then scrolling through the paths will display those routes where appropriate If selecting Rev Returns to be routed to the 8Ts e Rev 1 can only be routed to 8T 1 2 e Rev 2 can only be routed to 8T 3 4 e Rev 3 can only be routed to 8T 5 amp 6 e Rev 4 can only be routed to 8T 7 8 Routes can also be created or removed by clicking on the relevant junctions on the Routing Screen display as shown left 68 gt For later LCR Stereo channel strips you can send all of the Channel Inputs or MON Returns to the Left and Right of the Main Mix buss by clicking the MIX L R after selecting the CHANNELS tab or MONITOR tab button see image to the left For earlier stereo other types of channel strips you can send all of the Channel Inputs or DAW Returns to the Left and Right of the Main Mix buss by clicking the CH MIX or MON MIX button When routing to the 8T busses on earlier stereo modules it is only possible to feed the channel path monitor path or a split of the 8T fed from the channel or monitor path at one time See
43. 42 50 63 O OS ee ad Lock Monitor Levels coca iaa 105 O Logic Preferentes 177 LOg C A nit ciasatenc Gasdataceetiaiet aaa icoutedion 174 0 gO EEE 123 157 ERA Onis 81 ON sssr ii PE AS 95 A A A E 16 60 61 OnChip Device FUNCtiON coocconnonoconnnnanonnnnannnnnnoos 197 E A testo 42 Operating Level ssssssssssrssrrrrrrrrrrrnnrrnrrtrnnnnne 124 ESEE Sae e A E E peas seateact neue 104 ORDA da 16 48 LS Settings SCr N ccecececcececccceceececetececcerseceeenas 77 OSC ranr delia EEA 203 Eo E a A A 77 104 A RO 106 203 E A O 16 81 OS Cs PRO iaa a ad 61 BS RS leh arene a cncneanashegreen ty anaaces 77 OSC LEVEL eeeteeet tet e tee t teeter ree eee tent ties 60 LS RS Speaker ocn e no ne e loe O crs 104 Osc to 21 a a 60 106 A 81 Osc With Slate er ie 83 106 PT ha aa A ee ted pte icin eth eas ide Eee 17 95 OSGCINAUOR umd cdi 113 M P FA 37 76 80 POD dai 93 DID pe ote tian tia han eae eat cada hee ae 16 PAD ai 46 MIO Pri aan oa 37 PAN o eee AROS A A 76 80 83 PANJ BALL anal 55 229 Panel DiSPla daweuue caveauseaReumends 120 PAN Ria cda 171 PAINS oi aida 171 180 188 PANS DUO Nissan 180 Paris ON TAGETS nia a a 180 PASA a E A eee owas 97 PAN a MES a aaa 154 a E AE A A tain EE ia ran N E weno 157 PEA Rania 93 A natee setae dudteue de acatetaes 16 64 65 76 78 105 Phantom POWER 46 POS a 46 Phase ansiada daa 75 PINK MOIS Sida 61 203 PLA Miradas 89 173 183 191 PET oaea aa A 16 171 181 189 A A 6
44. 53 55 58 Midi DOES lid 174 Ed A EA paiement 122 Midi TING COGS riiccini a tad 169 174 184 Mii iaa is 22 J A susrrianatit 37 62 63 64 72 73 91 152 Jumper SettiNgS ccccceccccecccuceceuceeuceceeeaneeaeenes 136 MIX TINS CRS eo a alos 203 MDL Ranes ea 223 K MOS ERsiaaia ans 69 92 111 131 132 O 20 101 224 dd A A a oe Vi nina AAN A 5 KEV DOE PP A AET 17 Momentary MOde cccccccesscececcseccececceeeceeueeees 54 65 MON aaa 16 35 37 48 55 68 L Mon Level Controlan 52 A E A S PA EE E EEPE AA came E A Saute eee ee ee 47 MON MX 69 111 Rina as 47 MON SAF Bik iventastesaviaeseeutranswetwaneees 37 64 65 75 76 LPR PAN ia tema nies 59 MONItOF TAPUE lt Aaa 39 kast Store Made aee A EEE AEAT AEREE 106 MONItOLr Panal cc cccccccccccccuccuccucucceccucuncececucuce 33 113 TRC A a pewter o auton a aa 37 65 Monitor SOCCtION cc cece cc cc cc cccccucuccuccuccuccucuucuucce 114 152 Latening MOde sons 54 MONTTOR TD a daa 69 TE E e PC REG air A T EEE E T AE 39 111 Monitor to BS Til ta a e Gos ht e e De 105 LCR PAN ocaconononcnacanannnnnnnnncara near rc 39 111 MI E 44 Lert SUTTON eieiei ra 41 75 MONO AEE T RE 55 71 77 80 Legacy Driver vocera inini ieun TEE DK NENO n anise 155 MOUSE a a en a aS 17 Lic ada a A Ea T A 35 NEET E ENE N EEEN EET O E T 16 IN sardina 65 MT Eat 95 EN aaa 16 47 63 MTC Ethernet MIDI cearn a cersawhageecn 108 Eo Sn AA 96 MTRS 16 91 Edad tardar dadas 109 DAD aaa lia da 67 115 N Local Link Moderna LNE 100 Eele 33
45. 7 20 8 5 Auxiliary Output 5 Left 18 6 19 6 Auxiliary Output 5 Right 4 17 5 7 Auxiliary Output 6 Left 15 3 16 8 Auxiliary Output 6 Right 1 14 2 e213 MONITOR EXTERWALS LS DPS MONMOR NMSERTS COASOLE OUTPUTS AT INSERTION 8T Insert Send 25 way D type Signal Name di Hi Lo Screen 1 8T 1 Insert Send 24 12 25 2 8T 2 Insert Send 10 23 11 3 8T 3 Insert Send 21 9 22 4 8T 4 Insert Send 7 20 8 5 8T 5 Insert Send 18 6 19 6 8T 6 Insert Send 4 17 5 7 8T 7 Insert Send 15 3 16 8 8T 8 Insert Send 1 14 2 8T Insert Return 25 way D type Signal Name ili Hi Lo Screen 1 8T 1 Insert Return 24 12 25 2 8T 2 Insert Return 10 23 11 3 8T 3 Insert Return 21 9 22 4 8T 4 Insert Return 7 20 8 5 8T 5 Insert Return 18 6 19 6 8T 6 Insert Return 4 17 5 7 8T 7 Insert Return 15 3 16 8 8T 8 Insert Return 1 14 2 214 Channel Section Connectors As shown here these 4 pairs of 25 way D type connectors will be present for every 8 fader section The block of faders served by these D types is indicated by the Block plate in the centre this will say either 1 8 9 16 etc The pin outs are identical for the same function within different blocks of faders is a A w a Quo o fase a fOseo o C oen a oon AU oe fP2 TAPE MEH INS Z INS 1 I P2 Tape Monitor Send Can be used as another input for I P2
46. 8 7 20 5 Main Mix L amp R Output 19 18 6 6 2T L amp R Output 5 4 17 7 AES Sync OUT 16 15 3 8 AES Sync IN 2 1 14 These are AES Sync I O connections only not audio paths 2T jack wiring Both the 2T L and R jack sockets have the same wiring Tip Hot Ring Cold Sleeve Ground 132 1 Co a Co DEBUG SERIAL RESET WCK 75Q Switchblock Contains 4 switches the first three of which should be set as shown left Debug For AMS Neve use only In normal operation this switch should be in the down position Serial Enables the communications to be daisy chained and must be set to the up position Reset For AMS Neve use only In normal operation this switch should be in the down position WCK 75 Set this switch to the up position if you have Wordclock sync coming into this card This will terminate the Wordclock input signal If not always set to the down position 133 Genesys FireWire Driver If you have purchased the cards at the same time as the console this driver will already be installed in which case please skip this section Installing the driver manually should not be required if you have Genesys software Version 3 3 Build 7 or above The following Auto Install FireWire USB Serial Driver sub section should be all that is needed If after several attempts the driver fails to install then it can be manually downloaded and installed by f
47. 8T faders are referred to in the pull down list of options as Master gt Repeat for all the other available MIDI Ports and fader blocks on the console NB This mapping must match that set in Nuendo Cubase The same MIDI Port cannot be used more than once including the one set for Midi Timecode The 8 block of faders can only be linked to a single MIDI Port and not repeated The DAW control is limited to controlling a maximum of 48 Nuendo Cubase tracks or 6 MIDI Ports this does not include the MIDI Port used for MTC gt Once set click OK Follow the on screen instructions to re launch the software to apply the new changes Nuendo Cubase Setup gt In your DAW open the Devices Setup dialogue from Devices menu gt Click the button in the top left of the screen and select Mackie Control You need to setup the DAW MIDI Ports in reverse order to correctly assign the DAW tracks to Genesys The following assumes you have a 16 channel Genesys console and the Genesys software has been set to 1 8 as MIDI Port 1 and 9 16 as MIDI Port 2 gt Change the MIDI Input and MIDI Output to xx Ethernet MIDI Where xx is the last assigned MIDI Port in the Genesys software In this case select 02 Ethernet MIDI gt Click the Apply button gt Click the Reset button gt Click the button and select Mackie Control gt Change the MIDI Input and MIDI Output to 01 Ethernet MIDI gt Click Apply then click Reset
48. AUX 2T L R MIX L R R OUT IN OUT 1 DE Px IN OUT MONITOR AES RX DEXT AES SYNC IN OUT 2T I P SERIAL FIREWIRE ones WORDCLOCK FireWire 1 amp 2 J 14 and J 15 1 Power Voltage VP 2 Power Ground VG 3 TPB O 4 TPB O 5 TPA O 6 TPA O 7 Shield 1 8 Shield 2 AES TX 8T AES RX DEXT 25 way D type Connector Pin Signal name number Shield Hi Low 1 5 1 External L amp R input 25 24 12 2 5 1 External C 4 Sub input 11 10 23 3 5 1 External Ls amp Rs input 22 21 9 4 gt gt 5 8T 1 amp 2 Output 19 18 6 6 8T 3 amp 4 Output 5 4 17 7 8T 5 amp 6 Output 16 15 3 8 8T 7 amp 8 Output 2 1 14 222 AES TX AUX 2T L8 R MIX L 8 R AES SYNC In Out 25 way D type Connector A Pin number Shield Hi Low 1 Aux 1 8 2 Output 25 24 12 2 Aux 3 4 Output 11 10 23 3 Aux 5 L 8 R Output 22 21 9 4 Aux 6 L amp R Output 8 7 20 5 Main Mix L amp R Output 19 18 6 6 2T L amp R Output 5 4 17 7 AES Sync OUT 16 15 3 8 AES Sync IN 2 1 14 e These are AES Sync I O connectors only and do not handle audio Serial Connectors Three CAT5 ports using standard off the shelf cables e 2x IN e 1x OUT 2T Inputs Both the L and R jack sockets have the same wiring Tip Hot Ring Cold Sleeve Ground 223 Optional Dynamics Cassette SMN 812 412 Ea ES Et BE BS 8H BS MOHITCH AED RX DEAT Key Input 25 way D type
49. All 3 l IVL From Afl H l l l Mix bus R gt gt T gt O a z gt 2T L amp R gt T gt To LR a From PFL ue ERIN eee REO RTB ix t gt Z l Level J Mix bus Si To Ext Sel AA we he a a he and Int Ext rel 69 RTB IP O LD d SX 1 o Je e SPK Folddowns 14 Sd i 2T L amp R i 0 to 50dB _lq gt Mix L amp R Aux 1 Aux 2 Aux 3 Aux 4 Aux 5 Aux 6 Cue 1 L amp R Cue 2 L amp R L with 8T l A o Ye Q re QS Yel Ya QS Ye Ye OS Ye Ye 6 Ye ve lt o x x x x x x x i eae To ST lt gt SoftWare 31 07 12 1 le Jo je je fe Je Je Je Jo e DC Setup K i MOD DATE ISS i l l l i l l AMS Neve Ltd th ight l j eve owns the copyrig to this d ing It t t Te sas a Ee aaa ene EROS sa ae ace toe FAA AEREA tote dre gt REE GENESYS SYSTEM BLOCK LCR 489 AMS NEVE consent of the company DRAWN CHECKED JAPPROVED AMS Neve Ltd GC AMS Neve Ltd 2006 Billington Road RAP Burnley Lancashire England BB11 5UB Drawing No Sheet Tel 44 1282 457011 Fax 44 1282 417282 VBDC Filename FR11731 sbk EB11731 6
50. An E y ea y y NE o s o y la e ane _ So jo 5 a E A a 7 At j 5 ner A RIA Ol og 8T Rev Returns This is nominally split into 1 Everything above the Aux section including the Aux masters 2 Aux section shaded with grey background 3 Everything below the Aux section 114 Saving a Recall file In effect a Recall file is the same as a Snapshot file so the Save procedure is the same for both gt On the Monitor Panel press the SAVE button and the Filing dialogue will open gt Click Save on screen and a naming dialogue will open allowing you to Enter Snapshot Name name the Recall file before you save it SNSS Set As Custom A file name must be unique and you will be warned if you select a name already in use The Set As Custom tickbox is not currently implemented If you are logged onto Automation the Recall file will be saved in the lowest level folder the Mix folder for ease of access This also means that when Automation folders are backed up to an archive they will automatically contain the Recall files associated with it gt Name the file and press Return on the keyboard The file will be saved while a screen indicates the progress Once it has been saved a screen will inform you if the operation has been Snapshot Saved Successfully succes sfu Click OK to close Replaying a Recall file gt On the Monitor panel press the LOAD button and the
51. Apple Logic Pro Setup gt On the Logic DAW from the menu bar at the top of the screen click Logic Pro Preferences Control Surfaces Setup At the top of the screen select New Install You will be presented with a list of possible DAW Master Controllers gt Select the Mackie Designs Mackie Control Logic Control entry and click Add gt Once added click on the Mackie Control icon and at the top of the left hand pane set the Input and Out Port port to Port 1 or whatever was set in the Genesys software for the first block of 8 tracks The Input Out Port port parameters for the DAW Master Controller and each DAW Extender Controller must match port for port with that set in the Genesys software gt On the Logic DAW from the menu bar at the top of the screen again click Logic Pro Preferences Control Surfaces Setup At the top of the screen select New Install This time select Mackie Designs Mackie Control Extender Logic 174 AMEE a JJHARARAAT e e GIL Control and click Add This will add an 8 track Extender controller surface to the Master Controller A screen may inform you that there is already a Mackie controller click OK to close this warning gt Click on the newly created icon and at the top of the left hand pane select the Input and Out Port port to Port 2 or whatever was set in the Genesys software for the second block of 8 tracks
52. Ch V Pot after changing the send destination We will now change the Genesys console surface layout to control the Aux Sends in Channel View mode gt Make sure the F5 button is not on i e FLIP is off If FLIP is on press F5 to turn it off gt AUX mode first starts up in Mixer View We need to change the AUX mode to Channel View Press AUX button until you see the following text on the top most line on the Genesys software Send Channel View Channel View allows you to edit all the Send parameters for a single DAW track laid out across the Genesys console surface Send Destination Send Level Send Position Pre Post Post Pan Send Mute Press the fader SEL button for Logic track 1 or the first assigned DAW track You are now controlling Send parameters for track 1 You will see the top right corner display indicator change to O1 if not already to indicate you have selected track 1 The fader SEL button will also flash gt F1 F2 or the fader SEL buttons are used to select which DAW track you are controlling gt F3 and F4 buttons are used to shift the the Send Destination Level Position Mute parameters for each Send slot on the selected track up down the console surface For example on a 16 channel Genesys console with the faders 1 8 and 9 16 mapped to the DAW control and with track 1 selected the control surface will be laid out across the console in the following manner Send 1 Faders Ch V Pots 1 4 Destin
53. Cue 1 Post fader Red e Cue 1 Pre fader Red e Cue 2 Pre fader Green e Cue 2 Post fader Green e Both Cues Post fader Yellow e Both Cues Pre fader Yellow The Rev level control will be still be available in Master SEL mode so it will be possible to audition the audio on the Cues via AFL as you set them to the above states gt At any point in the cycle press RTE SEL to exit Master SEL Mode to apply these changes 56 AUX MASTERS Section AUX 2 WST AUX 3 NST MIX Section AUX 4 MST AUX 5 MST AUX 6 WUST Master Send Sets the Master Send level for each Aux and runs from o to OdB Press to toggle the Master Send on or off The adjacent led will light to show the send is On HEADPHONES Section IMR Sets and controls the Insert Mix Return level Press to enable the led will light When using the IMR Insert across the Main Mix Output it is possible to listen to a mix of the Main Output and the Insert Mix Return This control has a range of 0 of IMR hard Left to 100 of IMR hard Right If this control is not enabled you will hear 100 of the main insert Return signal PRE gt Sets whether the Insert is patched Pre or Post the Main Mix fader INS gt Switches the Insert In Out of circuit HEADPHONES Master Send Sets the level and source of the feed to the headphone jack socket situated on the underside of the console buffer nea
54. DAW encoders are controlling TRANSPORT The Transport buttons on the Master 8T fader panel on the Genesys control the transport in the DAW There are four buttons REWIND FAST FORWARD STOP PLAY and RECORD Press and hold the REWIND and FAST FORWARD buttons to control their function Each button lights to confirm the function has been selected SOLO CUT Pressing the SOLO CUT buttons above the Genesys faders will solo mute tracks in your DAW 191 Remote Genesys Software Update You can at any time with the Genesys software check for the latest updates to the software and be enjoying new and powerful features for your Genesys console In order to successfully check for updates your console must be connected to the internet If you have already connected the Genesys via your studio network or a hub with the ethernet connection then you may already have an internet connection If you have setup your console to connect to your DAW computer with a cross over direct linked cable then you will need to change the network IP address settings on the console to allow it to connect to the internet this will also depend on what settings your Internet Service Provider ISP requires for a valid connection contact your ISP if this is the case Please see the Genesys Computer Settings for DAW Control section on page 25 and change the settings either to gt Obtain an IP DNS address automatically or gt Manually cha
55. De O Qe Ce O Co OO wa ro kwo wa vwa fro w jro fro ro wo wo fro e A le a Et lew i El e 5 is i 5 i ish D 00 OO OO OO OO OO OJO OO OO DO DO OO OD OO DODOOOOOODDO Er Y at a nh ii i E i ON A SU O i a a a ot at W a e i W it W it ft mi w AAA O CAE AL AE A A nl an Lie BTS BT4 Ara aT ETA sde Boedo b amp A 16 fader console as shown here will have e Six Auxes four mono two stereo e A stereo mix buss e Two stereo monitoring speaker sets e Two 5 1 monitoring speaker sets e 16 channels of Neve mic line amplifiers e 32 channels of DAW mixing e 8 mono Groups e 1 Main output e 4 stereo effects returns e 16 Channel 8 Track or 2 Track metering e 2 Cue mixes e Full talkback capability e Internal power supply units e Expandable to 64 channels either in straight or wedge formation e USB flash drive for Store Load amp Reset functionality e Hands on DAW control for Pro Tools Nuendo more e Full console instant Reset e Digitally controlled EQ and Dynamics 1084 EQ circuitry and 88R style Dynamics e Motorised 8T and Main Output faders with DAW control e 16 CH Analogue DAW Monitor e Optional Recall module so all rotary control positions can be stored and reset e Optional EQ Dynamics cassettes 8 per card e Optional AD DA cassette to provide digital Ins Outs 8 per card e Optional Digital Monitoring cassette providing I O for Aux 8T Main Mix and monitoring e Option
56. Encore mixing will make the Channel MIC Encoders at the top of the Channel Strip display the monitor or channel Encore Mix data gt If ticked to 4081 MIC Gain Control will be used to remotely control 4081 MIC Gains using the MIC encoder at the top of the channel strip Setup information for DAW control and FireWire Services For more information on setting up your DAW and the MIDI Ports please see section starting on page 169 DAW Type Select the option applicable to your DAW MIDI Port Assignments Each 8 fader section and the 8T faders needs a MIDI Port assigned to it to provide 8 channels worth of MIDI control Select the MIDI Port you wish to assign in the first pull down menu Select the block of 8 faders you wish to map to that MIDI Port in the second pull down menu gt If you wish to clear all of these fields back to their default values click the Default button 107 MTC Ethernet MIDI Select the MIDI channel you wish the MIDI Timecode to be accepted by the console on This must match the settings on your DAW As Was Snapshot In the background while you are working the console takes a snapshot of all settings controls and states including audio routing This option sets the interval at which that snapshot is taken selectable in 5 minute intervals from 5 minutes to 1 hour If you have the As Was option selected in the main Settings screen then e jit is this snapshot that i
57. England BB11 5UB Drawing No Sheet 1lename FB117 31 s bk ei lt Cut Tel 44 1282 457011 Fax 44 1282 417282 EB11731 3
58. Filing dialogue will open allowing you to select a Recall file Select a file by clicking on it then click Load gt You will be asked if you wish to load the selected Snapshot Do you wish to Load rgi aD ED gt Click Yes or Cancel The controls that do not need setting manually will automatically be set on the console Aux on off Aux pre post etc AMA If the console has just been powered up and you have not used Recall on Start Recall now this session you will be asked if you wish to start the Recall software once you have answered Yes or No the Recall button will then become available on screen for you to start stop Recall as you wish gt Click No and you will be taken back to the main Genesys screen with no further action being taken Remember for this session gt Click Yes and the the Recall software will open Ticking the Remember For This Session box means you will not be shown this dialogue again until the next time the console has just been powered up The Recall button at the bottom of the screen is now available so Recall can be opened directly without having to go through the Filing page At any point the Recall software can be stopped and closed by clicking the Recall button at the bottom of the screen There is no confirmation dialogue when doing this a You will now be shown a screen that shows which controls require manually resetting on Channel Strip 1 if there are n
59. Galera canaria aa capa 20 48 101 GENES Siria anta 176 177 187 GODE aa 88 89 Global Link Mode comica de 100 OR tela 16 91 Group MINO MOE nidad 86 GOUD MOUE cad 82 85 102 H MEAG DNONESetve occcereciatavsiwce el sanatih E A A ARANA 57 PIMDGSS Tte ad 47 m E O E asa 96 Fil SNe eiere taa 96 a ETA ES N E E E EA N E E E 16 46 OU iva tr o a 16 O 16 64 UP iaa a 52 53 64 65 M2 SE A AAN N 76 83 EEE Td dada alada 155 MAC dados 157 iMDCC ANC Ci acido 46 Main A O E 36 78 132 154 A eCnona teeee meee n ee 16 57 Man MODICON POL el 78 A O taseaxeawies 35 Master Automation DuUttONS occocccocccnoncca nana ranas 89 INPUE PO Earn aa oa 175 Master CUT d 77 INPUT TRIM toa 47 Master Fader is 88 A 16 45 57 58 75 Master FireWire board occccccccccccnnnanorcna narrar 148 INS 33 48 54 Master Screen a 95 INS Zea lada 33 48 54 Master SEL mode 15 33 42 44 48 50 53 56 59 INSEPE MIX Ads 203 69 72 77 80 81 82 Insert MIX RECUR errorea 57 203 Master SEL MOG Geis no 95 IN eos 16 37 44 73 74 MASTER SEES ClO Nada 63 O 65 METCRD FFIEC Si taa 91 INterlock MO dE sor aa is 54 A rca ines cancel eae areas ee S ean 35 Item laa A AD 123 149 Milicias it di 37 47 63 Internal COCK 125 131 MiG Baldio ae penning 96 Interrogate EQ LINKS ccccccsseeseeeseeteeentecsneenenes 98 MID ista ab 17 Into Monitor section D EXT INpUt occccccccccnccco noo 152 MIDI Port ASSIGNAMEONES iia es 107 SO A AS 16
60. Monitor selectable by selecting I P2 Send on the relevant channel strip 25 way D type Signal Name dil Hi Lo Screen 1 I P 2 Tape Monitor Send 1 24 12 25 2 I P 2 Tape Monitor Send 2 10 23 11 3 I P 2 Tape Monitor Send 3 21 9 22 4 I P 2 Tape Monitor Send 4 7 20 8 5 I P 2 Tape Monitor Send 5 18 6 19 6 I P 2 Tape Monitor Send 6 4 17 5 7 I P 2 Tape Monitor Send 7 15 3 16 8 I P 2 Tape Monitor Send 8 1 14 2 I P2 Tape Monitor Return Used for the Main Input Return to the monitor path when in Mix Mode 25 way D type Signal Name iil Hi Lo Screen 1 I P 2 Tape Monitor Return 1 24 12 25 2 I P 2 Tape Monitor Return 2 10 23 11 3 I P 2 Tape Monitor Return 3 21 9 22 4 I P 2 Tape Monitor Return 4 7 20 8 5 I P 2 Tape Monitor Return 5 18 6 19 6 I P 2 Tape Monitor Return 6 4 17 5 7 I P 2 Tape Monitor Return 7 15 3 16 8 I P 2 Tape Monitor Return 8 1 14 2 215 a la SENG Hem ot JO seo a lO SENO QUO I P2 TAPE MON Ia 2 INS 1 DAW Send Sends the outputs from the channels to the DAW to be recorded 25 way D type Signal Name a Hi Lo Screen 1 DAW Send 1 24 12 25 2 DAW Send 2 10 23 11 3 DAW Send 3 21 9 22 4 DAW Send 4 7 20 8 5 DAW Send 5 18 6 19 6 DAW Send 6 4 17 5 7 DAW Send 7 15 3 16 8 DAW Send 8 1 14 2 DAW Return Channel DAW return to monitor 25 way D t
61. Monitor o p s 1 6 gt a A Ty Master Mix o p s L R gt Monitor o p s L R gt 2T o p s L R gt CUE I L R gt ing CUE 2 L R a Y ji D lt CRM gr 1 L i op lt Mix l Sp lt CRM Yel l a op lt 2T Red g o b Cue 1 Cue 2 Toggle Cycle 1 Cue 1 2 Cue 2 o Cue 1 2 Prod Cue2 TB Q Prod TB Control 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 811731 Es SERVICES O Pini op 8T METERS 5 gt Ea gt id gt CH Tone AN Red Q Cal Lat l Off Uy a in O ENIS a A e 1Khz 4Trim i C gt 8T Tone 811 812 8T3 8T4 8T5 816 817 818 a gt A i L R C S LS RS _ 7 MS gt Al A2 A3 Ad ASL ASR ABL_ ABR 2TL 2TR JU MR MM Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter eS dl gt al gt Mix Tone 26L 26L 26L 26L 26L 26L 26L 26 L 26 L 26 L o
62. Pee Yee etup Stereo 10 ROR or LCR E E a era o 4 gt Jo 812 amp Mix gt To Mix R Direct o p lt R Master Mix Sel 3 AAA R R hi T a 2 NS Ns 2 0 0 L p gt l e Q CH 8T5 O lt From Rev 2L Yel CH a 4 gt mame Cut ft l 2 SH Pan Jn pa E ES E CH AFL de 7 cH cur OR R Red LCR aero t aad o a _ ad Red Qy Penn eee 00 gt 8T e ea Xh or SARS RN E o To AEE R Lo 10d8 Doo i lt From Rev 2R AAN i Mix DC gt _O Channel LCR Ye CH 817 0 e D Fader e a QE E FANS Ha lt lt DC Push to interigare Monitor l o o Lor 516 l 3 To 8T4 3 i l l q To PFL CH solo gt Routing Led display in meter Ye Mix a Mix Cut l section Channel Routing i 5 CH 8T8 0 NE La E A pl eo shown as default TSR or 51S Yel Mon ae Automation gt gt d Optional o lt From Rev 3L Q a Cut l Automation AE E te eS F Mon AFL i s ELRQ MON 8T1 0 1 1 bt Blu Q wap Freeze EVA L gt To 8T5 ON gt ED Ls C Mst Ak balou oe ae E 7 sit Ye E AA E l Swap gt do gt O ON i DAW Control i TRM 812 0 Det ne el ol E ERE AS EE R or 541R l i l y E Ye To 8T6 J ie aa From Mon EG DYN K A SA ees kono iY GO MONETO 1 gt Mix ae A ee aaa 1 rom Mon EQ INS 1 INS 2 0 P ner L L L l Uh ee l EE onitor Cut do F 2 ech er lt lt From Rev 4L ale sae cea l 1 amp U 0 1 R E C l R To 817 LA rot i Mon 3 Bo ik ee gt i e S 4 gt mx i Red
63. Poa Lol ae re Cue 1R REV PEA e i cdi A gt 8711 21 L Mon PR LN I DAW DAW r e 2P0 y DC Y Le gt Cue 2R Encoder pit Petrol o Ne gt Revi to 8T 1 Bus Rev2 to 8T 3 Bus Rev3 to 8T 5 Bus Revs to 8T 7 Bus lt i Alpe e 2PR gt O6 gt as i 8T2 4 6 8 i fh 1 e1 2P0 Cue on Sell L Red Cue DC gt o0 o Yel l 8T4 0 P T gt ck o 18 uel 2PR INN IA Grn 52 Cue 2 8T4 INS SEND gt NY e ae i Yet Q Cue 2 o gt Rev1 to 8T 2 Bus Rev2 to 8T 4 Bus Rev3 to 8T 6 Bus Rev4 to 8T 8 Bus i Lat A AN E E E ads ls da e ta lo pe Ds bn o e ah et Nat ah ln de lo cr e di ado 7 6 In i p leve D L R i n 10dB i m L R L R i l 8T5 0 P T gt AN N l gt 2T DC Mon On AS 8T5 INS SEND gt a l l Grn 1 Lat kK Yel amp i CRM L gt o l Headphone 1 E S lt i 0dB l Aux 1 gt o De l gt qt gt 000 i x eee 816 0 P gt gt TEON 4 of CRM R gt o l Al y 8T6 INS SEND gt gt I l l I E Aux 2 gt 5 ve f 4 gt Xy gt i Lat l Ye OS q e Level i Ill ER _ DC 10dB l A From Ext 1 4 Sel L gt o A qe o EE i 817 O P gt ch o l l l Aux 3 gt oe i ER 817 INS SEND gt gt PZA i l 1 Ext l Lat l 1 logge be From Ext 1 4 Sel R gt o e rl guet o ux1 2 0 i ES Al uxa l l Yel 69 Power u l 9 l l 4 Aux6 P ree A 5 Auxl 2 3 4 a 7 peto E gt ch Bade F Yel Wy i
64. Pot Select performs two functions It will lock the DAW function to the large red encoder at the top of the channel strip so pressing it will not cycle round CH DAW FNC options and it will act as a DAW encoder gt It assigns the push button function as the Monitor Panel DAW encoders across all of the large red encoders Ch V Pot on the channel strips but not the Rev Return modules and only those which have been assigned to the DAW control This means for example that if the PANS mode is on the Ch V Pot will be controlling the Pan position and all of the assigned Ch V Pots on the channel strips will display the same Pan position for their respective tracks in Logic and pressing it will centre the Pan position DAW Metering Genesys software When the console DAW button is pressed the Genesys metering can be 176 d Parameter name brs mins secs frms ae D ap Send Mixer View Send Parameter Send Level S1 MM Name Value EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System switched over to showing the metering for the DAW tracks as they are laid out on the console surface including any that may be assigned to the 8T Master section To enable DAW metering tick the DAW Meters box in the Genesys software This will be confirmed by the DAW indicator on the Master Meter being lit to show DAW Metering Any fader sections not set up to control DAW tracks wi
65. SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE IMPORTANT NOTICE THE GENESYS CONSOLE IS SUPPLIED WITH A 3 CORE AC POWER CABLE APPLICABLE TO THE REGION IT IS TO BE OPERATED IN AND MUST BE CONNECTED TO A 3 PIN EARTHED SUPPLY IF A REPLACEMENT CABLE IS USED THEN THE EARTH FROM THE MAINS SOCKET OR TECHNICAL EARTH TO THE CONSOLE MUST BE MAINTAINED IF ONLY A 2 PIN NO EARTH SUPPLY IS AVAILABLE THEN THE GENESYS CONSOLE MUST BE INSTALLED BY A QUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN TO ENSURE THAT THE CONSOLE METALWORK IS PERMANENTLY EARTHED THE CONSOLE SHOULD ONLY BE POWERED FROM A SINGLE PHASE SUPPLY WITH THE NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR AT EARTH POTENTIAL FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PROCEDURES AND RECOMMENDATIONS COULD INVALIDATE THE MANUFACTURER S WARRANTY Console Overview Ei i erated bia itir A TH a EIL SIE EErErr rr ER cria srppssorppp sopr nee mu 90 GOO GOOG AGOG 9909009 E gi 32 ES ge e SiS US Ele ER 2o El O ES a a DOO El 00 1 00 GEE El Co Co it il HO O ONO Gir Cho Cho Cho Cho fo Oo O UNC gh a 7 8 s A T 23 a E A po n po oe J a a a 7 se r as ly E Al id y A ce S Y e i riy 7 a y y A ce Y i AS pl H oe A hi E au el ai e al dh ol di it at o ack aJi s at ou Ch El ah ah fed A ted A ted A ed A el A od EIR ed ed eo EEE ls a MIO MIO ls ad Hs Ms De a Is Mis Hide se AQ Oe e Ms _ MH a Ce Oe O 0 L Ce De gt O O
66. Sat dd Ch Trim lt Processin i lt 4 A0 4 1508 aie l XLR Th o Option Paco 12dB Oct La fo Mic I P gt 1 O gt i HP gt gt o SE l l Ny I l S 2008 l i Fi i i Ds To Channel z EONO ilter E I gt Fader and l i i i 2 cut switch Note ink E dO lt Dt 1 Hi Z electronically balanced i p is 3 2K Toggle Cycle 1 La 7 l 2 Hi Z Transformer balanced i p is 3 1K CH l l l 3 Lo Z electronically balanced i p is 1 4K 2 DAW aie 20 70 dB ie sit Seen i To SIG LED 4 Lo Z Transformer balanced i p is 1 3K 3 FNC Yel amp CH l ee e sel Power u Default k Red amp DAW del E l Ins 1 l Grn 9 FNC CH DC gt O Ny Send amp Return i r 3 i SE i es DAW gt DAW Control I i Q C gt i i io ENC gt Function selection l i l j O ZA I L l Toggle Cycle l ne l l l 1 CH KpE l iL Line I P amp T gt TK 3 CH Post i Red Mic Toggle Cycle i i 4 Mon Pre i l 1 Mice 5 Mon Post var 9 pre lt CH Tone i Grn 3 Ln 2 Ln a Power up l Lat lt DLN Enable GnG Dow 2 Bow Eoi Etau Lo o i Yel 69 CH j de Blue HDN C eru ed Bit wad Optional A D i p 4 Ins 2 o e o l DAW Dh o Do i CH Pre Cut gt o 10dB ae Send amp Return l Ret Q o1 l f CH Post gt AC A Dir o p l _ Z i BiG i el Mon Pre Cut gt Ny Daw Snd af D Li oe NN R A ES l Mon Post gt o l o ine I PA l
67. Services about any software issues The list of Panels on the left side of the screen shows not only which panels have been detected as indicated by a Y being shown against it but also which internal communications link each panel is communicating on If there are two stars against any panel this shows that there is a difference between which panels have been detected on this boot cycle as opposed to the last time the console was booted The screen also shows which panels have been detected on boot up in other words how many Reverb modules how many monitor boards etc plus which channel strips have been detected in each 8 fader section This screen therefore informs you know which panels have established valid communications with the computer Any panel that is shown with a symbol next to it indicates that it is in programming boot mode if this is the case then the panel requires a firmware update please follow the section below Update Firmware to do this NB A panel that has no communications with the PC may still pass audio but other functions like changing the order of processing or changing the audio routing may not be available If there has been a change in the number of panels detected when the console and the computer first boots up from power up a screen will warn you that the configuration of the console has changed The right side of the screen shows you e the Software Version number e the
68. Software Build number Update Firmware Opens the Update Firmware screen that allows all of the panels in the console to have their firmware updated This is necessary when updating console software or going between different versions of console software which also require supporting firmware on the modules in the console This function allows you to update all of the firmware on the individual panels on the console As new features are introduced or methods of operation change you will have up to date panel firmware The Genesys console software contains all of the files needed for updating each of these panels as long as the Genesys Applications Hex Files option was ticked during the console software installation i e the default installer options settings were NOT changed during software installation On a 16 fader console it will take about an hour to update all of the panels To begin the firmware update from the Genesys main screen Click System Update Firmware and the Update Firmware screen will open 118 Cli Please Do NOT Touch The Console During the Firmware Upgrade Process Advance Sel Panel and Click Program ck Auto Update Firmware to Automatically Update All Panels Sel MEN Channel BackPlane v MIO Program rose e CiGenesysiHex Files BackPlane hex Important Information There are two ways in which the console firmware can be updated One is to automatically update all
69. Soho O m M2 O O eL m pst On the Genesys channel strip push Channel encoder at the top red ensuring that FNC is selected led will light green With the Channel strip you can control 48V 20 gt LOW Z gt The remaining buttons MIC LINE and INS are controlled via the software Turning the encoder on the Channel strip will change the MIC gain When you assign a 4081 to Genesys the 4081 switches will light red This means that the 4081 is locked out and can only be controlled using software or Genesys channel strips Otherwise the switches will light yellow The LCD display on 4081 shows Genesys channel assignment i e 01 02 64 etc As you change a parameter via software or channel strip the gain value will be displayed momentarily on the LCD display but will revert back to the assigned channel Clicking AUTO SEL i e Auto Select in 4081 software screen will allow software to follow live changes made via the Genesys channel strips 167 Pro Tools Pre setup Configuring Pro Tools Please refer to your Pro Tools documentation on how to configure Pro Tools and the AVID Pre Guide gt In software click Pro Tools Pre Setup gt In the window that opens find the section titled 4081 Remote Mic Control below and select a MIDI Port from the drop down menu different to that of the DAW MIDI Ports When configuring Pro Tools please bear this in mind The 4081
70. Talkback level and to talk to the TB Output jack on the rear of the console 83 The level has a range of to OdB Press to operate the yellow led underneath will light and Talkback will be sent to TB Output This will also dim the monitoring by an amount set by TB DIM and light the DIM button If RTB is on M2 then applying TB will temporarily suspend the Return Talkback TB ALL This momentary push switch can be used to send Talkback to CUE1 CUE2 amp TB out destinations The led lights yellow for the length of the press and the talkback will be sent to all available destinations This action will also light the DIM button and dim the monitoring by an amount set by TB DIM If RTB is on M2 then Operating all will temporarily suspend the Return Talkback RED LIGHT Lights red and allows for a studio recording light to be switched on and off from the console surface or remotely via the DC REMOTE connector on the rear of the console Spare Button Located next to the TB ALL control this control is software mapped to control the Spare I O Pin on the DC remote connector allowing for a switched output Useful for control of external TB systems Talkback Enable Located in the Settings screen This control if ticked will allow CUE1 and CUE2 to turn on the TB Relay allowing for an extra TB level control output to be sent to the studio TB system Talkback Latch Located in the Settings screen
71. The GR Gain Reduction led lights to show any compression that may be applied to the path It is a tri state led and will light either e Green light compression e Orange medium or e Red heavy SO REV RETURN Meters MASTER METER Section Each of the Rev Return meters has 2 scales e VU scale displayed to the left e dBu scale displayed to the right MIX L R Indicates whether the 8T is feeding the L and R of the Main mix SIG Lights depending on the threshold of the SIG PRES rotary control on the Master Select panel The bottom four leds across the pair of meters indicates how the Rev Return is feeding the L R Main Mix or 8T Mix NB There are two 8T leds that indicate whether the Rev Return is contributing to the 8T busses e Rev 1 can only contribute to 8T 1 2 as shown left e Rev 2 can only contribute to 8T 3 4 e Rev 3 can only contribute to 8T 5 amp 6 e Rev 4 can only contribute to 8T 7 amp 8 Jel fel E tor 18 ton 18 USB fle Jeg 5 ajaja 0 4 8 Si 42 pr 20 20 20 20 vw TeBu vu R dBu E N E Y Lop PSU STATUS E Ji gore 5 0 aia 18V 1BV gt The selection of the Metering buttons is remembered and reinstated each time on boot up DAW Lights when the 8T meters are being fed from the DAW metering The button itself has no intrinsic function and is for display only SOLO This button will flash whenever a Solo
72. Tools instead of sending the input directly to the relevant track on Pro Tools so Input 1 goes to Track 1 it is possible to route a collection of signals to any of the 8T faders which in turn can then be sent to Pro Tools This is useful when recording for example a drum kit consisting of 12 paths which need to be pre mixed to a stereo pair before being sent to two adjacent tracks on Pro Tools to form the L and R via the 25 way D type connector on the rear of the 8T section The levels for these 8T paths both to the Main Mix and to Pro Tools are set by the 8T faders The in line console lends itself to several different methods of working and the engineer may very likely use an external microphone pre amplifier and connect this to whichever Pro Tools track he wants to record on bypassing the console altogether The console is now used for its monitoring abilities alone and the input signal paths of the channels are ignored This might seem to be a complex topic when written down in such a dry manner but in time using trial and error techniques you will soon master the concept of the in line mixing console To aid your understanding of this there is a schematic block diagram of the console at the end of this manual that shows the signal flows through the console for all path types 36 Recording in Stereo Before powering the console plug a pair of loudspeakers into the XLRs on the rear of the console label
73. a Hi Lo Screen 1 Monitor Left Insert Send 24 12 25 2 Monitor Right Insert Send 10 23 11 3 Monitor Centre Insert Send 21 9 22 4 Monitor Sub Insert Send 7 20 8 5 Monitor Left Surround Insert Send 18 6 19 6 Monitor Right Surround Insert Send 4 17 5 7 Mix Left Output 15 3 16 8 Mix Right Output 1 14 2 Mix Left and Right are wired here so that the Mix can be presented on a customer patch as well Monitor Insert Return 25 way D type Signal Name dil Hi Lo Screen 1 Monitor Left Insert Return 24 12 25 2 Monitor Right Insert Return 10 23 11 3 Monitor Centre Insert Return 21 9 22 4 Monitor Sub Insert Return 7 20 8 5 Monitor Left Surround Insert Return 18 6 19 6 Monitor Right Surround Insert Return 4 17 5 7 not used 15 3 16 8 not used 1 14 2 212 Ko Jj Jo of Jo MONITOR EXTERNALS LS OPS MONITOR MSERTS GONSGLE PUITPUTS AT INSERTION Console Outputs 8Ts 25 way D type Signal Name i Hi Lo Screen 1 8T Output 1 24 12 25 2 8T Output 2 10 23 11 3 8T Output 3 21 9 22 4 8T Output 4 7 20 8 5 8T Output 5 18 6 19 6 8T Output 6 4 17 5 7 8T Output 7 15 3 16 8 8T Output 8 1 14 2 Console Outputs Auxiliaries 25 way D type Signal Name il Hi Lo Screen 1 Auxiliary Output 1 24 12 25 2 Auxiliary Output 2 10 23 11 3 Auxiliary Output 3 21 9 22 4 Auxiliary Output 4
74. ahaa 104 LS SOO ii ins 104 SW Br cae i esate la eaeate aS 104 DOW MIX 1G add ass 104 Sup Speaker LOCKS un 104 LS RS Speaker LOCKS ssseseseseresssnnsnesnssnsrnsrns 104 Speaker FINS ataie 105 SF Solo CAKANO adas 105 Channel ToO Msi ies 105 MONITOW GO CT a4 co nea EA 105 O 105 Other OPINAN 105 AUTO TB with Play Delay ccccccceesseeeeeenaes 105 o aaa a T a 105 TEOUPUCENADI Strand adas 105 Lock Monitor Levels 105 DLING Enable 105 POWer UD tna rollos ie in 106 Dera asiatica ios 106 IS V AS A ans 106 Last Store Made sai iii cai 106 CUSTOM SLORC aena aid 106 OE La dd 106 Osc With Slate nacida 106 OSC On Mia a eS 106 SOUD Seter O 106 DEE DY SOl Cri A 106 CAMI e e e e de 106 Channel FNC ContrOl oocccocccnccnnnnn nono 107 Console UTE A 107 SEI VICES metidas add 107 DAW TY Dei taa remanence 107 MIDI Port AssignhMenNtS ucivinciicinicaic ieee 107 MFG Ethernet MIDE msn 108 AS Was SnapShot irsini ruinae aaa 108 Console Debug WindOW ssssssesssssrssrsrsrrerss 108 FIFE WIGS Clu Dike vecsedeai rn ao E 108 FILING ara 109 A E 109 SV ib 109 CO Das ooo aerea 109 Delete dr alas 110 REE cetunantinveaeuueteuandeuniawounes 111 ERCOFe Pl Sarai 112 Encore Plus Automation SOftWAare coccccoccccconcncoso 112 RECALIU siii 113 Recall OVE VIS Weiss a 113 Monitor Panel ites dad 113 Channel SCCUONM cia a 114 Or id REV REUS raid ones 114 Saving a Recall file ccc cccesseeesneeeneeeesseeeuanes 115 Replaying a Re
75. are shaded grey Cards that need jumpers on pins 2 amp 3 are marked with an X NB On a 16 fader console that does not have a Monitor AD DA card the single Master card should have its jumpers on pins 1 amp 2 137 Installation of cards Master or Slave cards The installation for the Master and Slave cards is identical gt Ensure the power is removed from the console observing the correct Shutdown procedure gt Unscrew the two outer screws that hold the faceplate to the console chassis labelled A below Please be aware that if the optional Dynamics card is fitted this card will be attached to the faceplate when it is removed U U l l l gt l E C JE JE TE JE JE JE C E Y C JE JE JE JE JE JE JE SS 5 SS SS SSeS SS S 0 f lo O ye KEY 1 P 1 8 j a Cr SF m N Q oll O 10 WN y Q i A i A nD 373 Tse NS z CHANNEL AES RX DLINE AES RX DMON 1 2 3 IN oT 2 A B 88 y OUT MASTER AES TX AES SYNC IN OUT CHANNEL SLAVE AUDIO LINK SERIAL Spe FIREWIRE WorDcLOcK B B gt Unscrew the blanking plate that is fitted to the lower half of the plate removing the two screws labelled B above Insert the AD DA card into the lowest slot in the ava
76. board is set to be the Sync Master and all the other boards are set to be Sync Slaves The Sync Master can take its sync to be from e Wordclock In e AES Sync In e AES CH Sync e The Genesys internal clock Sync Supported sample rates are e 44 1 kHz e 48 kHz e 88 2 kHz e 96 kHz e 176 4 kHz 192 kHz Leo Connectors amp switches 25 way D type connectors There are two 25 way D type connectors on both the Master and Slave FireWire cards These connectors use standard Tascam AES wiring protocol On a Master AD DA card from left to right these D type connectors are labelled as follows 1 AES RX DLINE AES TX 2 AES RX DMON AES Sync In Out Each 25 way connector carries up to 8 pairs signals and these are as follows AES RX DLINE AES TX Connector Signal name Pin number system name Shield Hi Low 1 AES RX 1 DLINE 1 amp 2 25 24 12 2 AES RX 2 DLINE 3 amp 4 11 10 23 3 AES RX 3 DLINE 5 amp 6 22 21 9 4 AES RX 4 DLINE 7 amp 8 8 7 20 5 AES TX 1 Direct Output 1 amp 2 19 18 6 6 AES TX 2 Direct Output 3 amp 4 5 4 17 7 AES TX 3 Direct Output 5 amp 6 16 15 3 8 AES TX 4 Direct Output 7 amp 8 2 1 14 AES RX DMON AES SYNC IN OUT Connector Signalinanie Pin number Shield Hi Low 1 AES RX 1 DMON 1 amp 2 25 24 12 2 AES RX 2 DMON 3 amp 4 11 10 23 3 AES RX 3 DMON 5 amp 6 22 21 9
77. button on the console to change the automation mode Pressing the fader SEL button repeated will cycle through the automation modes in your DAW for that track Turn off AUTO when not in use as the fader SEL buttons are used to control these functions and you may inadvertently change something CHAN CHAN puts the DAW tracks into Track Arm Record Enable mode and tracks can be armed on off by using the fader SEL buttons gt Press the CHAN button gt Now press the fader SEL button on the console to put the track into armed mode record enabled Pressing the fader SEL button repeated will toggle on off the track arm record enable mode in your DAW for that track Turn off CHAN when not in use as the fader SEL buttons are used to control these functions and you may inadvertently change something lt 4 and P Buttons They are used to scroll through the available DAW tracks and parameters and are used to set which tracks the 4 DAW encoders are controlling 172 TRANSPORT The Transport buttons on the Master 8T fader panel on the Genesys L C C W U control the transport in the DAW a P STOP PLAY REC L__ TRANSPORT There are four buttons REWIND FAST FORWARD STOP PLAY and RECORD Each button lights to confirm the function has been selected SOLO CUT Pressing the SOLO CUT buttons above the Genesys faders will solo mute tracks in your DAW e173 Apple Logic Pro
78. can be set to either display EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System e Longitudinal timecode taken from the Timecode XLR on the Genesys computer cassette click LTC e Foot Frames Click F amp F e Midi timecode taken from the ethernet cable that connects Genesys to your DAW click MTC e Standard Timecode display Click DAW TC To access the various options within this application click each of the function buttons at the bottom of the screen Some of these on screen buttons have duplicate buttons on the Monitor Panel which will perform the same function i e opening or closing the relevant feature In the top of the screen it will be indicated if LTC is selected as the Timecode source If not selected the timecode source will be MTC and displayed as such 95 EQ Bypass F1 Copy F2 Paste F3 Setup Links F4 Show All Links F5 Clear All Links Linked Channels EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Recall System The EQ screen is only available if you have at least one of the EQ cassettes fitted The large green display to the right of the screen indicates which channel number the EQ screen relates to The EQ screen is displayed by pressing the channel SEL button or pressing the EQ just beneath the small TFT screen on the monitor panel Once the EQ screen opens the channel SEL button led will light solid on that channel to show which E
79. channel to another but without creating a subsequent link between all controls This is typically used for copying EQs from the left side of a stereo path to the right gt Call the EQ you wish to copy from on screen by pressing it s Channel SEL button Press the F2 button or click Copy on screen gt Using the channel SEL buttons call the EQ you wish to copy to on screen Press the F3 button or click Paste on screen All the EQ settings will be copied from the first EQ to the second and a confirmation message will be shown on screen NB These settings will remain on the clipboard should you need to paste them to other paths 98 DYN Y Compressor 5 1 5 4 3 8 0 10 2 1 i gt 2 20 5 15 15 2 1 oo 10 20 al 4 Bypass F1 Copy F2 Paste F3 Setup Links F4 Show All Links F5 Clear All Links Linked Channels EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Recall System N Ta am SC Input A Compressor 7 5 T i 5 4 0 3 8 0 10 2 1 2 20 5 15 15 2 1 0 10 20 1 4 Rati Threshold Bypass F1 Copy F2 Paste F3 Setup Links F4 Show All Links F5 Clear All Links Linked Channels e DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Recall System If an EQ is being used to be the Sidechain EQ signal it will no longer be available in the Channel or Monitor path The EQ pick off point when used in this mode will always be Pre the Dynamics proce
80. connects via ipMIDI to Pro Tools over the network ethernet Refer to the DAW Control section on page 25 for information on how the Genesys connects to your computer DAW Control and Mic PRE both use the same pMIDI driver and network addresses therefore the DAW Control settings apply to both The first 4081 unit needs to have the USB RS485 switch on the rear of the unit set to USB plus a USB cable from the unit to the PC Mac Subsequent units in the daisy chain need to have this switch set to RS485 plus the RS485 cable needs to connect these units together You can control up to 64 MIC Channels 16 Racks gt A single MIDI Port has 16 channels 8 MIC channels can be controlled from a single Pro Tools MIDI PRE channel eg a 16 Channel console with 4 x 4081 s The configuration would be as follows In Pro Tools peripherals MIC Preamps window gt for the 1 Type PRE Receive From Send To ipMIDI port 1 channel 1 This controls 2 x 4081 racks Rack 1 and Rack 2 i e Channels 1 8 for the 2 Type PRE Receive From Send To pMIDI port 1 channel 2 This controls 2 x 4081 racks Rack 3 and Rack 4 i e Channels 9 16 and so on for any additional racks etc 168 Digital Audio Workstation DAW Control Pro Tools EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System Before using the Genesys with a Pro Tools system please ensure tha
81. e 196 USB Disk S l CUON wiissesisieverdeiieieteoaviaiaianiaases 198 The Recovery PrOCeSS ccccseeceseueeuueeucenaeenans 199 Completing Recovery ProcCesSS occcccccocccnnncnnnnos 200 Audio Monitoring Boards Monitor Board 4 Cue MiX cccseeeee cece eee nr 201 Monitor Board 3 M1 L S cc cece cee ceeeeeee eee e eee eees 201 Monitor Board 2 Mix InsSert ccceceeeeeeeeeeees 203 Monitor Board 1 Mix Output cece eee eee ee ees 203 REV ROGUE Acs cia a a aa tiarotcmnn 203 Rev Returns 33 2 lanas 204 Genesys Audio Specification Record Mode aio 205 MIX MOG Sud aa 205 General SpecifiCatiONS occococccccccarccanrarnnnn nar 205 Genesys Physical Information DIMENSIONS aaa 207 COnnNector TDS iii 207 Console Connector pin outs Computer Cassette incor tra ica 208 USB oracion 208 MOUSE o ETAETA 208 A eee ee AAN AAE A 208 EA EEEE E E ada dada 208 TECO dui atlas 208 EE EA Zi il AD Dia 209 VEAS 209 Monitor Section CONNMECtOSS cccessssscennseeessennennes 210 Monitor External Inputs 1 8 3 ssasssssssssrrrrsrenn 210 Monitor External Inputs 2 amp 4 ccc cceceeee eee eee ees 210 Loudspeaker Outputs A A M1 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 211 Loudspeaker Outputs B A M2 cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeenes 211 Monitor Insert SENG ici 212 Monitor Insert Return ccccccescceuseveuseeaeeeuueuunas 212 Console OULDUUS 8 Sarna 213 Console Outputs Auxiliaries ooocccccoooncccn
82. e Whether the feeds are sourced Pre or Post the 8T faders e Atrim value for1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 e 2T Output level e 2T Output On Off and 2T Output level zroJP E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 eo o oo EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System In Group Mode the 8T Outputs are fed to the 2T mixer in the following way 8T Output 2T Destination 1 Left 2 Right 3 Left 4 Right 5 Left 6 Right 7 Left 8 Right In Group Mode the four encoders in the DAW Console centre section 86 have the following functions Encoder Push switch function Rotary function 1 On Off contribution from 8T 1 amp 2 Level control to 0dB 2 On Off contribution from 8T 38 4 Level control to 0dB 3 On Off contribution from 8T 586 Level control to 0dB 4 On Off contribution from 8T 78 8 Level control to 0dB NB In Group Mode the 2T Output level will need to be set on screen F1 F5 buttons The function of these buttons changes depending on the selected function either EQ or DYN or on which type of DAW you are controlling Where these buttons have a function they are described under their respective chapters DAW Establishes communication between Genesys and your DAW and turns that communication On or Off The DAW led will light under the 8T faders when control is established and a DAW control screen will open The screen
83. either AFL or PFL is detected anywhere on the console This display is for indication only USB USB port for a flash drive so data can be quickly backed up or restored Talkback Mic The Talkback Mic is situated on the Meterbridge for optimum acoustic isolation The Metering Options buttons apply their functions globally across all metering on the console VU Sets all meter information to display in VU and uses the scale to the left 92 of each meter PPM Sets all meter information to display in PPM and uses the scale to the right of each meter VU and PPM are interlocked SET It is possible to alter the meter scaling in PPM mode Press SET The right side of the 2T meter will now display a solid block of leds For each press of the PPM button the scaling indicated by bright up will be e 14dB e 18dB e 20dB This will set the PPM bright up to be one bar below 14 18 20 to indicate near converter clipping Press SET again to exit this setup mode PEAK With this selected whenever a meter peaks the topmost led will remain lit for two seconds or until it is overwritten by a louder signal P HOLD With this selected the metering will permanently display a single led to show it s loudest peak until it is overwritten by a louder signal This can be reset by pressing the P HOLD button again In this way it is possible to play a section of music and then determine the loudest spike o
84. enabled the pan control will have no effect on the audio level that is sent to the routed destinations gt Pans between left and right only 47 PROCESSING Section EQ DYN INS ry Le ajajaja i If the EQ or Dynamics cassettes are not fitted on the relevant channel strip the EQ and DYN leds will not light and these buttons will not function INS1 And INS2 are always available If the optional EQ and Dynamics processing cassettes are present it is possible to place the EQ and or Dynamics on either the Channel or Monitor path it is not possible to split the Dynamics elements so the Compressor and Gate are split between the two paths In normal operation the DYN and EQ buttons work as On Off for the relevant process regardless of whether that element is on the Channel or Monitor path If EQ or DYN has been placed on the Monitor path then the On or Off state of the selected process will be displayed on the TO MON leds at the bottom of the strip Secondly the order of the processing elements can be interrogated ORD Interrogate Press the ORD button once and the four leds will light in turn to reflect the order of processing on the Channel path Press the ORD button again and the four leds will light in turn to reflect the order of processing on the Monitor path Master SEL mode on the PROCESSING section To Enter and Exit Master SEL Mode on the Channel Strip
85. gt 8T in the channel strip section of this manual On the 8T routing display it should be noted that 8T routing is only possible from the channel tab with stereo modules as the feed to the 8T busses is swapped over pre the routing matrix fed from CHAN or MON path However when routing to the 8T busses on later LCR modules then routing from the channel or the monitor path can happen simultaneously enabling 8T routing to be selected from the channel tab or the monitor tab See routing screen display shown left A yellow block indicates the presence of a route while the large digit to the right of the screen indicates to which path the routing refers to On consoles with more than 16 Channel Strips a scrollbar becomes available to move the channel routing display left and right By pressing LOCK and RTE SEL together you will put the console and Monitor Panel into Master SEL mode the RTE SEL button will start to flash It will then be possible to set up the Monitor Cue and 2T mix functions in Master SEL mode along with the Channels and Revs When you enter Master SEL Mode the RTE SEL button will start to flash to indicate you are in Master SEL Mode When you exit Master SEL Mode any changes made will be saved and the buttons audio and display screen will revert to their last selection Audio Routing on Consoles with a missing Computer Cassette On consoles that have a computer cassette currently missing for example ret
86. interlocked with SIF It will be temporarily cancelled if any Rev Return AFL is selected See main monitor pot section of the manual to set PFL level to Monitor SIF Lights yellow and allows the Solo In Front to be switched into the monitor when Channel Monitor Rev AFL or 8T SOLO buttons are pressed This function will blend this solo source with the monitor source to hear solos in context with the main monitor selection It is enabled by either CH SAFE MON SAFE or 8T SAFE and is interlocked with PFL See main monitor pot section of the manual to set SIF blend level ratio to Monitor M2 SEL Lights yellow when selected and allows PFL or the RTB to be sent to the M2 speakers if they are not being used for other monitoring purposes e The ist press will send the PFL buss to M2 any time a Solo button is pressed on the console e The 2nd press will set RTB to be sent to the M2 speakers e The 3rd press will return the M2 speakers to their default state The function of M2 SEL will be shown on the associated leds M2 SEL will be temporarily suspended if M2 LS is selected and will return to it s original state if M2 is deselected It is also possible to activate RTB remotely via the DC Remote connector This will switch on M2 SEL and flash the RTB led on the monitor panel to show remote selection SWP Lights yellow and sends the rear Left and Right speakers to the front Left and Right cutting the LS and RS spe
87. into it It is always the loudest signal within this link group that causes the compressor to action once the threshold has been reached regardless of which signal this actually is F1 F5 buttons At the bottom of the DYN screen are function buttons some of which match up with the F1 to F5 buttons just below the 4 encoders Please see the section on EQ for a full explanation of these buttons and functions on page 97 When linking Dynamics together in this way all controls are linked apart from the Global Local Link buttons These will still operate independently of any links and allow you to link controls yet still allow the loudest signal within that group to cause the dynamics to action NB With regard to linking the Dynamics it is irrelevant whether the Dynamics are operating on the channel input or DAW input section 100 O Gate Expander 20 Bypass F1 Copy F2 Paste F3 Setup Links F4 Show All Links F5 Clear All Links Linked Channels ise DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Recall System If an EQ is being used to be the Sidechain into the Gate or Exp it will no longer be available in the Channel or Monitor path The EQ pick off point when used in this mode will always be Pre the Dynamics processing but can be Post Insert if the Inserts are set Pre Dynamics NB Whichever Sidechain Input you select will be common to all the other available proce
88. ipMIDI Ethernet MIDI Port ipMIDI Monitor gt The ipMIDI window should pop up if not then repeat the above step gt From the ipMIDI window set the Ports After Reboot to 20 make sure Loop back is unticked and finally click Mute None If you are logged into Windows with Administrator privileges then click OK to apply the changes Change button will be disabled in this case otherwise click Change then click OK gt Finally reboot your DAW computer to apply the changes and make sure when Windows starts up the ipMIDI icon is shown in the Windows taskbar at the bottom right of the screen next to the clock and other taskbar icons If this not the case then start the ipMIDI program from the Windows Start Menu as shown above in the first two steps once opened do not close the window you may have to repeat this step on each reboot of your DAW computer Mac OS X DAW Computer gt Close all open applications and windows including all DAW programs gt On your Mac DAW computer from a new Finder window select Applications Utilities and open the Audio MIDI Setup app gt If the MIDI Studio window is not shown but instead you see the Audio Devices window then from the menu bar at the top of the screen select Window Show MIDI Window The MIDI Studio window should pop up if not then repeat the above step Next scroll through the list of devices and open ipMIDI From the pMIDI Setup window set the Number of Ports
89. is not shown after pressing DEL then you will need to power off and back on and repeat the above steps again AwardBIOS CMOS Setup Utility Standard CMOS Features Miscellaneous Control Advanced BIOS Features Load optimized Defaults Advanced Chipset Features Load Standard Defaults Integrated Peripherals Set Supervisor Password Power Management Setup Set User Password PnP PCI Configurations Save amp Exit Setup PC Health Status Exit Without Saving Esc Quit t Select Item F10 Save amp Exit Setup Time Date Hard Disk Type gt Use the Arrow keys on the keyboard to scroll to Integrated Peripherals highlighted above Press the Enter key The Integrated Peripherals Menu will now appear listing more options 196 Integrated Peripherals Menu OnChip IDE Function Press Enter O Press Enter Item Help OnChip SIO Function Press Enter Menu Level gt Init Display PCI Slot t Move Enter Select Item PU PD Value F10 Save ESC Exit F1 General Help F5 Previous Values F6 0ptimized Defaults F7 Standard Defaults Use the Arrow keys on the keyboard to scroll to OnChip Device Function and press the Enter key gt A sub menu will now appear onscreen OnChip Device Function Menu VIA SATA Function Enable VIA SATA RAID Mode SATA Mode Item Help VIA LAN Function Enabled VIA LAN BootROM Disabled VIA LAN BootROM Boot Option Hook INT19 VIA LAN B
90. least an Issue 2 or above computer cassette also known as a 416 cassette and are running Windows Vista or Windows 7 operating system on the Genesys IMPORTANT Do NOT change this option under any circumstances Stop All Applications This will stop and close all Genesys software But the Neve icon will remain on the taskbar In order to re launch the software you need to double click with the left mouse button the Neve icon on the taskbar Exit Exits this menu without taking any further action 122 AD DA amp FireWire System Digital Converter System Each card comes in an eight fader section size with A D converters on the Direct Output and a D A on the Digital Line and Digital Monitor inputs Each eight fader section can be configured differently so one section accepts AES inputs one accepts a mixture of FireWire and AES one accepts just FireWire inputs etc This is set on the Software Configuration screen in the Genesys software Each channels card can be used as e The Direct Outputs can be sent to the DAW either via FireWire or the AES Transmitters e A DAW to Digital Line and Digital Monitor converter via FireWire e A FireWire to AES and AES to FireWire converter e A DAW to Digital line and Digital Monitor converter via AES receivers A Monitor section card is also available so all Auxes 8Ts 2Ts and Main Mix can be sent digitally and also enabling a 5 1 digital surround external to be input into
91. limitations apply Sample Frequency gt Select the system sample frequency from the pull down menu If the AD DA boards are connected to a DAW via FireWire then the sample frequency is defined by the DAW and this option will be greyed out and unavailable Sync Source This selects where Genesys takes its timing source from e Internal Genesys will use its Internal clock e Word Clock Genesys will lock to the BNC receiving external Wordclock e If selected this same Wordclock signal will also be output on all of the other Wordclock Out BNC connectors on the other cards This means the Genesys AD DA system can function as a Wordclock distribution amp e AES Sync the system will lock to the AES sync signal carried on the dedicated XLR on one of the 25 way D subs If selected this same AES sync signal will also be sent out on another XLR on the same 25 way D sub See pin out information starting on page 126 for wiring information e AES Channel 1 2 the system will lock to the embedded AES signal contained on audio channels 1 and 2 of the D Line AES receiver The AES Channel Sync is taken from the first AES pair of inputs on the left most Master card in the console so therefore taken from Channels 1 2 If the left most card in the console is the Monitor card then Surround 5 1 DEXT L R inputs will be displayed Channel Count If the system detects there is FireWire present then the FireWire Channel Count fuel
92. path if Mon Solo is selected It will also allow SIF and PFL in the monitor section to be selected Lastly it will turn SOLO LINK off if selected In this mode all monitor CUTS will be deactivated if a monitor Solo is selected 8T SAFE It is also possible to make the 8T Solo system safe by selecting SAFE in the Settings screen This will then enable the AFL PFL led on the Monitor panel to flash and the AFL to be switched into the LS Monitor path if any 8T Solo is selected It will also allow SIF and PFL into the Monitor section to be selected However it will not cancel Solo Link VL Makes the Monitor Channel amp 8T SOLO buttons interlock within their systems 64 Momentary Solo mode is also available This is selected by turning both I L and Latch Off In this mode a Solo will only be heard for the length of time a SOLO button is held LATCH Lights yellow and makes the Monitor Channel amp 8T SOLO buttons latch within their systems NB e If LATCH is selected while I L is selected then I L will be cancelled e If LINK is also selected then MOMENTARY LATCH and I L will operate across Channel amp Monitor Solos but not along with 8T SOLO even if 8T Solo has been tied or not tied to the Channel or Monitor Solo in the Settings screen RESET Cancels any active Solos across the console and returns the audio to it s Pre Solo d state This includes any combination of PFL amp A
93. port on the rear of the console if more functionality is required We recommend using a Microsoft Windows compatible keyboard The glide pad and two buttons act as mouse An external mouse trackball can be plugged into the rear of the console if preferred We recommend using a Microsoft Windows compatible mouse 90 Meterbridge CHANNEL Meters Each fader strip meter has 2 scales 2218 1a 14 e WVU scale displayed to the left e dBu scale displayed to the right Beneath this a bank of 15 leds displays the following information MIX Indicates whether the Monitor path or Channel path is contributing to the L and R of the Main Mix 1 2 5 MTR olojo QOD 000 Ooo DOD The MTR led indicates whether the meter is sourced from the CH I P DAW Send or DAW Return 8T 1 to 8T 8 leds For LCR channel strips In it s default state these leds indicate which of the 8T busses the Channel Input is routed to gt When the routing is interrogated by pressing the gt 8T button at the bottom of the channel strip these leds will indicate which of the 8T busses the Monitor Input is routed to for the length of time the button is pressed For Stereo channel strips Indicates whether the Channel or Monitor path is being sent to each of the 8T busses SIG The SIG Signal Presence led lights depending on the threshold of the SIG PRES rotary control on the Master Select panel GR
94. power up connect a monitor to the VGA 1 connector on consoles which have this connector available otherwise leave at VGA 2 and you may see a message with the following option Start Normally on screen Connect a Windows compatible keyboard to one of the USB ports at the back of the computer cassette and select this option using the arrows keys then press enter Otherwise if this message is not on screen then power off then on the console the system will boot up make sure you select Start Normally and press enter Remove the keyboard make sure a monitor is connected to VGA 2 for normal operation After attempting the above if you still cannot start the Windows OS on VGA 2 contact AMS Neve for technical assistance gt Ensure your work is saved to the relevant medium gt Turn the Control Room Monitoring knob down or press the master CUT button for the speakers gt Turn the output level on the speaker s amplifier down to CUT then turn the power off if using active speakers turn each speaker down before removing the power From the main Genesys screen click the System button gt On the System Diagnostics screen that opens click Turn Off Console You will be asked to confirm your actions Click Yes You may be asked if you wish to update the console snapshot click Yes or No as desired gt Wait until the computer has completely shut down wait a further 10 seconds and then remove the power to the console
95. rn 157 4081 Quad Mic Preamp Introduction to the 4081 cccssscccnssceeseensennesenues 158 Channel CONTFO Susini 159 USB RS 48 Sidi ds 160 Cable Specific Mya IS 160 Rear Connectors Pin out informatiOND 161 Mic Line Input XLRs oa ea 161 Mic Line Output XLRs A rr 161 Power input aaa 161 AES INS IN LINE OUT O A A 161 AES INs OUTs a a dao da a 161 4081 Unit ID DIP switche S ssssssus222222 164 Connecting the 4081 to Genesys with USB Serial AA A AAA AA 165 Overview Of 4081 ssssssusu2 2 166 Controlling 4081 from GenesyS ccccccccccnccnnnnnnnaas 166 Assigning 4081 MIC Channels to Genesys 166 Pro Tools Pre SetUpP ssssss222 2 168 CONTIGUEING PFO Tod 168 Digital Audio Workstation DAW Control Pro TOGO Sii aia 169 Genesys SOU Diana ra antes 169 PIO JOOS SEU ao 169 Operativas 170 AUK A eet etind sea en E oat 170 PA NS nea 171 PLT PIUG 1NS uste ada iaa ad dnans 171 FADS and BANK Sour 172 AUTO ase 172 CHAN an 172 d and P BUttONS 0ooooocccccncncnnnnrnn nr 172 TRANSPORT idad asa sai ios 173 SOLO CUT ada ainda 173 Apple LOGIC PFO isiscsikersatencscutenevinedsskcacdecnuacnsstucuns 174 Genesys SGLUP riari edad rr ia 174 Apple LOGIC Pro SCD iaa anda 174 Dl AIO Maio aaa aras 175 Ch V Pot Select Genesys SOftWare scescceeeeeees 176 DAW Metering Genesys software ceeeeeeeeee 176 Refresh s G
96. routing buttons have no interlock so is is possible to route the oscillator to multiple destinations at once LS Sends pink noise only to the loudspeaker outputs and can only be operated if PINK is selected Any audio feeding the loudspeakers will be cut before the pink noise is sent and once in this mode it will be possible to individually switch each Loudspeaker CUT button on or off in order to calibrate each loudspeaker individually Deselecting LS will then uncut ALL Loudspeakers to return to normal monitoring OSC FRQ Sets the frequency of the TONE oscillator The stepped values are e OFF e 50 Hz e 440 Hz e 1 KHz e 10 KHz e 15 KHz METERS Section paw paw e CUE aaa JHAR Mis Loewy MTRS T MTRS ot MTRS J CH MTRS Lights yellow and selects the feeds to the Channel Meters these buttons are latching and interlocked CH I P Lights yellow and meters the Channel Inputs which is Post Mic Line Input but Pre any processing that may be on the Channel path DAW SND Lights red and meters the DAW Sends from the direct outputs of the channels DAW RET Lights green and meters the DAW Returns to the DAW monitor inputs o 8T MTRS Lights yellow and selects the feeds to the 8T meters these buttons are latching and interlocked 8T Selects the 8T Outputs to the 8T meters AUX Selects the Aux Outputs to the 8T meters EXT Selects the 2 wide or 6 wide External inputs to
97. routing in place On the Channel Strips e The Direct Output will be set to PRE e set the DAW control to be Pre for those mics you want to monitor e DAW will be set to SND In this state the console is ready to start recording from the Mic inputs with the Direct Outputs feeding the DAW or tape machine In the Settings screen the Power Up option will be set to be Default and the Timecode display will be set to DAW T C All other options on KIJE Mic Mic Gain CY this screen will either be set to zero or unticked If you wish to record from a Line or DAW source press the 15 pot at the top of each Channel strip to select the desired input The monitoring is already selected to the Main Mix so once the loudspeakers have been uncut pushing the Main Mix faders up and the channel faders or turning the Mon knob up will send audio to the speakers The flow diagram illustrates the signal path through the console when the Stereo Recording setup is loaded Channel Meter E 7 Monitor A Level buss Monitor loudspeaker Mi level Speakers e The Monitor level is set using the Monitor knob on the lower section of the Channel strip If you wish this control to be on the fader instead press the SWP button on the Master SEL panel to swap all the faders over or use the local SWP button to swap individual faders The signals due to be recorded will appear at the DAW gt Toggle the Channel Strip DAW button
98. shown in the window Firmware updates for the console may also be required after the new software is installed After new software installation is complete it is recommended that before updating firmware you take a snapshot of the console settings click Filing then Save gt Click Yes to download the new version A pop up will appear on your screen showing the progress of the download Once complete the window left will appear Note The Genesys software will close in order for the new update to install Click Yes to proceed with the installation process Genesys software will now close automatically The Genesys Software Installation Wizard The Genesys Setup Wizard will now guide you through the installation of the new software gt Click Next IMPORTANT Ensure you follow instructions given by the installer Do NOT change any options or settings provided by the installer Use the defaults options If for any reason you need to change the default options please contact AMS Neve for assistance When the window left appears Full Installation should be already selected in the drop down menu If this is not the case select Full Installation from the drop down menu The Genesys Applications option tick box will be selected by default If this is not the case select Genesys Applications by clicking the tick box gt Click Next to continue with installation The installer will now update your Genesys sof
99. the 8T SOLO buttons e 8T1 Revil e 8T3 Rev2 e 8T5 Rev3 e 8T7 Rev4 gt Reset as many controls as you wish gt Select another channel using the SOLO button or click the Exit button on screen to leave Recall Once the desired controls have been reset please exit Recall before carrying on working when working in Hold mode there is no Verify procedure as there is in Auto mode Please note that in Hold mode it will not be possible to select which parts of the console are to be included in Recall using the four buttons above the large on screen graphic If there is a problem with any of the modules for example if one has been removed for repair and there is a gap in the console a screen will tell you that no Recall data is available for that specific channel strip This screen will appear each time you try to save or load a Recall file unless you tick the Ignore For This Session box gt Click OK to close If you wish to open Recall without saving or loading a file then click the RECALL button at the bottom of the main Genesys screen The Recall screen will open with no parameters displayed 117 SYSTEM Build Date 7 3 12 Y A Built by Saj 3 Reverbs Present 2 3 4 Version 3 3 Link 1 2 l MonPanel p E MonBoards Present 1234 Sa ae lt Link ie y gt ED Always quote the software Version amp Build numbers when communicating with AMS Neve Technical
100. the 8T meters CRM Selects the 6 wide Control Room Monitor feed pre the loudspeaker level control The screen printing on this section of the Meterbridge refers to the different path types that can be displayed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ST 8T 1 8T 2 8T 3 8T 4 8T 5 8T 6 8T 7 8T 8 EXT amp CRM 1 L 2 R 3 C 4 S 5 LS 6 RS 4 Mono 2 Stereo AUXES A 1 A2 A 3 A4 A5 L A5 R A6 L A6 R PUMAS za Lights yellow and selects the feeds to the 2T Meters MIX Selects the L amp R Mix Output to the 2T meters CRM Selects the L amp R Control Room Source to the 2T meters As you change the control room monitoring so the meters will follow this selection 2T Selects the 2T Output to the 2T meters CUE 1 2 Selects either CUE 1 or CUE 2 to the 2T meters e First press lights red and shows that Cue 1 is selected e Press again button lights yellow to show that Cue 2 is selected and so on 62 MASTER SEL Section LOCK MIC LN O Lich SEL STATUS SAFE SAFE soro i SND RTN 2 DWON MON SEL MASTER SEL The DLN led will only light if a AD DA cassette has been detected If there is no cassette it will not be possible to turn the other CH DLN selection on either LOCK gt Lights red and locks the MIC LN DAW SWP MIX buttons plus the DLN led to their current state preventing them from accid
101. the N key on the computer keyboard at the same time 199 gt You will be greeted with a menu which lists your disk options From this list you can use your mouse to select the LARGEST disk icon The USB recovery stick is 16 GB in size your Genesys computer disk will be at least 32 GB in size or more For example if the choices are 16 GB and 64 GB click on 64 GB gt Hold down the ALT key on your keyboard and press the N key at the same time The Disk Layout menu will appear gt Hold down the ALT key on your keyboard and press the N key at the same time gt Your computer will now display the Recovery Information gt Hold down the ALT key on your keyboard and press the P key at the same time gt A pop up should appear on screen Here you can simply click OK using your mouse The Recovery Progress screen will now appear It will give an estimated indication for the recovery time of the system You should allow approximately 30 60 minutes for the recovery process to complete gt The Estimated Time Remaining will continue to countdown to 00 00 00 left Once it reaches this stage recovery is complete gt Hold down ALT on your keyboard and press the F key at the same time Completing Recovery Process Power Off the console IMPORTANT Return all cables to their original pre recovery positions remove the USB stick remove the USB keyboard mouse and move the monitor cable back
102. the Settings screen 2T Output 2T Level Allows you to globally turn all of the 2T Outputs On Off and set the 2T mixer output level from OdB to oo NB In Pre mode the 8T Inserts should be selected to be Pre to pickup the pre processing pre fade 8T signal If this is the required source to feed to the 2T mixer On exiting Master SEL Mode the 2T and SEL buttons will cease flashing and the screen will revert to showing it s previous display but will not reinstate 2T Mix screen if selected It should also be noted that the previously described monitoring 82 setups using LOCK RTE SEL can be set using the Settings Screen as well apart from setting up the 2T mixer which must be done via LOCK RTE SEL method TALKBACK Section C CUE 2 Most of the Talkback functions can be accessed remotely via relays and ER the 5V CTL from the back of the console on a 15 pin D type connector UE 1 a These relays amp the 5V CTL also allow the remote operation of the Loudspeaker CUTS DIM TALKBACK to CUE 1 CUE 2 RED LIGHT RTB ON and SLATE CUE 1 amp CUE 2 Each of these level controls and momentary switches can be used to set the talkback level to each Cue It has a range of to OCB Press to enable the adjacent led will light and send Talkback to the Cue It will also turn on the DIM button and the display will temporarily display the amount of dim set by the DIM TB preset This is located above the Monit
103. the track information on the Genesys software shows you are on Page 01 xx where xx is a number representing the maximum number of parameter pages i e Page 01 07 gt Page 01 xx is used to setup the plug in gt The first Ch V Pot of that page selects which insert slot is currently being edited by rotating the Ch V Pot gt The third Ch V Pot of that page selects a plug in by rotating the Ch V Pot once a plug in is selected pause for a couple of seconds for the plug in to be set If no plug in is selected for the current insert slot the display will show No Effect gt After a plug in is selected the second Ch V Pot of that page sets the 189 plug in on off by rotating the Ch V Pot gt By pressing F3 and F4 button you can go up down the parameter pages gt Change the parameter values by rotating the Ch V Pots The Genesys software track information text shows the parameter information and page information gt In a similar way you can choose an insert slot change the plug in selection and edit the parameters for all other DAW tracks Press F5 and FLIP should now be on With FLIP on the Genesys faders will now have the functionality of the Ch V Pots the DAW faders will now be controlled by the Ch V Pots FADS and BANKS FADS allows a large session with lots of tracks to be seamlessly controlled from Genesys Press FADS the button will light gt Use the amp P buttons to move t
104. to 4dB via a factory set trim pot RTB Sets the level for Return Talkback to the M2 speakers OSC LEVEL This has a 3 state operation which can be cycled by pressing the control The function is indicated by leds to the left of the knob In it s default state both leds off it sets the level of TONE with a range of to 16dB 4dBu is set roughly at the 12 o clock mark The buttons underneath select the destination of the oscillator or pink noise to CH 8T 2T MIX and or LS gt On the ist press the CAL led will light Instead of the tone level being set by the knob it is now set via the Trim Pot on the left of the CAL led The trim pot has the same range as the knob and is factory set to 4dBu gt On the 2nd press the PNK led will light and pink noise will be generated instead of sine wave tone The level of the pink noise is set via the Trim Pot to the left of the led and is factory set to 4dBu gt The 3rd press turns both of these functions off both leds off and the tone generator returns to it s default state NB In it s default state the 2T MIX button will only send tone to MIX If you wish to send tone to the 2T as well this must be configured in the Settings screen by ticking the Osc to 2T option CH Sends tone to the Direct Outputs of all channels 8T Sends tone to the 8T Outputs 60 2T MIX Sends tone to the 2T and Mix Outputs as set on the Settings screen The OSC
105. to 20 and make sure Loop Back is unticked gt Click OK to apply the changes Finally reboot your DAW computer to apply the changes Once the above setup for DAW control ethernet connection direct or hub IP addresses and driver settings is completed then you are ready for DAW control See the chapters on Pro Tools Apple Logic Nuendo Cubase etc for more 29 Modules Overview None of the Genesys modules contain any user serviceable parts and should they develop a fault they will always need returning to AMS Neve for repair or to one of our officially nominated Service Centres Channel Input Module These modules do not have any addressable switches and can be freely swapped to any other Channel position on the console Rev Return Module These modules do not have any addressable switches but they cannot be swapped to any other Rev Return position on the console Dynamics Cassettes EQ Cassettes AD DA Cassettes Channel Meter panel All of these can be swapped between different 8 fader sections of the desk but an address switch block on each card needs to be set to reflect it s position on the desk Please see Appendix A on page 226 for a table these switch settings Console Hardware Considerations Modules should never be removed or inserted with the power on Only when the computer has been shut down correctly and the power has been removed should modules be inserted into
106. to L amp R e When Aux 6 is selected this will feed to L amp R e When AUX 1 2 and 3 4 are selected this will feed 1 and 3 to Land 2 and 4 to R e When AUX 5 and 6 are selected this will feed 5 to L amp R and 6to L amp R e When AUX 1 2 and 5 are selected this will feed this will feed 1 to L and 2toR and 5to L amp R e When AUX 1 2 and 6 are selected this will feed this will feed 1 to L and 2 to Rand 6 to L amp R NB The selection of Auxes is set in Master SEL mode TILT EQ Has no On Off switch associated but the rotary control has a centre detent to indicate a flat response It is used to brighten or dull the Cue mix being fed to the headphones by boosting either the higher or lower frequencies The TILT EQ control is stereo and has a range of 4dB 1 2 kHz BAL This balances the Left and the Right of the Cue and is in circuit all of the time It has a range of 6dB gt Press the control to make the path mono the MONO led will light 71 The BAL control will still affect the feeds sent into the Cue L R as it did in stereo LEVEL This controls the Cue output level and has a range of to OCB Press to enable e The level for the Cue send is Pre the talkback injection point e The on off for the Cue is Post the talkback injection point When Talkback is applied to the Cues the programme level is automatically dimmed by 20dB Master SEL mode on the CUE MIX Section tg h
107. you can send either the Channel CH path or Monitor MON path of each input to the L and or R of the Main Mix As an example let s look at Channel Strip 1 The channel input path will take the signal from the selection knob at the top of the strip either the Mic or Line plugged directly into the rear of each channel strip or the DAW or DLN Digital Line Input which requires the optional digital card These last two options take their input via a D type connector 1 per 8 fader section This selection is made pressing the knob itself and cycling through the options the selection being displayed with the adjacent leds this knob also provides 15dB of input trim The level control for this signal is via the fader All the other channel strip inputs perform exactly the same function Channel Strip 1 will also have a Monitor path for Track 1 from the multitrack recorder or DAW This is an entirely separate signal path from the Channel input 35 fe U The level control for this path is set from a rotary control at the bottom of the Channel strip just next to the button that selects either the DAW SND or DAW RET part of the path The fader for the input path controls the level of the signal going to the multitrack or Main Mix the rotary control for the monitor path controls the level you hear of the track that has already been recorded Also when using Genesys for recording to Pro
108. you to record the positions of all rotary controls switch states and non automated faders so they can be manually matched at a later date providing full console reset ability It does not need any specific hardware to run other than that supplied with a standard console As each control is matched by hand an on screen graphic will display the position of the control as you set it plus an indication of where the control Should actually be indicated by a purple mark Once it has been matched the next control will be displayed and so on until all of the surface has been reset e If Recall has been fitted a letter R will be displayed in red in the top right corner of the main screen just by the timecode display Recall Stores are stored by default in the same location as any Automation files for ease of use but they can be stored in any user defined location on the system For the purposes of this manual it has been presumed that the Recall package has been installed Please see chapter on Recall For more information on optional software amp hardware please contact your local Neve distributor 23 Remote Access LogMeln Software Please install the free remote access software we recommend Should we need to this will allow us to remotely connect into your system at a mutually convenient time and interrogate the console computer remotely saving us time when diagnosing problems Please co
109. 0 Power DOWN i araa a A eA 18 32 POWER UD 18 106 121 Praia 93 PRES aria taa 56 57 58 PrO TOOS rara ios 35 169 PROD MIG errante da 202 PO O ri 16 PSU STATUS taa 93 R RAN Sesion 101 ROU E PE E T E E eda asn E RE OE E 99 RECO iaa lada teeta las 89 RECalllliaciaciauctaveronteneverdiamentarsieraneane 23 170 176 186 RECAE wr iaa iia 113 Recall SEO naaa 67 RECEIVE FO Mi dia 169 RECORD our rl 89 173 183 191 REDLIGHT as ON 83 84 201 Refresh s Genesys SOftWare ccccocccococo 177 187 Reason 99 101 REM DIM san a da NA 202 Remember For This S SSION cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 115 Remote ACCES Syanie e a a cxebeca eh 24 RESET aren an A a 127 133 RESE Konea a A N 65 Reset BUTTON ira a ents 17 Resta PE a dai 121 Restart SoftWware s ssssssssssasrsrsrsrsnsnsensnnsnn 121 122 REV arias 16 Return TalkKDack ccccccccceseuceueeeeeucureneeuueenans 60 201 REVesiarra taaan 16 55 REV Return 55 114 204 REVISION NOTO Sia tareas 120 REWIND tao 89 173 183 191 e aancoscan cg basins A E ARANA 41 75 ROUTE SEL 67 74 ROUTING anena a oumaw heater ne wee antaweuenancdaertemmuues 113 ROUEING SCre Cie vasouscsedoctceede a A era 47 REBian iia ade 16 60 76 80 83 REB O Nati 83 RT TEsorramiattam tutorial taria 111 REE SE uds 33 42 48 50 68 74 111 IN 38 S O 16 81 O 77 Sample FVEGUCIICY vei cicunss ora cap nana ceed ecinwan aiaeveeeten 149 DO DIG Trias 125 Sample Rate CONVEr ters ccccceeecsecceseee
110. 17 7 AES TX 3 DAW 5 6 16 15 3 8 AES TX 4 DAW 7 8 2 1 14 AES RX DMON AES SYNC In Out 25 way D type Connector dina Pin number Shield Hi Low 1 AES RX 1 DMON 1 2 25 24 12 2 AES RX 2 DMON 3 4 11 10 23 3 AES RX 3 DMON 5 6 22 21 9 4 AES RX 4 DMON 7 8 8 7 20 5 z pa 6 7 AES Synch Out 16 15 3 8 AES Synch In 2 1 14 e These are AES Sync I O connectors only and do not handle audio 219 Serial 1 2283 CAT5 Should only ever be connected to the port of the same name on this card s corresponding Slave card using standard off the shelf CAT5 cables Serial 1 goes to Serial 1 and so on Serial IN amp OUT CAT5 Used for daisy chaining communications between all the AD DA cards in the console FireWire 1 2 J 14 and J 15 1 Power Voltage VP 2 Power Ground VG 3 TPB O 4 TPB O 5 TPA O 6 TPA O 7 Shield 1 8 Shield 2 220 Slave AD DA Channels cassette f L pe A i f AN WO Al oy Ns WN WA NW L II CHANNEL AES RX DLINE AES RX DMON 2 3 MASTER AES TX DAW SEND SERIAL AES RX DLN AES TX DAW SEND 25 way D type Connector Signal name Pin number system name Shie
111. 2 Female XLR 3 9 Insert IN 3 hot 2 3 21 Insert IN 3 cold 22 screen 1 Female XLR 4 20 Insert IN 4 hot 2 4 Insert IN 4 cold 8 screen 1 On the AES Ins Outs 25 way connector on the rear of the 4081 a AES IN OUT i number 1 printed next to the corner of the connector indicates the 000000000000 163 4081 Unit ID DIP switches HNH a DELL When remotely controlling more than one unit the ID dip switches on the rear of the unit need to be set so that each unit on the chain responds to the correct commands The first 3 switches from left to right are used to set the machine IDs from 1 8 These switches are On when in the down position the right most switch on this block puts the unit into Bootloader Mode which allows the 4081 firmware to be updated Unit ID Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 1 Off Off Off 2 On Off Off 3 Off On Off 4 On On Off 5 off off On 6 On off On 7 Off On On 8 On On On Where there are more than 8 units on the RS 485 chain the IDs for units greater than 8 are set using dip switch 1 on the switch block labelled SW2 inside the unit with the front of the unit to the left this switch block is just above a white programming connector gt With this switch in the down position the unit will have an ID between 1 amp 8 gt With this switch in the up position the u
112. 3 DEM tata 149 Ds LINEAADU Secada dia 63 DAW 16 35 38 46 47 52 53 55 63 87 92 93 103 143 170 176 186 DAW DUETO sii 169 176 187 DAW CODIO naciona is 25 DAW Debug WindOW ccccoocccnccccccccccnnrnnrrrn 122 DAW KINO Dia adas 69 DAW Metering Genesys software 176 187 DAW Mete ura ado 177 187 DAW RE DOO Uictis nas A tts teak ease 122 DAW RE Imre ne 36 54 61 64 65 DAW RIN Srita dad 106 DAW SEND reran a aE e ei 219 221 DAW SND apres enre 36 54 61 65 DAW SOLO CUT asada 183 191 DAWTE A TEND 95 DAW TY DG a tas 107 DB Grat an Don 91 DEDU Tia 127 133 Detalla n dadas 106 Defaults to ER Mirna sra 57 Delta ao 110 DEV IO cin 157 Device Manada ratico 155 DEN sa 149 Digital inet 154 Digital MONILOF TDW Ee nr in 154 DIOS Ma nas 47 DIM ais 77 78 83 105 Direct Output sssssessssnss 37 51 60 114 125 154 Disk Partition Recoverfy sssssssssssssnsrrenrsrnrnserrne 199 Disk Recovery SoftWware ssssssssssnsrrersrnrnsnrene 196 DIV ON Cercar 40 DITNE aaa mes 123 150 Dline Enableinasin a dada 105 DLINE from DAW via FireWire o occoccccocoo o 151 152 DEN 16 21 35 47 106 125 129 DENNIS 63 DINO Na 16 21 65 123 125 129 150 DMON from DAW Vidi sino AERA 151 DMON from DAW via FireWire oocccoccccocoo o 151 152 DMON led A 53 69 DOWNY MIX Oserin oirlo aa 104 DOWAMDCanasa aaa 75 202 DN conteos 16 33 48 54 85 87 99 226 DINSA MIES usais did 138
113. 4 AES RX 4 DMON 7 amp 8 8 7 20 5 6 7 AES Sync Out 16 15 3 8 AES Sync In 2 1 14 These are AES Sync I O connections only not audio paths Channel Slave Audio Link These should only ever be connected to the corresponding port of the same name on the associated Slave card 1 to 1 2 to 2 and 3 to 3 Please see section on Cabling starting on page 140 126 g C EJ Serial In Out Provided for daisy chained communications from the Genesys computer and through all the Master and Monitor cards 2 x FireWire Two FireWire ports labelled A and B are provided for daisy chaining the FireWire Wordclock In A BNC connector is provided for receiving Wordclock sync if this card is selected to act as the Master sync input for the entire AD DA system Only one instance of the sync source has to be provided to the console and the FireWire software window specifies where the sync needs to be connected to Wordclock Out If Wordclock has been selected as the sync source then this sync signal will also be output on the Wordclock Out BNC It is useful for when the console is running as the sync master set to work with Internal sync and other pieces of equipment need to sync to the console Switchblock 1 Board States Contains 3 switches and should be set as shown left ged Debug For AMS Neve use only In normal operation this switch should be in the do
114. 5 60 68 83 107 COPs orae A a 37 61 CH MX sarita 69 111 CAMPS Uan 61 Cr SAFE ras 37 64 65 76 Ch V Pot Select Genesys software 176 186 CAN da a 172 183 190 Channel and Monitor Path Drag and Drop Order Processing ORD ButtONn cccccecseeeeeee nro 49 Channel CONE 149 Channel Pade tS arica a E 88 Channel TRUE Fico E E 39 Channel Meter iia idad 30 Channel Slave a riada 129 Channel Slave Audio LINK cccceeeeeeeeeeuees 126 130 Channel to STismissinania ais 105 Chama Dintrans 21 Channels Direct Output cocccccccccccoccncnnnncro narran 150 Channels DUNE Topas da 151 Channels DMON Input cccesseeeeeeeeesseensennnnes 151 CHANNELS Cabras 69 CINIDSCES aca 157 CEM pi euuttaxanttena A E EEN 16 46 Click To Show Advanced Options ccceeeeeeees 120 CHIDO iaa io 98 Compliant dr Verona as 156 COMPFeOSS O Rinitis 20 48 Computer Cassette ococonccccccacccnnnorono nora nanarnns 17 208 Console Debug WINCOW cccccseeessneeeeeeeesseunees 122 Console REDOOE casita obra 122 Console Utilities cia da 87 107 Control Palais 157 Control SUITACES sida 174 COPY os ds 97 109 Create EO LINKS tana 97 CRM aaa 16 62 72 CUE Adoro o AA 73 CUE Dalai AA 57 73 83 CUELA Lis 62 GUE 2 ados riales aa 57 73 83 CU MIC aero aa 201 CUSTOMS LOPE iii la 106 CUNT aaa 37 54 77 80 88 CUT SOLO wai atacada 89 CUT DUO Sii 81 82 D DEM a oca 16 73 74 80 153 D EXT 5 2 Inpec rea eati 15
115. 6 Genesys Physical Information Dimensions Height 970mm 38 2 to top of loudspeaker shelf Fader height 720mm 28 3 Height Adjustment 10mm 0 4 16 channel console 1090mm 42 91 Width each 16 channel section 672mm 26 4 Depth 910 5mm 35 8 includes loudspeaker shelf 16 channel console amp frame 77kg 169 75lbs Weight each 16 channel section frame 60kg 132 27lbs Heat Dissipation 16 channel console lt 500 watts each 16 channel section lt 350 watts Power Factor gt 0 65 Voltage Input Voltage Range 90 250 volts AC only auto ranging Standard 16 channel 2 5 to 4 Amps RMS Current each 16 channel section 1 5 3 0 Amps RMS Switch on surge 10 amps for 7ms average Connector Types Console AC Mains fused 6 3 amps IEC males Console AC Mains distribution input IEC male fused 10amps Nearfield loudspeaker Mains outlet IEC Female Mic inputs XLR 3 pin sockets Line inputs Ya TRS Jack sockets Mix Output XLR 3 pin plug Stereo 2T Ya TRS Jack sockets Oscillator Talkback Outputs Ya TRS Jack sockets Cue Mix Outputs Ya TRS Jack sockets Mini 1 L amp R Monitor L S Outputs XLR 3 pin plug Master Mix Insert Sends Returns Ya TRS Jack sockets Insert Mix Return L amp R Sends Ya TRS Jack sockets Producers Talkback Mic Input
116. 6 Aux5 6 7 8 i Si i 8T8 INS SEND gt l Power up l i i Aux 5L gt o Default i ESE l l l l e ese ma i D gt ZERRE 2T On gt Software oS th eee Aux 5R gt o De 4 aQ controlled mori tolted Pig ata l l l l Yel By l l Cue 2 L gt o l J l l l l 2 Aux 6L gt 2 i i i l I I l f Cue 2 R gt o ye T I AE 4 el Bp Ee ie Ser Na AE AA IS e NA A e a gale eee et e btn Ait ee al ye Re a Pee PAM E GAs ay af ee ad Cet ae ES gt en Soh ok Agee E Ret E ene Aux 6R gt o 4 i i hear Jl Solo Master Syst olo Master System ing AORTA HEADPHONE MIXER i i alo l CH MON 8T AFL i 1 L MOM SOLO SOLO SOLO ENABLE op i LATCH ENCUT ENCUT ENCUT 8T CH MON Rev 1L gt N Rev 1R gt AA AAA AAA AE AAA ASADAS E E gt Lat SOLO LINK Hd be 2b 1 MONO i 3 Rev 2R gt 9 E Q 1 SOLO gt 4 D gt e Rev 3L gt gt an 7 Tilt 1 2K Bal Cue 1 Indicator ea FR SoftWare Setup Rev 3R gt dbs dbs Level l Yel gt gt B gt A 8T Distructive Fink puss A e Roe fal ao o I gt J Rev 4R gt a i Y NY Y On Off Se Cue o p 1L lt t a Grn 69 l l l E Dim gt Mon amp Mtr gt t X gt Rev 1 4 Cut do l Yel Q T R l gh dh aks l Flash lt lt DC ree jj gt el Lae YY C Cue o p 1R y ies L J Mix L gt o UTIL oO i 6 gt Mon amp Mtr a m q gt
117. 73 AUX T Dietas 73 CUE AG CUE 2 ral isa 73 MiS ida tada 73 lala 73 Dra EE TA T tratada 73 EXT Le EXT taa 73 EXT o A EA Ao riada 73 Externals 5 20 OPON cariar a aaa A rennin 73 DEX T edad ia 74 INT A iS 74 DM ansias 75 SUM daa oda asocia 75 INS oia 75 ST Ol DOWNMI ais 75 DIE A ro 75 A aA NA tates 75 Pad tado 76 O 76 MS Eladio daa aia 76 SP aa 76 ABe a Pa o 7 oe 76 SALSAS leds das 77 ES SOLO ediren o a a a 77 LESACA RES S7 Rias 77 Master CUT coats da ia 77 DIM aio ala 77 TM e ad ads 78 Main Monitor POt occccccoccccccononnor 78 Master SEL mode on the CONTROL ROOM MONITOR SOCIO e 80 To Enter and Exit Master SEL Mode cccceccacaceeees 80 To Tie a Set of Speakers to the Stereo DownMix 80 To Lock Relative Levels Within a Loudspeaker Set 81 To Lock the S and LS RS to Sets of Loudspeakers 81 To Route 8T Outputs to Specific Loudspeakers 82 Va a rd 82 TALKBACK Section 83 CUE AS CUB Za A 83 SLATE iaa EE 83 O 83 TALES na ado midi 84 RED EIGH Tinunu lidiar 84 Spare BUON ota dae ds 84 Talkback Enable Located in the Settings screen 84 Talkback Latch Located in the Settings screen 84 DAW CONSOLE CONTROL Screen cceessenssenees 85 Ea fete alata cere ta AEA 85 DIN tao 85 Rendir 85 SL MIG MOOC a 86 Group MIXING MO raras 86 FL gt FS DUO Sisa dea a 87 DA Wisin A a As 87 Faders amp Keypad Channel FaderS iia ras 88 Uta aos 88 SOLO AAN 88 Ana DIS rs 88 SEL GADEA i n 88
118. 8 on ed AS od eh IS ie Red Sel pol Ml Pre Yel Sy La aad y i i G Mon 2 Ye DC gt O__ 87 Even Aux2 on iy A cee Mon Pre Fade Pre cut gt l Or an Pi ar Oy pe see or T Lo N p dh 00 gt Eee To Aux 2 i de 7 e Did Mix CH SOLO CUT lt el op TT gt CH SOLO CUT BUS DC gt _0 O gt mO ol g i Aux2 99 SY i R CH tt gt CH SOLO ENABLE BUS R e E AS MITO LARGE ges E eb lt lt CH AFL ENABLE BUS a Sel 1 L Red gt o G Mon Ved Pre Yal 8y E FADER OR DE gt F e SEE LS Monitor Mon 53 Yel c gt o 27 Oe Aux3 on MON KNOB A ION TITS AFL Relay RH a Grn By DEPENDING A SOLO 14 E E y ON DER KNOB o gt mi ae ee A AAN H To N AR ime ana POSITION Mon AFL L gt F ON Y al DC gt o oi DC gt O 0 gt P lis l I fore _ aaia ee SNE Ses Aux3 pe A o ee eN es PAE Se Red Sel l Lat Pre Qs Yel Sx Ean E Qe Mon PFL Oh Mc i Mon 3 Yel DC gt O CTL Aux amp on DC gt o l Aux4 de Grn Sy M l i gt Im ck T gt Eo 4 gt To Aux 4 MON SOLO CUT lt ol eH gt MON SOLO CUT BUS J or Mix J A an al Effects Return DE l Ot gt CF oe Loa gt MON SOLO ENABLE BUS ra Aux4 CH lt En Sel ef lt lt MON AFL ENABLE BUS Lat e Aux 5 6 gt 8T8 ene Aux6 Sel E Red Q y BT Odd amp ee SO Yel Mon Q Yel gt Pre 3 Yel ae l gt Even CTL Grn Qy gt Mon Q Yel gt pl gt N A 1 gt To Aux SL Aux5 6 EA E B g an ah E i i
119. A E E A EEE EEEE ae Soa Laan AT 61 O ET 61 OSG FRO ste aiii AA TEED 61 METERS Sector id coa 61 CAMTRS 0 lada tera 61 CAT rar aio is 61 DAW SND tancia data 61 DAW REV ds 61 OT MIRS airea O A te uudaeanentennsees 62 a E EE A E aes Samer EE E AE E 62 AUX orata a O 62 TAE E ica E EAEE TE A E T A 62 CR Mea ae a e ee 62 AT MIRS eaea aa aaa aaa a 62 A 62 CRM res a an Sova eee a aetna A i 62 E EA O OT 62 CUELA La obeso oie eit 62 MASTER SEL Se ction cccccencccnccnnsencennnennenneuenuenas 63 A mmieeseeraadnes 63 A ei cothasen a a aa 63 Nr AI 63 DA Wisin A 63 DEN Sd arde 63 SW Paisa 63 A O 64 CASA FE ds 64 MON SAFE at 64 So ARE aia a 64 Wa 64 LATE dde 65 RESET ea 65 A 65 DAW SND atraido aida 65 DAW RET masa a 65 VP 2 amp DMON TB data idol 65 ROUTE SEL Sector 67 FENG cari 67 COD dalt dda 67 SAVE minas aca cas 67 RTE Mode on the ROUTE SEL Section ssseseuses 68 TES di canada 68 dO O 68 A A E A A EE 68 Orina 68 MON a a 68 MADRES sados 68 Audio Routing on Consoles with a missing Computer Cassettes rs 69 CUE MIX SGCUON ina nens 71 EXT bA PROP EE conus E 71 Ulsa rai ida 71 AUX aan add 71 TIE ES arar alerted aceite 71 DAL a aros 71 EVEL A bicantuntassaltadagat ino aakaneagannee an 72 Master SEL mode on the CUE MIX Section 72 To Select the Aux Feeding the Cue ccceeeeeees 72 To Set the Utility Path Feeding into the Cue 72 CONTROL ROOM MONITOR Se ctiOn csscessennsennnes
120. B button opens another screen that allows you to navigate to whatever is attached to the USB port To move files between locations use the NETWORK and USB buttons to set the upper window to the desired location gt In the lower window navigate to the desired file location gt Drag and drop the relevant file between the two windows It is the same operation regardless of whether you are backing up from or restoring to the Genesys drive gt Alternatively right click on the folder file s to be copied and from the fly out menu select the Copy option gt Right click on the destination location in the upper window and select the Paste option A copy of the file will be placed in the destination location providing a file or folder of the same name does not already exist in that location If a file folder of the same name already exists in the location you are copying to you will asked to either Overwrite the file or Cancel the operation Delete Select the file by clicking on it This could either be an individual Mix Recall store or a higher level folder Press Delete You will be asked to confirm your actions gt Click Yes and the selected file will be removed 110 RTE EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System This screen is a graphic representation of the internal routing of the console and is shown whenever the RTE SEL button is pressed depending on
121. BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Standard CMOS Features Miscellaneous Control Advanced BIOS Features Load optimized Defaults Advanced Chipset Features Load Standard Defaults Integrated Peripherals Set Supervisor Password Power Management Setup Set User Password PnP PCI Configurations Save amp Exit Setup PC Health Status Exit Without Saving Esc Quit tTl Select Item F10 Save amp Exit Setup Time Date Hard Disk Type gt Use the Arrow keys to scroll down to Advanced BIOS Features highlighted above and Press ENTER gt Using the arrow keys on your keyboard scroll down to the option Hard Disk Boot Priority and press ENTER gt A sub menu will appear on your screen and you should scroll to the option labeled USB HDDO using the Arrow keys This option should now be highlighted Use the Page Up Page Down keys to move this option into the first position at the top of the list i e 1 USB HDDO gt When you have done this press F10 then the Y key and ENTER The computer will now reboot 198 The Recovery Process EaseUS Todo Backup gt Once the system begins to reboot itself it will present you with a start up screen gt You now have 10 seconds to select an option form this screen before the system starts automatically gt Ensure that the option Genesys Windows Disk Restore Linux is highlighted otherwise highlight this option by using the Arrow keys and pressi
122. C button switches the time display of the Genesys software between bars and beats and the timecode format This change is also reflected on the Transport bar of Nuendo Cubase AUX Press the AUX button and it will light up AUX is used to control Sends gt Make sure the F5 button is not on i e FLIP is off If FLIP is on press F5 to turn it off The Genesys software at the top will indicate the function or mode you are in Sends Channel View Mode DAW control allows you to control up to 8 Sends per track Press the fader SEL button for Logic track 1 or the first assigned DAW track You have now selected DAW track 1 You will see in the top right corner the display indicator has changed to O1 if not already to indicate you have selected track 1 The fader SEL button will also flash gt F1 F2 or the fader SEL buttons are used to select which DAW track you are controlling gt F3 and F4 buttons are used to select the send parameter There are four parameters in total for each of the 8 sends per track 187 EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2 Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System 1 Send level 2 Activate send on off 3 Pre post fader mode 4 Destination of the send signal The Ch V Pots are now divided into groups of 8 There are 8 sends per track with four parameters per send The DAW control assigns the send parameters to the surface in the following manner for a 16 channel Gene
123. Compliant IEEE 1394 Host Controller In Control Panel Device Manager select Properties then the Details Device Instance Id i kd t a b PCISVE N_11 A AS 10159017 amp REY_08 4815946650 As shown left if you see the text DEV_5901 then you have the FW643 chipset installed lt gt MAC Hold both the Command Apple key and the S key down while switching on the computer The Mac will display a series of information The FireWire device should be LUCENT 5901 and if you see this text the Mac is fitted with the FW643 chipset 157 4081 Quad Mic Preamp Introduction to the 4081 CHAN tie CHAMMEL AT Tau The 4081 Quad Mic Preamp builds on the incredible success of the 1081 and 1081R modules and provides both powerful control and legendary Neve sound Perfect for vocals ADR and Foley recording the 4081 features make it the number one choice for any studio OB truck or live stage environment Every function of the 4081 can be controlled directly from the front panel or by remote control using a Mac or PC with the Neve Remote Control software This provides a simple and elegant solution for users of Pro Tools and other DAW systems Multiple 4081 units can be linked together to create up to 64 independent channels of Mic Pre amps or Line Level inputs all controlled from a single point The unit always powers up with all settings levels and states as they wer
124. DAW through the FireWire cable and sends it to the digital Line input on the channel AES Receivers DLINE Takes the audio from the AES digital DLINE Receivers and sends it to the digital Line input gt Once set click Apply to reconfigure the FireWire buss with your selection gt This input is selected on a channel by channel basis by pressing the Input Selector Knob at the top of a channel strip until the adjacent DLN led lights blue This input will not be available for selection if an AD DA card is not fitted in that section of the console If you wish to swap ALL of the channel inputs to the Digital Line input then on the CH SEL section of Master Monitor Panel make sure that none of the MIC LN or DAW buttons are selected Only once all these three options are switched off will the input will be set to the digital line input The adjacent blue DLN led will light to confirm this selection plus the DLN led will light on each channel strip that has an AD DA card fitted Channels DMON Input This selects the audio to be sent on the digital monitor path There are two options available only one of which can be selected at a time e DMON from DAW via FireWire Takes the audio from your DAW through the FireWire cable and sends it to the DMON Input of the channel strip e AES Receivers DMON Takes the audio from the AES DMON Receivers and sends it to the DMON Input of the channel strip gt Once set click Apply
125. FL buttons LINK Lights yellow and makes the 8T if linked in the Settings screen Channel and Monitor systems be linked for Momentary Interlock and Latch modes in destructive solo so that any solo pressed will operate all of the Monitor or Channel Cuts within the two systems apart obviously for the Cut selected on that Channel or Monitor LINK can only be selected when CH SAFE or MON SAFE are off and will be cancelled if either of these two SAFE modes are selected DAW SND Lights red when selected and is interlocked with DAW RET DAW RET Lights green when selected and is interlocked with DAW SND I P 2 8 DMON led I P 2 lights yellow when selected and toggles I P 2 and the DMON led through the following three states I P 2 DMON DAW SND DAW RTN Availability 1 press Off Off The interlock between SND and RTN is still available so you can swap 2 press On Off between the two rd The interlock is suspended and DAW SND will be forced into RTN and 3 press Off On locked The I P 2 and or DMON leds on each module will also light when these selections are changed I P 2 splits away the DAW monitor from monitoring DAW Send and Return on the channel path classic in line monitoring and gives the DAW monitor a second input to allow for DAW returns to be brought into the console on the channel path and monitor path separately so doubling the mix input capability of the console 65
126. In D 55 50 S oS N z 2 022 O As a aa oc es QUE CO Y C gt H 2 23 O gt IMPORTANT SAFTY INSTRUCTIONS gt Read these instructions Keep these instructions gt Heed all warnings gt Follow all instructions gt Do not use this apparatus near water gt Clean only with a dry cloth gt Do not block any ventilation openings gt Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions gt Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat gt Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet As this apparatus is constructed to Class I it shall be connected to a MAINS socket outlet with protective earthing connection Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit the apparatus Where the MAINS plug or an appliance coupler is used as the disconnect device the disconnect device shall remain readily operable gt Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer gt Use only with the cart stand trip
127. Interlocked with Auto TB If ticked will turn CUE1 and CUE 2 from momentary to latching even if Play is being cycled on the DAW Remote operation of the CUES will also be changed from momentary to latching in TB Latch mode 84 DAW CONSOLE CONTROL Screen ATA oF COS 1 2 3 4 5 6 a oor di E E E EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System The Monitor Panel has 18 dedicated buttons with fixed functions plus 4 soft rotary encoders whose function changes depending on what is selected elsewhere on the console For the purposes of this manual they are numbered from left to right 1 to 4 Each of these 4 free running encoders has a push On Off switch associated with the rotary control None of these four push buttons will have a function unless either you are in DAW mode and control has been established between the DAW and Genesys or you are set to controlling the EQ Dynamics or 2T EQ Please see the section on EQ on page 96 DYN Please see section on DYN on page 99 2TRK The screen on the left shows the page that will open when working in Group mode It is possible to turn each 2T On and Off via this page by clicking underneath the relevant 2T 2T output ON OFF button gt Each 2T also has 10 dB of trim available which is set using the scroll arrows next to each Trim field It is also possible to set the overall 2T output level This ranges fro
128. LB BB pp E E znz ie a R R D ioe L lt gt MA ON XL or 54LS lt From Rev 4R TEEN i 1p iya To 8T8 Mon PFL Pe ae Mon Pan In aN Bor gt TO roti es ee Q Yell Stereo l E amp yo 816 0 Mix af ae Py an Red LCR Ne Ror SAS Trees if Mon Solo gt BH 4 PAN TI EET 1 AO ea H Cut lt YY lt DC A EQ MON 877 0 G me yh Se 7 e A ES robo ra l Automation gt _ gt ka i gt o oe Lor C de me fe Die ef ot ride iq _5s VEL MON 878 0 o ERA gt l l Joyce ofl l o y Ror 51S peo pl Red als a A Presi cote Optional t l KR E AUTO lt Automato l i i rl pen 4 pla ros US teh nba ra I Pt ie eae pol gt es eh Aux 135 6L L_ gt ro to 8T i TE 1 ol le eth By Rs e E Tet Re et ee NR Tap AS A te a ES rey AULA sl ES SR A AA A SEIT ASL A AA I ae 3 eh ee eee 0 P lt 4 to 8T Aux 1 gt 817 Q pra Red x Aux 1 3 amp Aa F 5 6L to 8T7 IN ol A Pre 3 Yel Aux1 on PERR Aux to 8T Lat Odd amp Even Mon Q Yel 91 0aq A A a Aux1 Aux2 Aux3 Aux4 Aux5L Aux5R AUux6L Aux6R PER MONO CHANNEL MONITOR CH SOLO i l i CTL a I Sites as lt Auxl al A E CH Yel TERRA re rade rre cu a Ins 1 Pre Fade Pre cut gt ch j p oe a a lo ee ee cd WH l Mix EN e op ae Ins 2 Pre Fade Pre cut gt _ 4 o Pq i DC gt SHORE o pha EQ Pre Fade Pre cut gt m o a ee op Saa PA a dl DYN Pre Fade Pre cut gt o le Aux 2 gt 8T
129. Left and Front Right Use the Pan control to move the signal within this L R image Turn the Mon knob up on Channel 1 to see signal on 8T 5 and 8T 6 Rear Left and Rear Right Use the Pan control to move the signal within the LS RS image gt On Channel 1 turn Aux 1 up to see signal appear on 8T 7 Centre gt On Channel 1 turn Aux 2 up to see signal appear on 8T 8 Sub Using the fader and Monitor knob plus their associated Pan controls and Aux 1 the signal can now be placed anywhere in the Surround field Once the Stereo surround has been set up it will be useful to save as an L R surround template for future use Mixing with Stereo Pans in Surround Using the L R surround template we can now add to it and create a complete Surround Routing template It is possible to create a Stereo mix and a 5 1 Surround mix and output them both from the console at the same time The Surround mix is configured by using six of the 8T busses plus Aux 1 and Aux 2 to supply discrete feeds to the Centre and Sub speakers e 8T 1 amp 2 behave as Front Left and Front Right e 8T 5 amp 6 behave as Left Surround amp Right Surround e 8T 7 behaves as Centre e 8T 8 behaves as Sub On any given path 41 e The contribution level to the two front speakers is set by the CH Fader e The contribution level to the two rear speakers is set by the Monitor pot The diagram below shows how the 8Ts and the first two auxiliaries can b
130. MITIN AES SYNC IN OUT ft II re Os FIRE MRE WORDCLOCK SER AL This cassette provides 8 channels with AD DA converters Depending on the digital channel requirements a Master or Master and Slave card can be installed in groups or individually Without this card the DLN and DMON functionality and leds will not be available on the console The digital converter board provides facility for Digital Line Inputs DLN and digital DAW returns DMON into the desk plus enabling the Direct Outputs on each channel to be sent digitally to the DAW Installation Instructions Remove the mains power cord from the console Remove the faceplate on the rear of the console shown above and remove the connector blanking plate If a new faceplate has been provided discard the one removed and use the new one Slide the digital converter board upside down into the lowest available slot and push it to the rear until the connectors mate securely onto the backplane Screw the faceplate back into place at points highlighted in red above ensuring all the connectors comfortably clear the faceplate Secure all the connectors in place through the faceplate using the included pillars and screws On larger consoles it is possible to have one of each of the above cards for each block of 8 faders providing EQ Dynamics and digital lines externals for the entire console AM5982 For cards not initially present the connector plates
131. MPORTANT NOTICE The Genesys computer cassette runs either Microsoft Windows Vista or Microsoft Windows 7 operating system OS and as such the standard Power Up and Power Down procedures should be observed just as they are with any other computer system Important points to observe Please make sure that when shutting the computer down or to turn off the console you Shutdown from within the Genesys software Click System then click Turn Off Console Never turn the power switch on the rear of the Meterbridge off without first shutting the computer down correctly Removing the power in this manner will cause the computer to fail to boot up correctly the next time the console is powered up Once the computer has been shut down and the external screen goes blank please wait for another 20 seconds before removing the power to Genesys using the switch on the Meterbridge This is because stopping the graphical output to the screen is not the last thing that the computer does before shutting down and will continue to write files for a short while afterwards Do NOT put the computer into Standby and then removing the power will cause the computer to fail to boot up correctly the next time the console is powered on NB If for any reason after several minutes the Windows OS does not start up on VGA 2 after power up connect a monitor to the VGA 1 connector on consoles which have this connector available otherwise leave at VGA 2 an
132. Mike PC Ni Computer a Disk drives E Display adapters E DVD CD ROM drives Ss Human Interface Devices Ca IDE ATA ATAPI controllers IEEE 1394 Bus host controllers q Texas Instruments 1394 lt gt Keyboards PY Mice and other pointing de Disable E Monitors Uninstall E Network adapters 1 Ports COM amp LPT Scan for hardware changes Bi Processors Sound video and game cot 1 System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers Update Driver Software Properties Launches the Update Driver Software Wizard for the selected device Select Search automatically for updated driver software Once the Driver Update has completed restart the Genesys computer and the standard driver will be ready to be used 156 Recommended OHCI Chipsets To get the best from the FireWire protocol ie the maximum number of paths available you are advised to ensure you have the best available OHCI Chipset on your DAW computer We recommend use of the FW643 chipset as manufactured by Agere LSI This chipset is found on some computers the latest Mac Book Pro for example and on some PCI Express or Express cards All FireWire path counts quoted in this document have been achieved using this chipset How do find out which Chipset my Mac or PC has been fitted with OHCI Compliant IEEE 1394 Host Controller Properties AX PC General Driver Details Resources ES J OHCI
133. O Installation Instructions Remove the mains power cord from the console Unscrew the faceplate from the chassis at points A and B above Remove the computer card from the rear of the console If a new computer card has been provided then return the one removed and use the new one Mount the digital converter board onto the faceplate of the computer card using the included pillars and screws Then slide the complete assembly back into the cassette until the connectors mate securely onto the backplane Screw the faceplate onto the chassis highlighted in red above 22 Optional Software Packages Automation When a console has the optional automation package fitted it comes with the following additions to a standard console e The Encore Plus automation software to record edit and play back automation of Faders Cuts and Channel Events Aux On Off Insert On Off etc e Motorised channel faders amp monitor faders enabling playback of automated moves e A row of Master Automation buttons next to the Main Output faders for setting the automation modes e Extra SEL and GLIDE buttons above the faders For the operation of the Encore automation software please see the separate Encore Automation User Manual part number 527 390 Recall The Recall package means that as well as taking snapshots of the console Surface as you would on a standard console including any internal routing the Recall software allows
134. ON Input e Channels Direct Output to AES Transmitters If any of the FireWire options are set when the FireWire cable is removed their selection will be preserved and remembered for the next time when the FireWire cable is reinserted Due to the inherent restrictions of the FireWire protocol itself the FireWire 148 Channel Section 1 8 Mid Bitrate O is EST 17 24 Sync Source Internal Workclock dh AES Sync Acs cH Firewire Channel Count 96 bandwidth is limited and the capability of the FireWire system depends on the sample rate Below is the maximum number of paths the FireWire is able to handle set by sample frequency Sample Rate kHz Maximum number of channels Bit rate 44 1 48 96 LO bit rate 88 2 96 48 MID bit rate 176 4 192 24 HI bit rate Achieved using the FW643 OHCI chipset on the target computer The maximum number of channels is also dependent on the speed of the DAW computer When changing sample rates the last selection made for either Lo Mid or Hi sample rates will be displayed at the top of the Channel Section of the screen This means it is possible to swap between for example 48kHz and 176kHz and have both sets of settings saved each set automatically recalled when the system detects the change in sample rate The words Hi BitRate Mid BitRate or Lo BitRate will appear at the top of this screen to let you know that different
135. Panel LS Settings 8T To Mon This matrix allows any of the 8T to be fed to any of the speakers There are no limits as to which 8Ts feed which speakers Click in the junction of the speaker and the 8T to make or break the route A Y will be placed on screen at the appropriate junction on screen when a route has been created Sub To DownMix The Down mix is when a Surround Mix is collapsed down to either Stereo or Mono Ticking this option includes the Sub feed when the mix is collapsed to stereo otherwise it will be not be included 5 1 Mono Allows the collapse of a 5 1 Surround mix down to Mono LS SOLO Sets the L C R LS S and RS speaker buttons to act as a SOLO rather than as a CUT The LS SOLO led above the speaker buttons will light when selected SUB Applies a fixed Lo pass filter at 82Hz to the Sub speaker for checking purposes Down Mix To When a Surround mix is collapsed down to Stereo this down mix can also be tied to a set of loudspeakers If the Down Mix is tied to the M1 speaker set then selecting M1 will also operate the stereo downmix via the ST button Sub Speaker Locks Locks the house sub on the A set of loudspeakers to B M1 M2 loudspeaker sets LS RS Speaker Locks Locks the house LS RS on the A set of loudspeakers to B M1 M2 loudspeaker sets 104 8T Solo Linking 8T Solo Linking Speaker Trims gt Click the speaker set button you wish to set the Trims fo
136. Press the knob again to set the AFL level the AFL led will light The AFL level will be shown on the alpha display and has a range of OdB to 36dB gt Rotate the knob to set the value In Safe mode whenever an AFL is pressed anywhere on the console the AFL signal will be at this amount relative to the LS Monitor Level Press the knob again to set the PFL level the PFL led will light The PFL level will be shown on the alpha display and has a range of OdB to 36dB In Safe mode whenever a PFL is pressed anywhere on the console the PFL signal will be at this amount relative to the LS Monitor Level gt Rotate the knob to set the value Press the knob again to set the SIF Solo In Front level the SIF led will light The SIF percentage will be shown on the alpha display and ranges from 30 to 100 e 100 indicates you are listening to 100 of the AFL signal and nothing else 78 e 30 indicates you are listening to 30 AFL signal and 70 of the current monitoring selection e 50 indicates equal amounts of AFL and Monitor selection gt Rotate the knob to set the value Press the knob again to return to it s default state of setting the Control Room Monitoring Level Any changes you have made will be automatically saved 79 Master SEL mode on the CONTROL ROOM MONITOR Section Ga a S a To Enter and Exit Master SEL Mode ALEDO dE Ss ala gt Press and hold down LOCK on the Main Mon
137. Q is being controlled by the encoders If that EQ is linked to any other EQs then the SEL buttons on the linked channels will flash to show they are part of that link EQ control There are 3 rotary controls which relate to the first three encoders from the left all of which have fixed stepped values gt Change the Cut and Boost by rotating the associated encoders The preset frequencies of these three controls are selected by pushing and turning the encoders As you do this a led will light on screen to indicate your selection From left to right these are 1 Encoder Lo Shelf OFF 35Hz 60Hz 110Hz 220Hz 2 Encoder Mid Band OFF 0 36 07 1 6 32 48 7 2 3 Encoder Hi Shelf OFF 16 kHz 12kHz 10 kHz gt The 4 encoder on the right can be pressed to select Hi Q on the Mid band frequencies When selected the HI Q graphic on screen reflect this When the EQ button is selected it will bring up the last EQ used on screen gt Using the lt 8 gt buttons on the Monitor panel or the channel SEL buttons select the channel you want to control The selected path will be displayed NB You can select EQ a different way by pressing a channel SEL button which will bring up the EQ for that channel gt Turning any of the first three encoders will Cut or Boost that EQ parameter gt Turning on the x5 button will speed up the turns of the encoders Pressing and turning together will
138. Q selected will be copied to those EQs as they are added levels frequencies on off state This will overwrite any settings that may currently be there the channel SEL buttons will light solid to show they have been added to the link gt Once all the required EQs have been linked press the F4 button or click Setup Links on screen to exit Link Setup mode NB e An EQ can only form part of one link e There is no limit to the number of EQ links that can be created nor to the number of EQs that may be part of that link e EQ links can be set across multiple EQ cards they are not limited to just within one 8 fader section of the desk e EQ links form part of the console snapshot that is taken in the background and if the option is set in System this will load when the desk is rebooted e The EQ links form part of any Recall Stores created and any all the EQ links will be recalled when the store is recalled 97 To Interrogate EQ Links Press and hold the F5 button or click and hold on the Show Links button on screen The channel SEL buttons will light to show those EQs that form part of a link On screen the currently displayed channel will also show which EQs it is linked to by displaying those channels in a drop down list to the right of the screen gt Once interrogated release the F5 button mouse button To Copy EQ Settings From One Path To Another This allows EQ settings to be copied from one
139. SB ports at the back of the computer cassette The image above shows this type of keyboard along with the highlighted keys which will be used in the recovery procedure gt Connect a Windows compatible USB Mouse to the console via the USB port located on the Master Meter Panel at the front of the console Insert the USB recovery stick into one the USB ports at the back of the computer cassette 195 BIOS Setup gt Depending on your computer cassette your Genesys may be limited to a screen resolution of 640 x 480 You can determine this if both VGA 1 and VGA 2 connectors are present on the back of the computer cassette The Disk Recovery Software runs at a higher resolution This is normal and you should not attempt to correct this gt Depending on your computer cassette your Genesys may have two VGA connectors You can determine this if both VGA 1 and VGA 2 connectors are present on the back of the computer cassette If this is the case then move the monitor cable which should be located at VGA 2 to VGA 1 Otherwise make sure the monitor cable is connected to VGA 2 gt POWER ON the console The disk recovery process can now begin When the Genesys console computer has powered up and the monitor is on an instruction will appear at the bottom of the screen which states PRESS DEL TO ENTER SETUP gt Continue to press DEL key on the keyboard gt You will then be given the menu as shown below If the menu below
140. T strip A single press of the SEL button will open the routing screen for even numbered 8Ts A double press of the SEL button will open the routing screen for odd numbered 8Ts Pressing SEL and then pressing the adjacent PRE button will open the screen for the Revs RTE Mode on the ROUTE SEL Section RTE SEL Works as an On Off button for this section of the panel and lights yellow when engaged It switches the screen over to the Routing Screen display shown below This also allows the e CH and MON e LandR e 1to8s 4 gt buttons to be used to route Channels and Revs to the 8T and Mix busses Lights yellow and acts as On Off buttons These buttons allow the routing of 8Ts within the Channel and Rev modules L amp R Lights yellow and acts as On Off buttons They route the path to the Main Mix buss within the Channel or Rev modules As with the 8Ts above scrolling up or down the channel or Rev numbers will allow you to route to Mix L and Mix R NB When deselecting L amp R from Channel or Monitor you will need to select CH or MON when lit first to be able to deselect L and or R CH This On Off button lights yellow when pressed and allows the Channel path to be routed to Mix L and Mix R in the channel module MON This On Off button lights yellow when pressed and allows the Monitor path to be routed to Mix L and Mix R in the channel module CH and MON are interlocked lt
141. T2 EXT3 EXT4 Toggle Cycle 6 ie x Ye Toggle Cycle rel Qs Yel Yel Yel AFL PFL o OFE Mong Rem Dim Je lt DC gt Se 2 Rem Cut A aeo i Yel 3 AFL ear eee Software Cut L Z On as DC 4 PFL F Q gt 4 i Monitor Lock 5 SIF a lt d SPK Locks Setup Red o _ Power up e e e e en E a Jo efau l l DC Power u l l Flash No Default P DC gt n Cut R E i a Mon Pot o a eee a lq Software ALONE Vin Level id Red 93 Cu de A eet a ee L gt To Sum Chan and Mon AFL E etup Q e PFL Control 7 Ti A EXT 1 Q gt To LRGSLSRS Rev AFL DC r ST gt lt TB Dim vas D EXT DEP BOT 0 to 36d8 O Red amp Lat 5 1 Mono Display 3 B ST BNS SWP lt E Ins Yel amp gt Yel amp o m gt To Cue and Headphone mixes I l SoftWare T EXT 2 Q To LRCSLS RS rel Q O lt 0t EA Dc gt O N To 8T and 2T i 4 Setup Mono From EXTERNAL 2 gt Meters O lt 0C to PH Left e optional gt KEL ES DAC o p SELECTOR Ao Yel 69 ve d e lt SPK Folddowns Dem EXT 3 Q a To L R O lt 0C e i je Lat La La gt I Lat A La La Lat Pink Noise DC 3 l Q q To LR Monitor vd Ps gt gt lt lt i C oe N i Insertion Pro 9 m LLSOPA L Q 000 000 000 4008 Trim e y 0 Q gt g a gt Hs gt gt gt LIS OP 8 l i 1 bid Pi I l i LLS OPM l To 8T and 2T Meters l l haw dde ddo gt Pid aks Cue and HP Mixe
142. That path s Trim value will now be shown in the Control Room alpha display with a range of 10dB and in the Settings Screen display Turn the monitoring knob to set this value gt Either select another loudspeaker or exit Master SEL Mode to lock these Trims in place To Lock the S and LS RS to Sets of Loudspeakers It is possible to lock both the Left Surround and Right Surround speakers and or the Sub to a specific set of Surround speakers Press and hold down LOCK on the Main Monitor Panel then press RTE SEL to enter Master SEL mode All of the console SEL leds will flash Most of the Monitor Panels buttons will have their functionality blocked out Select either B M1 or M2 the button will flash It will now be possible to lock the S and or the LS RS to the selected set of loudspeakers For each press of the Monitor pot as the route is made the alpha display will show e S Sub e LSRS Left Surround and Right Surround e LRSS Left Surround Right Surround and Sub e OFF No speaker locks in place gt Once set press RTE SEL to exit Master SEL Mode to lock these assignments into place 81 To Route 8T Outputs to Specific Loudspeakers It is possible to route the 8T Outputs directly to individual loudspeakers Press and hold down LOCK on the Main Monitor Panel then press RTE SEL to enter Master SEL mode The RTE SEL button will flash along with all of the console SEL leds Most of the Mo
143. The Route Present blocks will be shown half red half yellow to indicate it is an LCR route and yellow for a L R stereo or mono route In the example above the first nine paths contribute to 8T s 1 2 as the L R part of the LCR panning between Left and Right odds amp evens with 8T7 acting as a Centre The second 7 paths will contribute to the 8T s 5 6 as the LS RS stereo surround 8T8 is routed as the sub via AUX1 gt 8T7 button selected on all 16 channels For example route Monitor path 1 to 8T1 8T2 and 8T7 e Panning hard left will send the signal to 8T1 e Panning centre will send the signal to 8T7 with 9dB divergence between Centre and Left amp Right e Panning hard right will send the signal to 8T2 Routing Monitor Path 10 6 to 8T 5 6 e Panning hard left will send signal to 8T5 LS surround e Panning hard right will send signal to 8T6 RS surround Routing Monitor Path 1 16 to 8T8 Makes the sub buss if required It will be noted that the same type of routing can be done on the channel path simultaneously allowing for large complex surround mixes to be 39 Panning accomplished This means a full 5 1 surround mix can be created on the 8Ts by using routing and panning including having two spare 8Ts 3 4 to be used and configured as required Once the LCR surround system has been set up it will be useful to save as an LCR surround template for future use The audio can be sent to the 8Ts Pre
144. X 2 2 10 AES RX 2 3 11 screen 1 AES TRANSMIT 161 AES IN OUT 1 0000000000000 000000000000 Pin Signal name Male XLR 1 pin 6 AES TX 1 2 18 AES TX 1 3 19 screen 1 Male XLR 2 pin 17 AES TX 2 2 4 AES TX 2 3 1 screen 1 AES 1 contains data for channels 1 L and 2 R from the 4081 e AES 2 contains data for channels 3 L and 4 R from the 4081 On the AES Ins Outs 25 way connector on the rear of the 4081 a number 1 printed next to the corner of the connector indicates the location of Pin 1 Please note that analogue breakout cables will not be suitable for use with this connector Ensure you use a cable wired to the Tascam AES convention instead An analogue cable is wired pin to pin an AES cable has the pins crossed so pin 1 goes to pin 25 etc These signals are on a 25 way D sub connector 25 way Pin Male XLR 1 Standard cable 6 Line Out 1 hot 2 5 18 Line Out 1 cold 19 screen 1 Male XLR 2 17 Line Out 2 hot 6 4 Line Out 2 cold screen 1 Male XLR 3 3 Line Out 3 hot 2 7 15 Line Out 3 cold 16 screen 1 Male XLR 4 14 Line Out 4 hot 8 Line Out 4 cold 3 2 screen 1 Female XLR 1 12 Insert IN 1 hot 2 1 24 Insert IN 1 cold 25 screen 1 Female XLR 2 23 Insert IN 2 hot 2 2 10 Insert IN 2 cold 11 screen 1 16
145. You are now controlling the Send Position for Send 1 Turn the Ch V Pot slowly one click notch at a time up to a maximum of 2 left or 2 right and the Send Position will change from Pre to Post to Post Pan You can see the Genesys software and Logic Pro to verify this In a similar way you can change the Send Position for all other DAW tracks gt Press F4 You are now controlling the Send Mute for Send 1 Press the Ch V Pot and the Send Mute will change from Mute to Active You can see the Genesys software and Logic Pro to verify this gt In a similar way you can change the Send Mute for all other DAW tracks Press F5 and FLIP should now be on With FLIP on the Genesys faders will now have the same functionality as the Ch V Pots Press F3 until you are once again controlling the Send Level Now with FLIP on move the Genesys fader for DAW track 1 The Send Level will change confirm this 178 by looking at Logic Pro and Genesys software gt In a similar way with FLIP on you can now use the faders to control and change the Send Destination Position and Mute The fader MUTE button always acts as the Send Mute parameter when FLIP is on To apply Destination changes you still have to press the Ch V Pot If you do not press the Ch V Pot after setting the Send Destination regardless of the FLIP mode any changes you have made will be lost when you change another parameter or send destination So always remember to press the
146. a if the refresh value is set too low in Logic When there is particularly dense communications data this will result in it not being displayed accurately and a slight lag may be evident To ensure it does not happen please set the Display Duration accordingly in Logic Preferences Control Surfaces Help Tags AUX Press the AUX button and it will light up AUX works in two modes Mixer View and Channel View AUX is used to control Logic Pro Sends gt Make sure the F5 button is not on i e FLIP is off If FLIP is on press F5 to turn it off gt AUX mode first starts up in Mixer View controlling Logic Sends Confirm this by looking at the top most line on the Genesys software Send Mixer View 177 Mixer View allows you to edit a single Send parameter on multiple channel strips laid out across the Genesys console surface Send Destination Send Level Send Position Pre Post Post Pan Send Mute The Genesys software at the top will indicate the function or mode you are in along with the current Send S1 S2 S8 DAW control allows you to control up to 8 Logic Sends per track Press the fader SEL button for Logic track 1 or the first assigned DAW track You have now selected DAW track 1 You will see in the top right corner the display indicator has changed to O1 if not already to indicate you have selected track 1 The fader SEL button will also flash gt Fl and F2 buttons are used to select w
147. aca 141 WOFRGCIOCK SYN O ici dia 141 RES O ME a pl 142 RESCH 1 2 SNC sacas 142 EEE WI Ad 143 FireWire DAW DI iVelr cccsscccnncennennecnuenuecneenuenueen 144 Installing the DAW FireWire driver on a PC 144 Installing the DAW FireWire driver on a MAC 146 Software OperatiOn ccsssssssscccccnnssennesesnesesnunsens 147 Board Ma DOING iia 147 Channel Seco Nasa aria 148 Configurator Sr eeir iarri nien aa a aa 148 FireWire detected ccccccscueeseueeeureteuencuensersuernes 148 No FireWire detected ccceececceeseeeeueesseueereeerens 148 Sample FrequentCY ad 149 SYNC SOUC ico 149 Channel Coltrane 149 AES Receivers Sample Rate ConverterS occccom 150 TO DAW via FireWire cccccccccessecueeeensuueueeeseurens 150 Channels DETNETADU Ea arado 151 Channels DMON INPUt Sua datalda a 151 AES Transmitter ir ici v s 152 MOnTtor Seco 152 To DAW Via PireWitEiiinna a 152 Into Monitor section D EXT InpUt ssssssssssssssssu 152 TO AES Transmitter labs 153 AES Receivers Sample Rate ConverterS occcoom 153 Genesys Path Names sent to the DAW via FireWire aia 154 Windows 7 DIIiVelS cccccccennssecccnnsennseneseneneennennuns 155 Using the Legacy Drivelr ccccccccseessnneeeeeeannes 155 Reverting to the Standard Windows FireWire Driver ac alaa 156 Recommended OHCI ChipSets csssssssssssccssneees 157 How do I find out which Chipset my Mac or PC has been fitted With cccocccccccnnncccn cnc
148. ailable on the CD supplied with the AD DA cards The FireWire driver is a third party driver also available from here http www ams neve info genesys drivers USBFireWire USB FireWire Drivers zip 134 This zip file contains a single driver which should be installed depending on the Operating System running on your Genesys either Windows 7 or Vista gt Once the file has been downloaded it s contents should be unzipped and extracted to the Genesys Desktop and installed from there There are also two documents that contain installation instructions and further information on both drivers These are also on the supplied CD or available as a download from here e Windows 7 http www ams neve info genesys manuals Drivers Installation Guide for Windows7 pdf e Vista http www ams neve info genesys manuals Drivers Installation Guide for VISTA pdf Please download the document relevant to your system and follow the installation instructions gt Only once this driver has been installed should the USB to CAT5 converter cable be plugged into the Genesys computer 135 Master Monitor Board Jumper Settings Failure to set these jumpers will result in the system not locking to the selected sync source correctly The right most and and left most of the Master boards in the console must have jumpers set to ensure the comms is terminated correctly or the Monitor board if this
149. akers This enables the rear Surround image to be heard on the front speakers for better balancing A B M1 8 M2 Lights yellow when pressed and selects sets of loudspeakers e A and Bare both Surround sets of speakers e M1 and M2 are both Stereo sets of speakers The M1 speaker outputs appear on XLRs on the rear of the console for convenience 76 It is possible to tie a set of loudspeakers to the Stereo fold down as described in ST and also which speaker set is locked to the Sub and Left Surround Right Surround See section below on Master SEL Mode S 4 LS RS leds Lights red whenever B M1 or M2 loudspeaker sets are selected with ties set either on the LS Settings Screen or using Master SEL mode and the LS selector buttons LS SOLO led This red led will light to show that the 6 LS CUT buttons are now in destructive mode and non latching This mode allows for any of the buttons to be lit by selection of any of the CUT buttons ie if you were to select L CUT then all the rest would light apart from L CUT If a Master Cut is selected it will suspend LS Solos until deselected The setting of this mode using Master Cut can be made on the LS Settings screen or via Master SEL Mode on the panel L C R LS S RS Will light red when individually selected and cut the appropriate speaker All of these buttons will light if Master CUT is selected If individual cuts are in place when the Master CUT is selected thes
150. al motorised CH Faders with DAW Control Introduction to GENESYS For more than 40 years the designers and engineers at Neve have worked uncompromisingly to produce the world s premier audio recording and mixing equipment As a result Neve products have long exceeded the most stringent requirements for sound quality and musicality from countless classic albums to the vast majority of each year s blockbuster films Traditionally such perfection has come ata price meaning that only the largest and most prestigious studios could own a Neve recording console Until now Introducing GENESYS A hand built expandable analogue recording console with digital workstation control A console that builds upon Neve s forty years of technical heritage including legendary mic pre amplifiers and highly revered analogue circuit design GENESYS also accommodates for the seismic changes in methods of music recording with extensive digital control and connectivity In any configuration GENESYS offers an excellent studio control surface with comprehensive monitoring and signal routing compatibilities This eliminates the typical collection of awkwardly interfaced devices and puts a proper console back in the heart of the studio As with all Neve products GENESYS offers sound and build quality beyond reproach Even the console stand was developed in conjunction with internationally renowned studio designer Roger D Arcy of Recording Architectu
151. alled Please be aware that when Genesys is the controlling DAW faders these fader levels will not form part of any Recall or snapshot file saved on Genesys and will therefore not be available for restoring at a later time through Genesys The DAW fader levels are stored by the DAW and do not form part of the Genesys Recall or snapshot files However the underlying levels of the Genesys audio input faders will be stored amp recalled even though they might not have been available for control when the Recall store or snapshot was taken AUX Press the AUX button the button will light Use the fader SEL buttons to select which tracks you wish to assign to the 4 DAW encoders or use the amp P gt buttons The fader SEL buttons will light red to indicate which tracks are being controlled by the encoders e Pressing or gt sets the DAW encoders to control the next or previous 4 tracks e When 1 4 faders SEL is on red encoders are controlling Auxes 1 4 e Press gt and you will now be controlling Auxes 9 12 e Press gt again and you will now be controlling Auxes 13 16 e Press once more and now the encoders will loop around back to controlling Auxes 1 4 e The same applies to using the but now the control will cycle in reverse Turn the encoders to change the Aux level Pressing the relevant encoder down like a push button will turn that Aux On Off mute for that track gt Pressing F1
152. aracters and an explanation of which Genesys path this refers to Genesys path Channel section Displayed on your DAW as Direct Output on channels 1 to 64 NDirOpi to NDirOp64 Digital Line Input on channels 1 to 64 NLnIp1 to NLnIp64 Digital Monitor Input on channels 1 to 64 NMonIpi to NMonIp64 AESLn1 to AESLn64 AESMon1 to AESMon64 AES Digital Line Input on channels 1 to 64 AES Digital Monitor Input on channels 1 to 64 Genesys path Monitor section Displayed on your DAW as Surround Digital External Left NExtIpL Surround Digital External Right NExtIpR Surround Digital External Centre NExtIpC Surround Digital External Sub NExtIpS Surround Digital External Left Surround NExtIpLS Surround Digital External Right Surround NExtIpRS 2 Track Left N2TOpL 2Track Right N2TOpR Main Mix Left NMixOpL Main Mix Right NMixOpR 8T1 to 8T8 N8TOpi to NSTOp8 Aux 1 NAuxOp1 Aux 2 NAuxOp2 Aux 3 NAuxOp3 Aux 4 NAuxOp4 Aux 5 Left NAuxOp5L Aux 5 Right NAuxOp5R Aux 6 Left NAuxOp6L Aux 6 Right NAuxOp6R AES Digital External Left input AESExtL AES Digital External Right input AESExtR AES Digital External Centre input AESExtC AES Digital External Sub input AESExtS AES Digital External Left Surround input AESExtLS AES Digital External Right Surround input AESExtRS These paths are not true Genesys audio paths They are inputs that come from another source and are conv
153. ard s rear edge connector makes a firm contact with the connector in the console backplane Slide the computer cassette back into the console chassis making sure that all the connectors on the AD DA card BNC FireWire D subs etc clear the faceplate Screw the faceplate back to the console chassis using the two screws labelled A gt Screw the four jack posts either side of the D sub connectors plus the two nuts amp washers over the BNC connectors into place There is a small double ended spanner included with the kit of parts for this purpose 139 Typical cabling connections on a 64 fader console In both of the CAT5 cabling examples outlined below the USB to CAT5 USB Serial converter cable supplied should be connected from the Genesys computer and then into the first AD DA or Monitor card This cable must only be connected once the Genesys system is fully booted and the Genesys software is running CAT5 connections on systems with AD DA Monitor card Channel Slave Audio Link Channel Slave Audio Link Channel Slave Audio Link Channel Slave Audio Link AA 1 123 123 123 17 24 33 40 41 48 49 56 57 64 Master Master Slave Master Slave Out USB to CAT5 converter cable into Serial In on the Monitor card then out of both Serial Outs one to feed each side of the console computer The cards in positions 1 8 17 24 33 40 and 49 56 are AD DA Master cards each of them con
154. are you may have to run the recovery solution in order to get access once again to the Genesys software The procedure for preparing the console for disk recovery is detailed in this section IMPORTANT It is vitally important that safety copies backups of all snapshot Recall files are made on a regular basis The Filing Copy method detailed on page 109 can be used to do this by copying files to either a USB or Network drive When the recovery process has finished you can recover the backed up files to the Genesys from the external drive using the same method If you have access to the Genesys software before running the recovery process please backup all snapshot Recall files otherwise you will lose all your files once recovery is started Important Requirements before Disk Recovery gt POWER OFF the console gt Ensure you have the Genesys Disk Recovery USB stick to hand this can be located in the supplied package Make a note of all equipment currently connected to the computer cassette at the back of the console and where it is connected before attempting disk recovery You will need to refer to this information when reconnecting cables back to the console after disk recovery is complete gt At the back of the console locate the computer cassette and remove all USB connections from here make a note of all equipment currently connected gt Connect a Windows compatible USB Keyboard into one of the U
155. at 26dBu If the analogue signal is greater than this clipping will occur on the digital busses 124 Channel Master Overview f Y rf Y ATN P ai O nai Fam ny A f A oN e oO WS WAI WS O LJ iz j x J AES RX DMQh 2 3 OUT B of k STN WE CLOCK O CHANNEL AES RX DLINE 2 3 TER AES TX OUT CHANNEL SLAVE AUDIO LINK SERIAL MAS The Channel Master AD DA board provides e 8 balanced analogue Inputs the Channel Direct Outputs e 16 balanced analogue Outputs the Channels DLN amp DMON inputs e 8 AES Outputs grouped in stereo pairs on 25 way D sub carrying Channel Direct Outputs signals e 16 AES Inputs grouped in stereo pairs on 25 way D sub carrying DLN and DMON inputs e These inputs have sample rate converters that convert any input sample rate frequency to the sample rate selected on the Genesys Provision to bypass these SRCs is provided on a pair of channels basis DLINE 1 2 3 4 etc e 2x FireWire sockets for daisy chaining purposes e Sync Wordclock In and Wordclock Out both on BNC connectors AES Sync In and AES Sync Out on a 25 way D sub connector AES CH Sync derived from the first AES Receiver pair e Two serial connectors for providing communications from the Genesys computer The Master card is connected to its associated Slave card by three CAT5 connectors called The Channel Slave Audio Link In terms of system sync one
156. atch all the controls as they are displayed When all of these strips have been reset the display will show the Monitor panel so that Talkback Cues etc can be matched When the last control on the console has been set Recall will scan the console surface three times itself to ensure that all the controls still match this is to ensure that if a control has been accidentally moved after it has been reset the user is made aware of this If a control is detected that needs further adjustment it will be displayed Reset the control until it matches If all controls match an information screen will inform you that the Recall has been verified and the console has been reset 116 Path Failures Channel 02 has no recall data Ignore for this session Hold mode Auto mode The above procedure describes how the Recall software works as it automatically displays each control in turn on each channel strip in turn for reset Sometimes it is desirable to only reset certain controls on specific channel strips and in this instance Hold mode is used This is turned on and off by pressing the HOLD button underneath the large control graphic or by toggling the O key on the keyboard gt It will now be possible to directly select which channels the Recall screen displays by pressing the appropriate fader SOLO button on the console surface You can display the Recall screens for the Rev Return strips by using
157. ation Level Position Mute Send 2 Faders Ch V Pots 5 8 Destination Level Position Mute Send 3 Faders Ch V Pots 9 12 Destination Level Position Mute Send 4 Faders Ch V Pots 13 16 Destination Level Position Mute Press F4 to shift the send layout to the left You will see Sends 5 6 7 and 8 appearing on the console surface as you keep pressing F4 In this manner you can control the Send parameters for all other sends on the selected track Press F3 to shift the send layout to the right You will see Sends 1 2 3 and 4 reappearing on the console surface as you keep pressing F3 gt In a similar way you can change the Send parameters for all other DAW tracks gt FLIP mode and Ch V Pot push button functionality in Channel View mode is exactly the same as detailed in the Mixer View mode above 179 PANS 0 00 00 00 Press the PANS button and the screen will display the Pan information on the Genesys software screen Pan Surround Mixer View Pn gt PANS works in two modes Mixer View and Channel View PANS is used to control Logic Pro tracks Pans and Surround It is functionally the Same as AUX see above and allows single or multiple parameters to be edited and controlled from the console surface o MAA a gt Make sure the F5 button is not on i e FLIP is off If FLIP is on press ze DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System F5 to tu rn it off gt PANS
158. between SND and RTN to either monitor the signal being sent to the DAW or the signal being returned from it 38 Mixing In Surround Configuring Genesys for Surround If you have LCR Channel strips please continue Otherwise go to Setting up Routing for Mixing on Earlier Consoles with Stereo Pans The channel strips on later Genesys are fitted with LCR pan pots as well as stereo which means that panning from left to right will send the audio from Left through Centre to Right This LCR panning is available on both the Channel Input and Monitor Input sections of the channel strip With Genesys there is discrete routing capability for both of these input sections to be sent to the 8Ts and Main Mix simultaneously There is a routing screen for each of the Channel and Monitor inputs selected by a tab at the top of the routing display In the Routing Screen there is a tickbox that enables the LCR Pan routing functionality _ U a E Gr LE HH ma E FAA e Without this ticked blank box the Pan will act in the conventional Left Right stereo pan e With this ticked red as an LCR pan the Pan will contribute to the Left Centre Right busses as an LCR pan As shown above the first 9 Monitor Returns as indicated by the Monitor tab being selected have their LCR pans enabled The next 7 Monitor Returns are not enabled and will send stereo with all paths contributing to all of the 8T s
159. block of 8 channels using the Single Channel as the Panel type If the update continues to fail on any panel after attempting both the auto and manual update procedure then the panel may in fact be at fault at this point please contact AMS Neve for technical assistance The channels and reverbs communicate via backplane panels These backplane panels are known as the Channel BackPlane for the channels and RevAux BackPlane for the reverbs During the update of channels reverbs the backplanes communication speed is changed once channels reverbs are updated these backplanes need to be reset in order for the speed to be reverted back to normal mode The software will automatically do this If there is a problem the screen will indicate a BackPlane Reset Failed message If this is the case you will need to power off on the console once the full console update has finished click Exit then from the System screen click Turn Off Console Wait for 20 30 seconds to allow the computer to properly shutdown switch off the console at the back then re power the console Once the console is re powered and software is running click System Update Firmware Auto Update Firmware Proceed with updating the console if updates are required Auto Update One Click Programming for all Modules Panels Click the green button labelled Auto Update Firmware As soon as this is clicked the system will automatically scan the console and report the panels whi
160. call file ccccecceeeeeeeneeeeesseeennees 115 Hold mode Auto MOdE ccc ceeceeueeeeeeeeeuueeuunaneues 117 SYSTEM ainia 118 Update FIIMWalG oia 118 Important Informati0N ooccccccccccccnncccnnnnnn noo 119 Auto Update One Click Programming for all MOGUIES PANGlS zas ra tad ELENEN 119 Manually updating individual Modules Panels 120 Glossary of on screen DUTCONS ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 120 Revision Notes Panel Display ccccceeeeeeeeees 120 Restalt SOMWarE cana 121 Restart PE sisas 121 TUN OTE GOMS OMS ura 121 EXITO WINIOWS sti islas 121 The Windows TasSkDal cccenscenscennsenssennseennennues 122 Full Genesys Re DOOt ccccceeseseeeceeeeeeeeeesenensees 122 Console ReDOO Es iaa iaa 122 DAWIReDOOiasiviciaiis rara aid 122 Console Debug WiNdOW 0ooccccccccocaccca orar narran 122 Console Debug WiNdOW cooccccccccocacccaorana narra 122 DAW Debug WINdOWisirinniiaia cdo 122 Vista SUPPO i carcasa cti sna 122 Stop All ApplicationsS ccccceccee aeniea 122 A a a a a E 122 AD DA amp FireWire System Digital Converter SySteM ss ssss 2 123 Installation SUMMArY oooccccccccccncnnnnnnnnana nar 124 Parte liS Cbg eerie aE eRe a EO 124 operating Levels 124 Channel Master cccccccccnccncenenncusncenenueusnueuenennen 125 OVEIVIE Wissrsuessrioncarai ricardo 125 Connectors amp SWItChe8S ooooocccooccocoocoocnononno rn 126 25 way D type CONNECLOSS ccc cece cece
161. ccccccnccncncnnnnncnn rn 154 AES Digital Monitor Input cccc cece cee eeeee eee eee 154 AES RECCIV CRS riviere eE A AE A 150 AES Receivers DLINE cccessecceeeeusueusaeunees 150 151 AES Receivers DMON cccccccucuessusnesenresueees 150 151 RES RX DEX asno 132 222 AES RX DLINE caricia dal 126 129 AES RX DIN aaa rana 219 221 AES RXADMON awit ticcscnndevenicnddtanes 126 130 219 221 RESTO Correr iaa 123 131 132 142 149 AESSN Erro Dos tee 132 219 223 AES SVG IN As 125 131 AES STNG INOU Ta 126 AES SYNC OUT ernea a AA 125 227 RES Transmite Sismo sra ibi 152 RES Ta ls 126 129 219 221 223 RES TKS aaa 132 222 BES TAX AUX as idee ena dpe tana 132 APA 16 55 65 76 78 105 AFP ara 64 75 APAA ISP Viana 88 89 Apple LOGIC Promises daras 174 Arrow DUCCON Sinai 68 172 183 191 AS WAS E a a vane 106 121 AS Was Napster rotar 108 AAC ao ati 101 AUT NOG ascii 52 69 AUTO ala 172 182 190 AUTO TB do 105 FAULOMAION A 23 AU 131 132 154 AUN idas 62 73 170 177 187 223 AUX Le oe 71 PUXCS Sans 22 152 AUX S Secundaria 114 AUXE S Se CUA nda 50 B A eae aia wenn on oan oon mom E A E 76 80 NO 71 72 Balance Cont mscoaiiaratirias 55 BANKS DU ON sra ados 172 182 190 Bars Beats TC Genesys SO tTWare ccccccccccccncnoso 187 Board Mapa i 147 By DaS Sao 97 C Alacan 16 60 Callbratenrasdaa aa ido 106 CAT Our IA 125 129 140 CON Orita a a a a 41 75 E a PAE E EA EA E AAE 16 35 53 5
162. ch need updating along with the required time to update Once this scan is finished proceeding with the update will allow programming to take place sending firmware to all panels that require it The progress screen will show the programming activity When the programming has completed a screen will show how each of the panels has been programmed 119 gt Click Exit to close this screen Before the updated firmware will be used the software must be restarted Please be aware that if there is a panel in the desk that cannot be programmed for any reason it may be possible for the update procedure to stall thereafter certain modules may remain in programming boot mode For example on a channel strip this will be indicated by the three leds at the top of the channel strip remaining lit CHM DAW amp FNC and the ISO and 8T leds at the bottom of the strip as well If this is the case then you will need to program each module in the desk individually using the following manual update procedure Manually updating individual Modules Panels When the screen first opens none of the options on the lower half of the screen are visible you need to click the button that says Click To Show Advanced Options for them to be visible gt To manually update a panel select the panel type in the Select Panel pull down menu and ID where relevant and click Program gt If you try to program a panel and it fai
163. change the Frequency around which the EQ is cut or boosted This will be shown with a green dot next to the selected frequency Pressing the fourth encoder will select the Hi Q the Hi Q button on screen will appear as if pressed in 96 Bypass F1 At the bottom of the EQ screen are 5 function buttons and these correspond directly to the F1 to F5 buttons underneath the EQ encoders F1 Bypass Allows you to audition the audio with and without the EQ in circuit When bypassed the yellow Bypass led will flash and the Bypass button on screen will light solid and the F1 button above the EQ encoders will also light solid yellow F2 Copy Copies the current EQ settings levels frequencies on off state onto the EQ clipboard so it can be pasted to EQs on other paths F3 Paste Copies the contents of the clipboard to the currently selected EQ F4 Setup Links Puts the desk in Link Setup mode so EQs can be linked together F5 Show Links This is an interrogation mode which temporarily shows which EQs are in a link This feature is non latching and only works as a momentary press To create a link of EQs gt Press the F4 button or click Setup Links on screen Press the channel SEL button on the channel that you wish to be the first EQ in the link the SEL button will flash to indicate this Press other SEL buttons to add those EQs into the same link As you do so the the EQ settings from the first E
164. channel routed Noise lt 88dBu 20Hz to 22kHz filter 1 channel routed lt 80dBu 20Hz to 22kHz filter 16 channel routed DAW Return Input to 8T Mix Output Headroom gt 27dBu O 1kHz lt 0 5 THD N Frequency Response Typically 0 15dB 20Hz to 20kHz Distortion THD N Typically 0 003 1kHz measured at 20dBu 10Hz to 80kHz filter lt 90dBu 20Hz to 22kHz filter no channel routed Noise lt 87dBu 20Hz to 22kHz filter 1 channel routed DAW Return Input to Aux Mix Output Headroom gt 27dBu O 1kHz lt 0 5 THD N Frequency Response Typically 0 12dB 20Hz to 20kHz Distortion THD N Typically 0 002 1kHz measured at 20dBu 10Hz to 80kHz filter Noise lt 92dBu 20Hz to 22kHz filter no channel routed lt 88dBu 20Hz to 22kHz filter 1 channel routed General Specifications Control Room Output feed from Main Mix 205 E Headroom gt 26dBu 1kHz lt 0 5 THD N Frequency Response Typically 0 15dB 20Hz to 20kHz Distortion THD N Typically 0 002 1kHz measured at 20dBu 10Hz to 80kHz filter Noise lt 85dBu 20Hz to 22kHz filter Crosstalk Inter channel crosstalk lt 100dBu 1kHz Mix buss Crosstalk lt 100dBu 1kHz 8T Mix buss Crosstalk lt 100dBu 1kHz Aux Mix buss Crosstalk lt 100dBu 1kHz 20
165. character display on the faders the DAW track names will be truncated when displayed on Genesys The four DAW encoders found at the bottom of the Monitor Panel as shown in the image to the left in red are used to control DAW parameters levels and buttons The console faders on Genesys control the DAW faders In DAW mode when controlling Sends Aux Pans Plug ins e The F5 button is used as a FLIP control With the F5 button lit FLIP mode is on it will swap the Genesys faders between controlling the actual DAW fader level itself to controlling the Sends Aux or Pans or Plug ins levels positions In Nuendo Cubase the FLIP mode on will actually swap the DAW faders to the Ch V Pots therefore the Ch V Pots will be controlling the fader levels The and gt buttons will assign tracks to the DAW encoders four at a time 1 4 5 8 9 12 13 16 then back round again etc The tracks assigned to the encoders are indicated on the console surface by lighting a block of four SEL leds just above the Genesys faders left Tip When a block of 4 SEL buttons is lit in this way you can immediately set any other block of 4 to the encoders by pressing any one of the SEL 185 Ch Y Pot Select DAW Meters Refresh s 9318 buttons on the Genesys console A highlighted selected track in the DAW will also be shown in the Genesys DAW software screen in the top right corner in red LCD type font 01 02 48 The fa
166. cnannnos 213 ST Insert Send cosas cisd ss 214 OT Insert RECUr A sis Dus tees a ect eae EE ee eek 214 Channel Section CONNECtOLS cscencencnnennenneneenuen 215 I P2 Tape Monitor S nd ccccccseeceeeueneueeuersuennas 215 I P2 Tape Monitor Return ccccccessseeeteceneueseenens 215 DAWS ai 216 DAW Return arado 216 Channel Insert 2 Sel cda 217 Channel Insert 2 REtUrn cceceeseueeeeueueeveuneueunas 217 Ehannel Insert Sendai ina la 218 Channel Insert 1 Return eiiccciscescecccceccwecatecans veuwes 218 Master AD DA Channels cassette SMN 812 409 a 219 AES RX DLN AES TX DAW SEND 219 AES RX DMON AES SYNC In Out 219 Seral lb 2 2 Oe aa aaa dede teen bee 220 Seral TIN Se OUT iria das 220 FireWire I Q Li ea 220 Slave AD DA Channels cCassette ccsccncccncensnnens 221 AES RX DLN AES TX DAW SEND o occoccccocncnn 221 AES RX DMON ra 221 Sendal I o2 caia 221 AD DA Monitoring cassette SMN 812 410 222 FireWire LRZ ia 222 AES TX ST AES RX DEX T comina naai 222 AES TX AUX 2T L amp R MIXL amp R AES SYNC In Oera na E 223 Serial CONNeECtO Sia eni e ria idad 223 21 MPU oaa a E oN 223 Optional Dynamics Cassette SMN 812 412 224 Key INDUC cenre a lados 224 General Fuses Ratings LocatiOn sssesss00 225 FUSS RAUNO Sacar 225 Appendix A Processing Cassettes Switch Settings B ard IDO o ed do a de ee 226 At the end of this document there are six A3 schematics showing th
167. cnccncenncennecneennsenesnueunnuenene 52 ER PIN dle coil 52 Mon Leve FGONtrO usaron 52 AUT IEU noria linia l a 52 DA Wir ios 52 VP A reuse r i 52 A OA 53 IS a do ne aaa iA 53 DMON dia IS AA 53 RR 53 gt 8T on earlier CONSOIMS caca a 53 gt 8T on later CONSOlOS s 54 SII Paola haters caeeadie et 54 CUT A Ad as 54 TOMON ICA Siini tados 54 Preventing feedback lOODPS scessseeneseennesenneeenes 54 REV Return Seco Nini ads 55 PREUR a a tods 55 WIDTH ad eos EA 55 PAN 7 BA E cours atras 55 MONO unde oer emanate sd 55 A EEEE E E EEE E EE E omnia ETE E E EN 55 ISO aorta ea T E E O 55 Aia at a aaa 55 Master SEL mode on the REV RETURN Section 56 To Set How the Rev Returns Feed The Cues 56 AUX MASTERS Section cccccccnccnnncnescnenneusnneuennnuen 57 Master SEN a 57 MIX Section 57 IMR ct ico sc s 57 PRES ao a ados 57 A ieee oe tne she Sean eke Ramet a ad an AATE 57 HEADPHONES SectiOn ssssssss225u220250u25u22022 2 5 57 Master SCM aine E es edo 57 ST AUXES Sections rima a 58 O A EATA E AAEE ARORO TANIN IEAA ET E AA 58 SE aaa E E A A aa sa aeoneetnen Ge 58 LIN Si is a E A EA 58 PRE O a o wacinae os 58 Master SEL mode on the 8T AUXES SectiOn 59 To Set Which Auxes Are Fed by the 8TS ccccoccccoo o 59 Monitor Panel TONE RIB SectoOdNisiisiiiccicinie nai re 60 SIG PRES ono renal ini idas 60 O A O O 60 OSCE LEVE Ei a oo id 60 A NN 60 A ed an Ove eat aa eens besa 60 DA i EPE
168. cts within that Client will be displayed in the next column gt Double click the Project and a list of Titles in that Project will be displayed in the next column gt Continue to select the Title and Mix in the same way gt Click Load The selected file will load NB Load can also be selected from the monitor panel Save gt On the Genesys drive navigate down to the desired level in which you wish to save the Automation or Recall Store files either by selecting existing Client Project Title Mix etc or by creating new folders as you go gt Click Save The current Automation will be saved to that location NB Save can also be selected from the monitor panel Copy IMPORTANT It is vitally important that safety copies backups of all snapshot Recall files are made on a regular basis The Copy method detailed here can be used to do this by copying files to either a USB or Network drive At any time you can recover the backed up files to the Genesys from the external drive using the same method Note Before running the recovery process on page 195 please backup all 109 snapshot Recall files otherwise you will lose all your files once recovery is started The first thing to set when copying files from the Genesys drive is the Destination location e Pressing the NETWORK button opens another screen that allows you to navigate to any location on an attached network e Pressing the US
169. d DAW control USB USB Flash drive stick connectivity for backing up and recalling snapshots etc Additional USB keyboard mouse connectivity Microsoft Windows compatible keyboard mouse recommended There is also another USB port on the Master Meter panel for ease of access MIDI In Out Not used External Keyboard PS2 connector If more functionality is required than the fitted keyboard provides an external keyboard can be used instead Mouse PS2 connector Connects to the console glide pad LTC Timecode In If the console does not have the Automation option fitted this ensures the screen can display an external timecode source as it runs If the Automation option is fitted it is this time line that automation events are written against along with MTC With regard to timecode the console only ever acts as a Slave VGA 1 This connector is only available on cassettes which have it On power up the computer will boot onto this VGA port then switch over to VGA 2 automatically If for any reason Windows does not show up on VGA 2 after several minutes after power up then connect a monitor to VGA 1 to diagnose any start up issues see page 18 for more VGA 2 Provides the graphics output for use with an external monitor This is the default connector for use with the Genesys software and Windows Reset Button Used when you need to reset the computer without removing the power to the rest of the console e I
170. d in the twisted pair Ethernet cabling This cable commonly referred to as Category 5 cable is defined by the EIA TIA ANSI 568 specification gt This cable has a maximum capacitance of 17 pF ft 14 5 pF typical and characteristic impedance of 100 ohms Category 5 cable is available as shielded twisted pair STP as well as unshielded twisted pair UTP and generally exceeds the recommendations for RS 422 making it an excellent choice for RS 422 and RS 485 systems 160 Rear Connectors Pin out information A fa M ME MIC LINE AES IN QU joe ME __ y HA ul uw f 1 htt res ap z o 5 a he A if E 1 i E Mic Line Input XLRs 1 Screen 2 Hi 3 Lo Mic Line Output XLRs These can either be used as Direct Outputs from the unit or as Insert Sends The Output is Post the Gain control Pin outs as above Power input 48 volts 8 pin connector This connector is polarised so can only be connected one way AES INS IN LINE OUT A 25 pin D sub connector that contains the Insert Return signals and the Line outputs The Line Out part of this connector will have no function unless the optional AD DA card is fitted see below AES INs OUTs These signals are on a 25 way D sub connector AES RECEIVE Pin Signal name Female XLR 1 pin 12 AES RX 1 2 24 AES RX 1 3 25 screen 1 Female XLR 2 pin 23 AES R
171. d left bottom of fader to 64 Pan hard right top of fader with O being Pan Centre middle of fader We will now change the Genesys console surface layout to control the Pans Surround tn Channel View mode gt Make sure the F5 button is not on i e FLIP is off If FLIP is on press F5 to turn it off gt PANS mode first starts up in Mixer View We need to change the PANS mode to Channel View Press PANS button until you see the following text on the top most line on the Genesys software Pans Surround Channel View Channel View allows you to edit all the Pans Surround parameters for a single DAW track laid out across the Genesys console surface On non surround DAW tracks Pan and Angle On Surround DAW tracks Surround Angle Diversity LFE and Spread Press the fader SEL button for Logic track 1 or the first assigned DAW track You are now controlling Pans Surround parameters for track 1 You will see the top right corner display indicator change to O1 if not 180 already to indicate you have selected track 1 The fader SEL button will also flash gt F1 F2 or the fader SEL buttons are used to select which DAW track you are controlling gt F3 and F4 buttons are not used used in this mode gt Pans Surround parameters are assigned to the console surface across the first block of 8 Genesys DAW assigned faders Ch V Pots only The remaining in blocks of 8 Genesys DAW assigned faders Ch V Pots mimic
172. d with the C part of the LCR pan not Aux 1 8T7 as in the Stereo Pan surround setup 43 Channel Meter Ch fader Ch pan Optional e Mic processing IU O Mic Gain Channel Monitor Pan Input Return Monitor knob Aux 1 Centre Auxiliary 1 feed options Auxiliary 2 Aux 2 Sub feed options 3 1 Surround field shown In grey Left Right Surround surround Six wide External playback from DAW e The Auxiliaries can be fed from either the Channel or Monitor either Pre or Post fader By default this is set to Channel input Post fade Monitoring gt On the Monitor Panel press either A or B to select the Surround speaker set gt Press 8T and INT This allows you to hear the Surround Sends routed to your DAW If you then press EXT and EXT 1 or EXT 2 on the monitor panel and providing you have connected the DAW Return paths to the Monitor External 1 or External 2 25 way D type audio connectors then you 44 will be able to swap between listening to the Surround Send to the DAW INT and the Surround Return from it EXT If you have the 8T Insert audio connections in place you will be able to compress the entire Surround mix for example using the Neve 8051 Surround Compressor by pressing the INS buttons above each of the 8T faders 1 2 5 6 7 and 8 45 Channel Strip CHANNEL Section The free running Input Level knob boosts the Input Gain
173. d you may see a message with the following option Start Normally on screen Connect a Windows compatible keyboard to one of the USB ports at the back of the computer cassette and select this option using the arrows keys then press enter Otherwise if this message is not on screen then power off then on the console the system will boot up make sure you select Start Normally and press enter Remove the keyboard make sure a monitor is connected to VGA 2 for normal operation After attempting the above if you still cannot start the Windows OS on VGA 2 contact AMS Neve for technical assistance Failure to observe the correct Power Up and Power Down procedures may invalidate the manufacturers warranty should the computer cassette malfunction as a result 18 Optional Console Hardware EQ Cassette Part number SMN 812 411 The assembly number is either AM 5582 8 bit systems or AM 5644 32 bit systems SMN 812 411 EO This cassette provides 8 Channels with classic Neve 1084 EQ 3 bands per channel Without this card the EQ button and led on each channel strip will not function The EQ button on the Monitor Panel will not be locked out When the EQ cassette is present the parameters are set using the four encoders on the Monitor Panel The card itself has no external connectors pin outs Installation Instructions e Remove the power to the console e Ensure the switch settings have been set correctl
174. da 123 WOrKCIOCK Tras asiama 125 127 131 WOFaciocKk OU Batido 127 149 WOrKCIOCK SNC 141 APEE IE E S T T A ee vara on E EA 66 102 COMLFONCTS ve seats cota a a sie eeketes 169 Integrated Peripherals ccscccceececeseereueeeeuanes 196 Genesys SO tWare ooccccccccccnonona o 176 177 186 187 eah POPE E T E E A 169 174 184 of AN 38 E 46 gt ZO Teatral ia 50 53 54 OM ia 41 OO A S ANE E A EN cutnanauteaaia TE 41 20 DUO Midi 91 A Mate E nies tatah E A E 40 PO Ouran 40 O 2008 2013 AMS Neve Ltd own the copyright of all information and figures contained in this manual which are not to be copied or reproduced by any means or disclosed in part or whole to any third party without written permission As part of our policy of continual product improvement we reserve the right to alter specifications without notice but with due regard to all current legislation Disclaimer The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate at the time of publication However no responsibility is taken by AMS Neve for inaccuracies errors or omissions nor any liability assumed for any loss or damage resulting either directly or indirectly from use of the information contained within Trademarks All trademarks are the property of their respective owners and are hereby acknowledged 232
175. ddress 192 168 99 186 e Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 e Make sure the Default gateway DNS settings are blank If a direct connection is not made i e you are connecting via a router or hub through your studio company network Select Obtain an IP address automatically Select Obtain DNS server address automatically gt Click OK close the Local Area Network Control Panel windows and all open windows gt Finally from the desktop double click the Genesys Applications icon or from the Windows Start Menu click All Programs Genesys Applications Genesys Applications The Genesys software will now launch Windows Vista Genesys Computer From the Genesys software click System Exit to Windows to close the Genesys software if the software is running The Windows taskbar maybe be hidden it is located at the bottom of the screen move the mouse pointer to the bottom of the screen and the taskbar should pop up gt From taskbar click the Start Menu select Control Panel Category View Network and Internet Network Sharing Centre Manage network connections Local area Connection Properties Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 from the list make sure the tick box remains selected and click Properties When not using a hub studio network and connecting the Genesys computer directly to the DAW computer using a cross over cable Select Use the following IP address and set your Genes
176. der SEL button repeated will toggle on off the track arm record enable mode in your DAW for that track Turn off CHAN when not in use as the fader SEL buttons are used to control these functions and you may inadvertently change something lt 4 and P Buttons They are used to scroll through the available DAW tracks and parameters and are used to set which tracks the 4 DAW encoders are controlling TRANSPORT The Transport buttons on the Master 8T fader panel on the Genesys control the transport in the DAW There are four buttons REWIND FAST FORWARD STOP PLAY and RECORD Each button lights to confirm the function has been selected SOLO CUT Pressing the SOLO CUT buttons above the Genesys faders will solo mute tracks in your DAW 183 Steinberg Nuendo and Cubase Before using the Genesys with a Nuendo Cubase system please ensure that both systems are properly configured as outlined on page 25 This involves Setting the IP addresses on Genesys and the DAW computer e Connecting the network ethernet cabling e Installing the ipMIDI driver Genesys Setup gt Go to Settings Services and make sure Steinberg Cubase Nuendo is selected at the Payment within 14 days after invoice date with 2 cash discount or within 30 days without discount of the screen gt For 1 select the MIDI Port then the console 8 block of faders on which you wish these DAW tracks to appear NB The
177. der SEL button will also flash to indicate the selected track You can also set tracks 9 12 for example to the encoders by pressing any of the SEL buttons above faders 9 10 11 or 12 NB Where reference is made to the channel faders and channel fader SEL buttons these are only available on consoles which have the motorised channel faders installed Please be aware that when Genesys is the controlling DAW faders these fader levels will not form part of any Recall or snapshot file saved on Genesys and will therefore not be available for restoring at a later time through Genesys The DAW fader levels are stored by the DAW and do not form part of the Genesys Recall or snapshot files However the underlying levels of the Genesys audio input faders will be stored amp recalled even though they might not have been available for control when the Recall store or snapshot was taken The Genesys software screen display shows information relating to the DAW parameters levels positions etc The screen indicates the selected DAW track and the current parameters being edited or controlled The text information in yellow indicates track information both lines shows parameter position level information the second line shows the track name when controlling the Pans The large red encoder at the top of the Genesys channel strips acts as a Ch V Pot Channel Virtual Pot control push button control It works in exactly the same way as the DAW enco
178. ders on the Monitor Panel gt The 1st encoder sets the Ratio and runs from 1 1 off to co 1 Limiting Pressing this encoder also swaps between the Compressor and the Gate Expander screen see below gt The 2 encoder sets the Threshold and runs from 10 to 20 By pressing this encoder you can also set the source of the Sidechain Input either sourced from the Channel itself the EQ on that Channel or from the Key Input via the 25 way D type connector on the Dynamics cassette e Both leds OFF means the signal is coming from the associated Channel e The EQ led lit means the signal is coming from the associated EQ output e The KEY led lit means the signal is being taken from an external trigger gt The 3 encoder sets the Release time in seconds and runs from 0 1 of a second to 4 seconds By pressing this encoder you can also set the Attack time from Slow 3ms to 30ms programme controlled to Fast 3ms for 20dB of gain reduction gt The 4 encoder is not used to set a variable value but instead pressing it will toggle the compressor between working in Local Link one press or Global Link two presses mode 99 In Local or Global Link Mode the Threshold Ratio etc values can all be different for paths that are linked and all of these controls can be set independently of each other It is the loudest signal in the group that will cause all of those linked dynamics to action at once
179. ders on the Monitor Panel and its advantage over the DAW encoders is that it also has LED indicators to show a visual display of the current DAW parameter level position when in Aux Pans Plugins mode These large encoders will be referred to in the manual as the Ch V Pot differentiating them from the Monitor Panel DAW encoders Turn the encoder to set the level position Press the encoder and it acts as a push button when in DAW mode The next section details how to use the Ch V Pot control as a push button and its functionality Ch V Pot Select Genesys software From the Genesys software a tick box labelled Ch V Pot Select performs two functions It will lock the DAW function to the large red encoder at the top of the channel strip so pressing it will not cycle round CH DAW FNC options and it will act as a DAW encoder gt It assigns the push button function as the Monitor Panel DAW encoders across all of the large red encoders Ch V Pot on the channel strips but not the Rev Return modules and only those which have been assigned to the DAW control This means for example that if the PANS mode is on the Ch V Pot will be controlling the Pan position and all of the assigned Ch V Pots on the channel strips will display the same Pan position for their respective tracks in the DAW and pressing it will centre the Pan position 186 DAW Metering Genesys software When the console DAW button is pressed
180. displayed At this point if you are connected to the internet a web page may open taking you to the Dice Windows Driver Release Notes page for further information on the driver gt Close the browser window gt Click Continue Anyway gt Click Yes Restart The Computer Now Once the PC has rebooted the driver will be installed and ready to use 145 if NeveFireWire 3 5 2 8028 MER 2 items 8 MB available C O w NeveFireWire 3 5 2 8028 pk g AA NeveFireWireUninstaller app _ NeveFireWire 3 5 2 8028 Install Neve FireWire Card Driver Welcome to the Neve FireWire Card Driver Installer DICE MAC OS X DRIVER RELEASE Introduction NOTES ige Requirements nst or fype y o y Operating System 1 Mac OS X 10 5 2 or higher Mac OS X 10 6 0 or higher 32 bit and 64 bit kernel supported Hardware i Minimum PowerPC G4 1 25GHz or Intel Core Solo 1 5GHz processor 512MB RAM Recomment ded PowerPC G5 Intel Core 2 Duo or Intel Xeon processor 1GB or more RAM Please also consult your audio applications requirements Mascinen DED Wavereltiieasdians 5 Continue Install Neve FireWire Card Driver Select a Destination Select the disk where you want to install the Neve FireWire Card Driver software Macintosh HD Introduction Destination Sel tallation iypes y ns nst tig sum 79 55 GB total sul 4 3 Installing this software requires 5 6 MB of space
181. e Dept Monitor Board 3 also allows the levels for the Loudspeaker DownMix to be trimmed with paths 3dB to 12dB of trim for each of the C S LS and RS The trim pot for the PROD MIC offers OdB to 60dB of trim on the Producers Mic The REM DIM trim pot offers OdB to 40dB of trim whenever the Dim is triggered externally 202 e Monitor Board 2 Mix Insert lo This board contains the Left and Right sends and returns for the Main Mix o Insert Ogi O a SO a It also contains the Insert Mix Left 8 Right Sends O rk Ol This is where the IMR Insert Send can be patched across the Main Mix 5 and the Return can be mixed into the Main Mix signal to allow variable O My O level parallel processing O RETURN O Ol IMR pa END q ra F Monitor Board 1 Mix Output Y A lo This board has 2 XLRs for the Main Mix outputs It also contains 2 jack sockets that carry the Left amp Right Outputs of the 2T mix At the bottom of the board there are 2 jack sockets one of which carries the Oscillator Slate Pink noise output another which carries the console Talkback signal 000 00 oo oooo YN j NY WY OSC SLATE TB 0 PINK 0 P Rev Return 4 The Rev Return 4 board contains the Rev Returns inputs for Rev 4 but also the Insert Mix Return Left and Right jack sockets the Sends are on T Mon Board 2 above LL IMR I P pa 203
182. e LEVEL CUE MIX 2 To Select the Aux Feeding the Cue Press and hold down LOCK on the Main Monitor Panel then press RTE SEL to enter Master SEL mode The RTE SEL button will flash along with all of the console SEL leds Most of the Cue strip controls will have their functionality blocked out apart from those indicated in white left Pressing the Aux 1 6 knob will cycle the Auxes that feed into the Cue e Aux1 2 e Aux 3 4 e Aux 5 e Aux 6 e AUX1 2 3 4 e AUX5 6 e AUX1 2 4 5 e AUX1 2 6 gt Press RTE SEL to exit SEL Mode and keep this assignment To Set the Utility Path Feeding into the Cue Press and hold down LOCK on the Main Monitor Panel then press RTE SEL to enter Master SEL mode The RTE SEL button will flash along with all of the console SEL leds Most of the Cue strip controls will have their functionality blocked out apart from those indicated in white left Pressing the UTIL control will cycle the feed into the Utility path between e MIX main stereo mix e CRM whatever source is selected to the Control Room Monitors gt Press RTE SEL to exit SEL Mode and keep this assignment 72 CONTROL ROOM MONITOR Section AUX AUX AUX cue 8T EXT EXT 1 3 5 1 1 3 Pa AUX AUX AUX CUE i D EXT EXT gro 2 LS SOLO MONITOR LEVEL O 000 gaa VW S S W y PELO T gt RBO 208 5557 OT DIM AFL PFL SIF sQ e ar 9 Locks J CONTROL ROOM MONITOR LS SEL
183. e at power down An optional Digital module provides a FireWire AES interface with four channels of A D and D A conversion to either AES or FireWire An Insert point is available before the A D converter on each channel to allow external analogue outboard equipment to be switched into the Signal path gt Legendary Neve microphone preamp design gt Four genuine 1081 Mic preamp channels in a single unit 8 5 wide gt Two units can be fastened together to provide 8 channels in a single 19 unit gt Remote control using a Mac PC and the Neve remote control software gt XLR Mic input can be switched between Mic and electronically balanced Line gt Switchable 48V Phantom power supply gt Digital I O Option gt FireWire AES interface with four channels of A D conversion to either AES or FireWire and 4 channels of D A conversion gt Analogue Insert pre A D converter per channel 158 Channel Controls Q GAIN 48V 20 MIC UNE INT oL CHANNEL LOW Z OC INS Each channel can be controlled from the front panel from a remote Mac or PC or via Pro Tools using the optional remote control software gt By default the unit powers up with all functions locally controllable and with all settings amp switch states fully recalled as they were at power down gt The unit is powered by the silver switch with the Neve logo which will light red once the power is on Front pan
184. e configured into a 5 1 Surround environment Left 8T 1 Centre 8T 7 Right 8T 2 Level to front set by Fader level set by Aux 1 Front pan controlled by CH Pan employs a Phantom Centre Level set by Channel Fader g Level set by monitor pot Sub amp T 8 Rear pan controlled by K level set by Aux 2 MON PAN BACK Kfs A ER ET PEN Left Right Surround 8T 5 Surround 8T6 Level to rear set by MON knob Using the Fader and Monitor Pot and the associated pan controls on each fader strip a signal can be sent to any point within the surround field To set up Surround LS Monitoring both in Stereo Pan Surround and LCR Pan Surround These 8T signals now need to be mapped correctly to the Surround loudspeakers The 8Ts should employ the following mapping 8T 1 2 5 6 7 8 Speaker L R LS RS C S Press and hold the LOCK button on the Route SEL panel and then press the RTE SEL button to put the panel into Master SEL mode Press 8T just above the monitoring knob 42 The console LS source is now configured to work in Surround If you now wish to create a Down Mix of the Surround Mix simultaneously this can be achieved by using the 2T mixer which is described later in this manual Shown here is the signal path through the console when set to work in 5 1 Surround using Stereo Pans NB The same block can be used for the LCR surround panning but the C buss is fe
185. e individual cuts will be reinstated when the Master CUT is turned off Also if some Cuts are selected or not selected when Master Cut is selected then they will remain cut or not cut even when Master Cut is deselected allowing cuts groups to be formed Master CUT Lights red and cuts all of the speakers All of the individual speaker buttons will also light red It is also possible to activate Master Cut remotely via the DC remote connector This will switch Master Cut ON and flash the Master Cut led DIM Lights yellow and dims the speakers by a predetermined amount set by the Control Room Monitoring level knob see below The DIM will also be forced onto the monitoring whenever the console Talkback Producers Talkback or Slate are in use or remote dim is applied The DIM led will flash in remote DIM MONO Lights yellow and collapses a Stereo or Surround mix into mono Collapsing a 5 1 mix is done in conjunction with the ST button and the 5 1 MONO tick box in the settings screen 77 The Main Mix fader level forms part of the console snapshot so this level will always be reinstated on boot up However to prevent a loud burst of audio through the monitoring the monitoring level control will always come back as if turned fully down to CUT It will not be possible to change any of these settings if the Lock Monitor Level pref is ticked in Settings TB Trim Whenever a Talkback
186. e audio signal flow through the console for all the path types 14 About this manual This manual consists of e A section by section operational overview of all parts of the console surface e Technical physical specifications including power consumption dimensions weight and other relevant information e Schematics and reference drawings of D Type pin outs etc There is a Heading Index at the start plus an Alphabetical Index at the end There is also a table explaining the Acronyms and Abbreviations of the most commonly used buttons and functions in this document 9n Some controls on the console have two functions for example a rotary Pot provides a rotary control plus an On Off push switch to either enable the feature or provide a second function Where relevant the On Off state or second function of the control is L displayed by an adjacent led Conventions used All button names rotary controls are shown in BOLD CAPITALS Any text regarding the interlocking of buttons is shown in Italics gt An arrow shaped bullet point indicates you should do this action Console surface colour coding The knobs and buttons on the Channel Strip and 8T sections of the console are colour coded for ease of operation Type Control Colour Channel Input Light Grey O Monitor Input Dark Grey Auxiliary SEL Level Control Dark Grey Rotary Pan Dark Blue Gain Dark Red l
187. e controlling Pans 13 16 e Press once more and now the encoders will loop around back to controlling Pans 1 4 e The same applies to using the but now the control will cycle in reverse The Pan position of the signal will be shown as a small green block moving from roughly the 7 o clock to the 5 o clock position for each track gt Turn the encoders to change the pan position As a Pro Tools track can also be stereo you can swap the Pan encoder into PANR mode This will give you a separate pan control for the Right side of a stereo Signal Press any of the 4 encoders to swap the Pan mode between conventional L R pan and PANR for that track The change in the Pan state will be displayed on screen above the first pan In this mode the Pan will now control the Right hand side of any stereo track in Pro Tools the pan control will now have no effect if the track in Pro Tools is mono therefore press the encoder again to return to mono pan control When in PANR mode the pan position will be shown as a solid green bar starting from the 7 o clock position PLI Plug ins Press PLI the button will light and the screen shown left will open PLI allows control of Pro Tools plug ins for only the first MIDI Port i e the first 8 tracks assigned to the Genesys gt Use the amp P buttons or the fader SEL buttons to select which tacks to control The fader SEL button will light red to indicate which track is b
188. e level input The Red Light connections on pins 1 amp 2 of the connector provide a relay contact closure when the Red Light switch is operated The relay contacts have a maximum switching current rating of 2 amps and should be used to drive an external relay of suitable contact rating Pin 14 provides a current limited 100mA 4 7v source Pin 15 digital ground is for use with external switch contact closures to provide the following remote DC functions f PROD MIC 3 201 Pin Signal Notes 1 Red Light relay contact Makes contact with 2 when Red Light switch is On 2 Red Light relay wiper Normally open contact 3 Remote red light external input 4 Remote Cue 1 external input 5 Remote Cue 2 external input 6 Remote Return Talkback On ua dl he iy ei ia 7 Remote Slate Control Input 8 Remote Loudspeaker Cut Control Input 9 Remote Loudspeaker Dim Control Input 10 Producers Talkback Microphone Input Hi 11 Producers Talkback Microphone Input Lo 12 Ground Screen 13 Spare I O 14 Current limited 100 mA 4 7v source 15 Ground digital All inputs are pulled up to 5volts via a 3k9 resistor and have clamp diodes to protect internal circuitry Spare I O Pin 13 is a customising pin used to allow external control of function s It can also be configured as an Output to control external equipment Use of Pin 13 will need further consultation with Neve Servic
189. e module This will ensure that a good contact is made between the module and the audio busses on the backplane responsible for the audio gt Push the module until it makes a secure connection with the backplane 30 There are two audio connectors on each module either side of centre that mate into the console backplane Failure to make sure the module is seated correctly in the chassis can result in missing audio busses and incomplete functionality on a module Hotplugging gt The power must always be removed before any module or cassette is inserted into or removed from the console chassis Inserting or removing modules while the power is still on will invalidate the manufacturers warranty 3f Genesys Power Up Down Procedure Power Up Procedure Power Down Procedure gt Switch on the Ethernet hub if used gt Switch on the console The computer will boot with the Windows Vista or Windows 7 operating system OS After about 20 30 seconds the Genesys software will open at which point the console will be ready to be used If the console is used before it has been booted there will be no comms between the console and the computer This will mean the console cannot function as intended even though it will still pass audio It is therefore important that the computer is fully booted before the console is used If for any reason after several minutes the Windows OS does not start up after
190. eans the signal is coming from the associated Channel e EQ led lit means the signal is coming from the associated EQ output KEY led lit means the signal is being taken from an external trigger gt The 3 encoder sets the Release time and operates within a range of 0 1 second to 4 seconds By pressing this encoder you can set the Attack time from being 1 5ms for 40dB of range Slow to 100micro seconds for 40dB range Fast gt The 4 encoder only swaps the process between acting as a Gate or an Expander and this is shown on screen with the EXP button lit when acting as an Expander and unlit when acting as a Gate F1 F5 buttons At the bottom of the DYN screen are function buttons some of which match up with the F1 to F5 buttons just below the 4 DYN encoders Please see the EQ section for a full explanation of these buttons functions page 97 NB With regard to linking the Dynamics it is irrelevant whether the Dynamics are operating on the channel input or DAW input sections 101 2 TRK genesus dm tal a E MC J oN MC MC MC MES EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System Allows control of the 2T paths from the 8T Groups The screen that opens depends on how the 2T has been set up to operate either in Group Mode shown left or 5 1 Mode Group mode You have individual On Off control and 10dB of Trim for each 8T Group contribution plus a global O
191. ed Red Red Red Red Red Red BOOS SO BOS PSU STATUS INDICATOR DC gt AMS Neve Ltd owns the copyright to this drawi copied in w o anufacture or otherwise disclosed without prior written ny consent of the company GC AMS Neve Ltd 2006 es Title GENESYS SYSTEM BLOCK LCR DRAWN CHECKED J APPROVED AMS Neve Ltd Billington Road RAP Burnley Lancashire England BB11 5UB Tel 44 1282 457011 Fax 44 1282 417282 31 07 12 Drawing No EB11731 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Drawing No Sheet Dim LS Solo EB11731 6 EXT1 EX
192. ed ethernet connection in the left hand window and select Using DHCP from the pull down menu next to Configure Ipv4 gt Finally click Apply and close the Network System Preferences windows Windows 7 DAW Computer gt On your Windows 7 DAW computer from the Start Menu select Control Panel Small or Large icons View Network Sharing Centre Change adapter settings Local area Connection Properties Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 from the list make sure the tick box remains selected and click Properties When not using a hub studio network and connecting the Genesys computer directly to the DAW computer using a cross over cable gt Select Use the following IP address and set your DAW computer to these settings e IP Address 192 168 99 183 e Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 e Make sure the Default gateway DNS settings are blank If a direct connection is not made e you are connecting via a router or hub through your studio company network Select Obtain an IP address automatically Select Obtain DNS server address automatically Finally click OK and close the Local Area Network Control Panel windows Windows XP_ DAW Computer gt On your Windows XP DAW computer from the Start Menu select Control Panel Classic View Network Connections Local Area Connection Properties Select Internet Protocol TCP IP from the list make sure the tick box remains selected and click Pro
193. eee ee eee eens 126 AES RX DEINE 7 AES Tk as 126 AES RX DMON AES SYNC IN OUT 126 Channel Slave Audio LINK ccccccceen eee eeeeeeueeueueas 126 Serial ADA ed nantes 127 AA AO 127 WOrdacio cia ria 127 MOTACIOER DUE O tee 127 B ard States anadir 127 SWIECADIOCK Zaid aa mn a 127 B ard ID traia 127 WCECK 750 TE MINO Manada 128 Channel SlaVe ccccoccccococococcocororononnnnororonnnnanarananana 129 OIM Wa a a E A 129 Connectors amp SwitcheS s ssssseserersrrsnrsrssnene 129 AES RX DEINE V AES Tara 129 AES RADMON a sa 130 Channel Slave Audio LiNk oocccccccncccccannnccannna os 130 Monitor SectlON isis 131 OVEIVIS cntehateukitamanteteueewues ubesedaceees die sadaateeaanes 131 Connectors amp SWItCNES ccceceeeeteeeeeseersenees 132 AES TX 61 7 AES RX DEX una 132 AES TX AUX 2T L R MIX L R AES SYNC IN OUT 132 Zl JACK WIE O 132 SWIECNDIOCK Sito a 133 Genesys FireWire DriVe r ssss 134 Auto Install FireWire USB Serial Driver 134 Manual FireWire USB Serial Driver Installation 134 Master Monitor Board Jumper Settings 136 Installation Of cardS ssssssununnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 138 Master or Slave Cards cccccceseecceueeeuceueensueeeerens 138 Monitor Callado 139 Typical cabling connections on a 64 fader console UA AAA 140 CAT5 connections on systems with AD DA Monitor CAPO instar aiii 140 CAT 5 connections on systems without AD DA MONITO Cardi
194. eeerenenes 150 E AN 109 SAV Esa Ai 67 115 SEL ada 16 33 53 58 69 88 89 Send TO ada 169 Seral orara eric a 127 133 Serial COMIN onra sii 127 Serial CONNEC OMS oaa a a remake arcane 136 SEVICE S uetan a N 87 107 169 174 184 SE Meira E T 93 Set DY SO doo 106 Settings 37 60 83 104 121 148 169 174 184 Settings Sr ee ct 33 Setup AS caananeeeeaeweeme 97 A de vein tacitenseamn tae mae raner E a 106 SNOW LINKS e a E O E 97 SNAULdOWN rra c 18 SIGSCHAIN IPs 101 A cau aera eons eee eae a 16 64 76 78 105 SIE P a ads 16 91 92 SI PRESS analice 60 Slate les 77 113 203 SLATEA daa 83 SV ds as 129 Slave FireWire DOAMr ccccccceeeeeueceeceteueneureeeress 148 5napsnOtS iia ada 67 113 SIND nadas aa da nate tet 16 37 38 SO Dias 54 58 64 75 88 92 105 SOLO DULLONS urraca dara 64 SOl CUS ieuna eaa aane AERON 64 SOIO li FON rena aa a S O 78 SOLS LINE oeeie E aN 64 Speaker TIM uiri aa A A A E 105 SRG erer a E sia 125 129 SRE Enable serate a aa a 150 Dil T A S A E E E A sai ceasenaneeas 75 77 80 Standard FireWire Driver ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 156 Steinberg Nuendo and CubasSe cecceeeeeeeeeeenes 184 STECO ta iaa a sent AEE 37 STOP e 89 173 183 191 StopaAll ADPIC ON Si os 122 A wines tora EE A toad E ener near AE 41 75 SUB tado aladadan indicara do 80 104 SUD Speaker LOCKS aaa 104 SUD TO DOWAMIDCA adi adi 104 SUM ia os ie 74 75 SUIT ROU dida 39 149 Surround Digital External
195. eing controlled The 4 encoders now control the plug ins parameters for the selected tracks e Fi opens closes the plug ins window in Pro Tools e F2 scrolls through the allocated plug ins for the selected track e F3 F4 will step you backwards forwards through the parameter pages for the selected track As a plug in may have several controllable 171 parameters the DAW control may assign several pages to allow the plug ins to be controlled by the 4 encoders e F5 toggles the COMPARE mode for the selected plug in The value can be changed by turning and or pressing the encoders and is shown on screen in the bottom row of 4 text boxes The top most row of boxes show the bypass track being controlled and compare parameters The middle row of boxes show the parameter being controlled by the encoders FADS and BANKS FADS allows a large session with lots of tracks to be seamlessly controlled from Genesys Press FADS the button will light gt Use the P buttons to move the DAW tracks up down the console surface a single track at a time gt If the BANKS button is lit using the gt buttons will move the DAW tracks up down the console surface eight tracks at a time The tracks currently under control will be displayed on screen AUTO AUTO allows the Automation Modes to be changed on any of the DAW tracks by using the fader SEL buttons gt Press the AUTO button gt Now press the fader SEL
196. el control is available on each input for gt 48V Turns on Phantom Power to the Mic not available for LINE 20 Pad attenuates the incoming Mic signal by 20dB not available for LINE gt LOW Z Impedance for Ribbon Microphones not available for LINE gt MIC LINE Selects between the Mic or Line input Lights yellow when MIC is selected unlit for LINE gt Swaps the incoming phase of the Mic or Line signal gt INS This selects the source for the A D in the FireWire expansion module if fitted When illuminated allows an external Insert Pre the A D of the expansion module Turning the Gain control will vary the gain as shown in the display beneath The Gain level is not related to the actual position of the knob which will infinitely rotate gt The MIC gain control runs from 20dB to 70dB in 5dB steps gt The LINE gain control runs from OdB to 20dB in 5dB steps Just beneath the Gain control are two leds that indicate gt Signal Presence lights green at approx 30dBu or greater gt Signal Overload lights red at 2dB below clipping The metering point is Post the Gain stage gt Maximum signal level is 26dBu gt The Gain knob also has a push switch which will only function if the unit is attached to an AMS Neve Genesys console where it is used to interrogate console control settings 159 USB RS 485 ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 CO ADA ESS zs aa ARO AA E cs ee Stip
197. elow the mic gain control Lo m De Qe nO When Master SEL mode is on the 8T faders section you can set how the 8T signals are fed into the Auxes either Pre or Post and how the Rev sends are fed to the Cues either Pre or Post In the last case it will be possible to adjust the Rev Input level at the same so it will be possible to audition this audio Master SEL Mode on the Monitor Panel E LOCK RTE FILING JAE e STATUS a On the Monitor Panel Master SEL mode will launch the Settings screen and will let you define Util amp Aux Cue feed sources Solo modes power up defaults etc The majority of these functions can also be configured on the Settings Screen see separate chapter 33 34 An Overview of the Genesys Signal Flow Traditionally mixing consoles are either Split or Inline monitoring design e A Split console has a number of input channels and has a separate monitor mix panel elsewhere on the control surface e An Inline console has a Monitor path input on each Channel input fader strip In this way a 24 fader Genesys also has another 24 Monitor inputs in effect turning it into a 48 input desk An Inline console incorporates multitrack DAW monitoring into the channel strips so each channel strip has both an input signal path and a monitor signal path Genesys is an Inline mixing console this means it has both Channel input and Monitor input
198. emoved from the console observing the correct Shutdown procedure gt Unplug or unscrew all of the cables that connect to the computer cassette VGA mouse keyboard etc P Unscrew the two outer screws that hold that cassette to the console chassis labelled A below E 5 N SY E N Pa EA q E L N Y A L L AES TX 8T AES TX AUX 2T L R MIX L R L R OUT IN A A MONITOR AES RX DEXT AES SYNC IN OUT 2T 1 P SERIAL FIREWIRE WORDCLOCK B B gt Applying a little pressure gently pull the cassette out of the console Slide in the new computer cassette ensuring that it is seated securely and firmly to the backplane and screw the cassette back into the chassis gt Re attach all of the computer cables and power up the console gt Restore all of your Recall Automation data if applicable to the new hard drive The computer cassette you have removed should be returned to AMS Neve Technical Services On consoles sold after October 2010 the AD DA card should be fitted as follows gt Remove the computer from the console as detailed above and remove the blanking plate fitted to the lower half of the computer cassette using the two screws labelled B above These screws and blanking plate are no longer needed Slide the AD DA card into the console chassis component side down ensuring that the c
199. en 1 Channel Insert 1 Send 1 24 12 25 2 Channel Insert 1 Send 2 10 23 11 3 Channel Insert 1 Send 3 21 9 22 4 Channel Insert 1 Send 4 7 20 8 5 Channel Insert 1 Send 5 18 6 19 6 Channel Insert 1 Send 6 4 17 5 7 Channel Insert 1 Send 7 15 3 16 8 Channel Insert 1 Send 8 1 14 2 Channel Insert 1 Return 25 way D type Signal Name iL Hi Lo Screen 1 Channel Insert 1 Return 1 24 12 25 2 Channel Insert 1 Return 2 10 23 11 3 Channel Insert 1 Return 3 21 9 22 4 Channel Insert 1 Return 4 7 20 8 5 Channel Insert 1 Return 5 18 6 19 6 Channel Insert 1 Return 6 4 17 5 7 Channel Insert 1 Return 7 15 3 16 8 Channel Insert 1 Return 8 1 14 2 218 Master AD DA Channels cassette SMN 812 409 i i ti SAA O ws 1 ANNEL DLINE S RX ETT MASTER agen ty DAM SEND AES SYNC tN OUT r Pan f wi Ta pin KEY I P 1 8 SERIAL IN L A af OUT FIRE WIRE S ear AES RX DLN AES TX DAW SEND 25 way D type Connector Signal name Pin number system name Shield Hi Low 1 AES RX 1 DLINE 1 2 25 24 12 2 AES RX 2 DLINE 3 4 11 10 23 3 AES RX 3 DLINE 5 6 22 21 9 4 AES RX 4 DLINE 7 8 8 7 20 5 AES TX 1 DAW 1 2 19 18 6 6 AES TX 2 DAW 3 4 5 4
200. enesys SOftWAre ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 177 Name Value Genesys SoOftware ccccceeeeeeeeees 177 Other considerations aenea r AaS 177 A e E E tasaea oa nateae dane 177 PAN Sia SA 180 A aaa 181 FADS and BANKGS ccceeceeeeeeueeeeeteneeesaues 182 NG Reet eee ee E ee ee 182 CHAN taaan rete tated oawes 183 d and P ButtOns cc ccc ccc cece cnn 183 TRANS POR Tsiinraaa ra 183 SOLO CUT a coda 183 Oe he re Steinberg Nuendo and CubasSe sscccsscenseenssenuns 184 Genes ys SUD a a 184 Nuendo Cubase SetUPD coonncccccccccccncocnarnnnrar arar 184 Operas oia 185 Ch V Pot Select Genesys SOftWare cocccocconcnco o 186 DAW Metering Genesys software ccoccccccocco o 187 Refresh s Genesys Software cccssesceeeeseeeenes 187 Name Value Genesys Software ccccceeeeeeeeees 187 Bars Beats TC Genesys Software ccccseeeeeaees 187 PUK IN 187 PAN Soano 188 A O 189 FADS and BANK Sari 190 PUTO aaa 190 CHAN a eii 190 d and P ButtOns cece cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 191 TRANSPORT dins 191 SOLO GUT ata dali 191 Remote Genesys Software Update Updating and Installing Genesys Software Automatica ae cis 192 Starting the Download Procedure 192 The Genesys Software Installation Wizard 193 Updating Firmware ccccseessseeeseneeeennes 194 USB Recovery Complete Software Recovery Solution Important Requirements before Disk Recovery 195 BIOS SEUD arena a
201. ental operation e LOCK needs to be held for 3 seconds before locking or unlocking e Pressing LOCK and then RTE SEL together will put the panel into Master SEL mode MIC Lights red and cancels other selections It will change the audio feed to the Channel path by switching all the modules to Mic input and this will be displayed by a red led on each module MIC is interlocked with MIX to clearly define two different states the console can be in Record MIC or Mixdown MIX NB MIC is automatically switched off is MIX is selected and is not reinstated LN Lights green and cancels all other selections It will change the audio feed to the Channel path by switching all the modules to Line input and this will be displayed by a green led on each module NB LN is automatically switched off if MIX is selected and not reinstated DAW Lights green and cancels other selections It will change the audio feed to the Channel path by switching all the modules to the workstation and the green DAW led will be lit on each module NB DAW is automatically switched On if MIX is selected and not reinstated DLN led The D LINE Inputs and it s led are turned on when the three interlocked options above are all turned off DLN feeds the Neve FireWire to all of the channel inputs indicated by the blue DLN led being lit on each module This led will only light if an optional AD DA card is fitted and has been detected SWP
202. erted from one audio format to another within the console This is why their DAW name as displayed above does not begin with N to indicate it is a non Neve path 154 Windows 7 Drivers This section only applies if you have Windows 7 as the operating system on your DAW and explains how to swap between the standard FireWire driver and the Legacy FireWire driver As new drivers and console software builds are released using the legacy driver may not be applicable in future releases the Genesys software release notes will detail this if it is the case which can be accessed from System gt Release Notes You can swap between legacy and standard FireWire driver as shown below at any time Using the Legacy Driver With the FireWire cable disconnected from the Genesys computer go to Start Menu Control Panel System and in the Device Manager find the FireWire device IEEE 1394 File Action View Help le EN Hu A RE a y Mike PC 7 Computer a Disk drives E Display adapters DVD CD ROM drives Human Interface Devices ca IDE ATA ATAPI controllers IEEE 1394 Bus host controllers t g Texas Instruments 1394 lt gt Keyboards PY Mice and other pointing de Disable amp Monitors Uninstall amp Network adapters Ports COM amp LPT Scan for hardware changes A Processors Properties Sound video and game CO Update Driver Software ji System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers
203. firmware and the other is to manually update firmware on selected panels The recommended way is to use the auto update process This will ensure all panels are programmed to the latest firmware version Once you have started to update the firmware you must finish this process so all of the panels are on the same versions of firmware Failure to complete the update procedure for all the panels could mean that some panels behave operationally different to others When the firmware is updating do not attempt to touch or operate any of the controls on the desk as this may affect the update procedure During the update the log window will show the results of the update This information will include things like panel connection update time update progress whether an update is successful unsuccessful etc In the auto update process or if manually updating page 120 you select the Panel as Channel the channels are programmed in blocks of 8 at a time 1 8 9 16 and so on This means that if one or more channels in that block of 8 are reporting problems then all the channels in that block will not be updated Please be aware the update programs all 8 or none During the update if there is a failure then the software will report this back and all 8 channels may not be correctly programmed You will also see this on screen Therefore please follow the manual update procedure below on page 120 to individually program each channel for the failed
204. flash Most of the 8T strip controls will have their functionality blocked out apart from those indicated in white left Each press of the AUX 1 2 level control will cycle the feeds through e Aux 1 Post fader e Aux 1 Pre fader e Aux 2 Post fader e Aux 2 Pre fader Exit Master SEL Mode at any point by pressing RTE SEL and your changes will be saved After exiting Master SEL Mode pressing the level control will turn the contribution to that Aux On Off Aux 5 Aux 6 For Auxes 5 and 6 the only settable control in Master SEL Mode is the Pre Post state Press and hold down LOCK on the Main Monitor Panel then press RTE SEL to enter Master SEL mode gt Press the relevant Aux control to switch it between Pre and Post gt Exit Master SEL Mode at any point by pressing RTE SEL and your changes will be saved Selecting between Aux 5 and Aux 6 is achieved by toggling the L R PAN control In it s default state it contributes to Aux 5 led off Press the PAN control to send to Aux 6 instead led will light It is not necessary to go into Master SEL Mode to make this selection 59 Monitor Panel TONE RTB Section ical H KE OPG 50H ha ast OHZ GFF anme SIG PRES Sets the level at which the Meterbridge Signal Present leds come on for Channels and 8T s It has a range of 35dBu signal present to 26dBu overload It has a centre detent which is calibrated
205. from the console surface in this manner is not permitted when there is a computer cassette detected routing should be carried out via the dedicated routing buttons on the Monitor Panel and console software via the RTE function as detailed in this manual 70 CUE MIX Section yrs LeveL CUE MIX 2 It is possible to use a single Cue in stereo or as two mono by hard panning the stereo sources sent to it Each of the Cue mixes can be sourced from e A stereo External e Either the Main Mix or the current Control Room Monitor selection set by UTIL knob Four mono Auxes or two stereo Aux EXT 1 4 This level pot and switch controls the currently selected External level into the Cue If you have either of the Surround Externals selected it will only send the Left and Right to the Cue It has a range of to Odb gt Press to enable UTIL This level pot and switch controls the Main Mix or the current Control Room Monitoring level into the Cue the selection being indicated by the adjacent leds It has a range of to OdB gt Press to enable NB The selection of main mix or CRM s set in Master SEL mode AUX 1 6 This level control and switch controls the Aux contribution to the Cue mix gt Press to enable e When Aux 1 2 is selected this will feed 1 to L amp 2 to R e When Aux 3 4 is selected this will feed 3 to L amp 4 to R e When Aux 5 is selected this will feed
206. function button and once clicked it will change to showing Panel Display which is the default display when the System Diagnostics screen is first opened Restart Software Restarts the Genesys software You will be asked to confirm your actions Click Yes The Genesys software will reboot Restart PC Restarts the Genesys computer without the need for power cycling the console You will be asked to confirm your actions Click Yes The Genesys computer will power down and then reboot Turn Off Console Shuts down the Genesys computer in the correct manner so that the power can be safely removed from the console You will be asked to confirm your actions gt Click Yes The computer will shut down in the correct manner Exit To Windows Click this button to exit all of the Genesys software and be returned to the Windows desktop You will be asked to confirm your actions Click Yes If you have the As Was option selected in Settings Power Up then you will be presented with a second screen that asks you if you wish to update the console snapshot gt Click Yes or No Clicking Yes means that when the console boots up it will do so in exactly the same condition as when it was switched off with the same routing pre post states EQ and DYN parameters etc If you click No then you will be returned to the Windows Desktop and any settings that have changed since the last automatic snapshot was taken
207. g ORDER Channel IN Bypass ALL iP Monitor IN Bypass ALL Je DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System You can manually control the channel processing order using the ORD button on the Channels to set show the order processing of the EQ DYN INS1 INS2 elements However it is also possible to set the processing order by using the click drag and drop method as well This feature gives you the ability to control the processing order via the ORD screen software This feature allows you to drag and drop the various processing elements as well as the ability to bypass the elements from the audio path Pressing the ORD button on the Genesys software will show up the Channel Processing screen gt You can also enter the ORD screen by pressing and holding the channel yellow SEL button then at the same time pressing the channel ORD button The screen shows the elements and their order depending on what path they are in Below the elements there is a green BYPASS button gt By clicking this button it will bypass the element from the current Channel or Monitor path it is assigned to To the left is a button called Bypass ALL This will toggle bypass of all the elements in the current Channel or Monitor path gt With the mouse left click and hold on any of the elements above the BYPASS button and drag them into the channel or monitor path or by dragging them to the left or righ
208. gauge on the right hand side of the screen will show 149 HES Receivers Enable Sample Rate Convertor DMON CLINE 1 i 314 6 i 5 a the total number of audio channels that the FireWire system is capable of handling at the top of the bar This capability is dependent on the sample rate the higher the sample rate the fewer channels there are available See page 149 for limitations of the FireWire protocol As you tick or untick the selections on screen then the fuel gauge will reflect these live changes and display how many paths are still available at the side of the coloured bar As shown left you are still be able to assign 48 more audio channels to the FireWire buss from a total of the 96 available If there is no FireWire detected this bar graph will be displayed as empty AES Receivers Sample Rate Converters It is possible to convert the sample rate of the AES Receivers incoming audio to the Genesys system sample rate if these do not match For example if an incoming signal is at 44 1kHz and the system sample rate is 48kHz then when the pairs of paths shown left are ticked these signals at 44 1kHz will be automatically converted up to 48kHz The DMON channel digital monitoring input and DLINE channel digital line input input options displayed left will change depending on which 8 fader section is selected at the top of the screen For example on fader section 9 16 the options shown will in
209. h post fade gt o N ie Q o gt i gt Red 6 CHOP l I et q gt r o 7 i Grn CHIP i A i eh AMAIA E AM A A Rs LA A ee 0 as a fe te ee ot a e a Ge D Mon gt gt Toggle Cycle CH Optional D A O P 0 AA el eg a ee Sig Present a Power up led lt A i i Grn Q Retun l Be RARA A A A Ps De gres 1 35 to 26 dBu Yel QP 2 Ae yh ee Ge 1 L Sp DAW Send Blue 92 D Mon A ue Grn de l Toggle Cycle TOA op lt DAW Ret OAN E I 11 82 OFF D MON OFF a 1 QYel MOD DATE ISS i 1 3 1 P2 OFF D MON ON N i i gt SiS Se SS A S See EN E RAN res O l P 2 AMS Neve Ltd owns the copyright iS o Power up eta Re eco caos Title GENESYS SYSTEM BLOCK LCR AMS Default I i D Mon for manufacture or o ker wine N E V E consent of the company VBDC Filename EB11731 sbk GC AMS Neve Ltd 2006 RAP DRAWN CHECKED APPROVED AMS Neve Ltd Billington Road Burnley Lancashire England BB11 5UB Drawing No Sheet EB11731 1 Tel 44 1282 457011 Fax 44 1282 417282
210. he DAW tracks up down the console surface a single track at a time gt If the BANKS button is lit using the gt buttons will move the DAW tracks up down the console surface eight tracks at a time The tracks currently under control will be displayed on screen AUTO AUTO allows the Automation Modes to be changed on any of the DAW tracks by using the fader SEL buttons gt Press the AUTO button gt Now press the fader SEL button on the console to change the automation mode Pressing the fader SEL button repeated will cycle through the automation modes in your DAW for that track Turn off AUTO when not in use as the fader SEL buttons are used to control these functions and you may inadvertently change something CHAN CHAN puts the DAW tracks into Track Arm Record Enable mode and tracks can be armed on off by using the fader SEL buttons gt Press the CHAN button gt Now press the fader SEL button on the console to put the track into armed mode record enabled Pressing the fader SEL button repeated will toggle on off the track arm record enable mode in your DAW for that track Turn off CHAN when not in use as the fader SEL buttons are used to control these functions and you may inadvertently change something 190 O0o0dO STOP PLAY REC LA TRANSPORT and P Buttons They are used to scroll through the available DAW tracks and parameters and are used to set which tracks the 4
211. he Genesys computer directly to the DAW computer then an Ethernet crossover cable will be needed The following sub sections will guide you through the steps to setup the Genesys computer and your DAW computer for DAW control The DAW computer operating systems shown below are Mac OS X Windows XP Vista 7 Your Genesys computer operating system is either Windows Vista or Windows 7 To determine the Genesys Windows version from the Windows desktop right click the Computer icon and click Properties A window will appear showing you the version information Genesys Computer Settings for DAW Control Windows 7 Genesys Computer gt From the Genesys software click System Exit to Windows to close the Genesys software if the software is running gt The Windows taskbar maybe be hidden it is located at the bottom of the screen move the mouse pointer to the bottom of the screen and the taskbar should pop up gt From taskbar click the Start Menu select Control Panel Small or Large icons View Network Sharing Centre Change adapter settings Local area Connection Properties Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 from the list make sure the tick box remains selected and click Properties When not using a hub studio network and connecting the Genesys computer directly to the DAW computer using a cross over cable gt Select Use the following IP address and set your Genesys 25 to these settings IP A
212. he Master cards inform the software in which position it is located by matching the ID dip switches on the card with the physical position on the desk from the pull down menu Ensure the associated Slave card is in the physical position displayed in the right hand column gt Once the mapping has been completed correctly click OK to close NB The OK button will be greyed out and unavailable until a valid combination of boards has been set 147 Channel Section Configurator Screen Source Internal Genesys FireWire Configurator Revision 1 17 010212 Channels Direct Output E AES Receivers DLINE AES Receivers DMON IB CLINE from DAW via FireWire gt IM AES Receivers DLINE E DMON from DAW via FireWire gt J AES Receivers DMON I Channels Direct Output The Configurator allows the routing of the digital audio signals in blocks of 8 channels 1 8 9 16 etc and not on a channel by channel basis The configuration software also sets the inputs and outputs on the FireWire Monitor board as well if fitted The screen shown left is accessed in the Genesys software by clicking Settings FireWire Setup The screen shot here is of a 64 fader console which has all 4 Channel Master boards and 4 Channel Slaves plus the Monitor card fitted a DLINE from DAW via FireWire gt To AES Transmitters E DMON from DAW via FireWire gt System Status Firewire System Clock Ext S
213. he console e If the Direct Output is fed from the Monitor either Pre or Post and you set the Monitor Input to DAW SND or e The Monitor path is set to DAW SND and you set the Direct Output to Monitor Pre or Post To combat this the console will take steps to prevent this from happening e When you toggle through the inputs of the Monitor path the DAW Send will not be available and the DAW SND led will flash twice without changing from DAW RET e If you have DAW SND set and you toggle through the Direct Outputs when you reach Monitor either Pre or Post the DAW selection will be forced to RET 54 REVERB RETURNS AUX MASTERS Section REV Return Section The free running large knob at the top of the strip sets the input level of the Rev Returns It has a range of to OCB gt Press the knob to toggle it between REV and DAW TO CUE Sets the amount of Reverb Return signal sent to the Cue mixes it can be sent to either cue or both of them Press to select on off See the section below on Master SEL Mode on how the Rev Returns feed the Cue WIDTH Sets the width of the stereo image from narrow hard left to Wide hard Right gt Press to enable If MONO is pressed below the WIDTH led will flash when pressed to indicate it is not an available control in mono PAN BAL Works in conjunction with the MONO button to the left Press to enable e When the MONO button is p
214. herefore affect the Mix output e For any path in ISO the CUT will be safe and only affect the monitoring by using the AFL buss and the Solo will act as an AFL It has a 4 state toggle each state indicated by the adjacent led e Off Both the Channel and Monitor path are part of their Solo system e Red The Channel path is isolated from the Solo system e Green The Monitor path is isolated from the Solo system e Yellow Both the Channel and Monitor paths are isolated from their Solo systems DMON led Indicates the selection of the digital line input to the monitor on each module from the Neve FireWire card The DMON led will only light if DAW I P 2 is deselected and an AD DA cassette has been detected in the console If there is no cassette fitted it will not be possible to deselect all of these input options SEL The SEL button is used for Calling EQ and Dynamics controls single fast press for EQ double fast press for DYN e Setting local 8T Mix routing by holding down SEL and pressing the adjacent gt 8T button In both earlier and later consoles selecting SEL gt 8T buttons together will bring up the routing screen gt 8T on earlier consoles This has a 3 state cycle indicated by the adjacent led e Off The Channel path can be routed to all the 8Ts via 8T routing e Red The Monitor path can be routed to all the 8Ts via 8T routing e Yellow The Monitor path can be routed to 8T 5
215. hich Send you are controlling Now keep pressing F1 until you are see that you are controlling Send 1 S1 will be shown on the Genesys software gt F3 and F4 buttons are used to select the Send Destination Level Position Mute parameter Now keep pressing F3 until you are are controlling the Send Destination parameter This will be shown on the Genesys software on the top most line The Genesys software should now show the following information on the top most line Send Mixer View Send Parameter Destination S1 On the channel strip using the Ch V Pot large red encoder for the selected track turn the encoder and the Destination will change Bus 1 Bus 2 Bus 64 This will be shown on the Genesys software as you change the parameter Press the Ch V Pot like you would do to a push button and the Destination will be set Confirm this by looking at Logic Pro for track 1 send slot 1 gt In a similar way you can change the Destination for all other DAW tracks Press F4 You are now controlling the Send Level for Send 1 Turn the Ch V Pot and the Send Level will change you can see the Genesys software and Logic Pro to verify this Pressing the Ch V Pot you can set the Send Level to its default setting Press the Ch V Pot the Send Level will default to O dB Confirm this by looking at Logic Pro for track 1 send slot 1 gt In a similar way you can change the Send Level for all other DAW tracks Press F4
216. how this Preference is set up in the Settings screen If this screen is open when routes are made on the console the screen will reflect this gt Likewise it is possible to click on screen in the relevant junctions to put these routes in place on the console if this is preferred Depending on the channel strips installed the following may apply gt If you wish to route all of the Channel Inputs or DAW Returns to the Main Mix buss click the CH MIX or MON MIX button and all of those routes will be put in place for every channel on the console gt If you wish to route all of the Channel Inputs or Monitor Inputs to the Main Mix buss select the relevant tab then click MIX L R gt If you wish to turn on the LCR Pans for all the Channel Inputs or Monitor Inputs select the relevant tab then click LCR e A yellow block indicates a Mono or Stereo route in place e A yellow amp red block indicates a route in place using the LCR Pan law Unavailable routes will be greyed out 111 Encore Plus Encore Plus Automation software This button will only function if you have the optional motorised faders AMS Neve Encore and Encore Plus Automation software installed and licensed on Version 6 0 your console Staring Encare Plus Build 11 For operation please see the separate Encore Plus Automation User cia Manual 112 RECALL Please be aware that when the console faders are control
217. iOns cccceeeeeeeeeeees 4 COOMNG onii oaa a 4 Health amp Safety NoOTiC occoccccccccccccccnnannnnnnnnnno 5 IMPORTANT NOTICE siii 6 Console Over Vie Wisconsin cs 7 Introduction to GENESYS ccccccesennneeeeeeseesennnnnees 8 About this ManuUal ccccccceesnnseeeeeeeeennesesnesesnnsens 15 CONVENTIONS USEG ia ai 15 Console surface colour COdiND oooccccccccncccnncna oso 15 Abbreviations amp ACronyMS sssesssserersrnrrsrern 16 The Computer Cassette sssssss2220222222522225222 17 IMPORTANT NOTICE comirianidinernar oe a 18 Optional Console Hardware ccsssssenssennsennneennsenas 19 EO Cassette rn Ea aA E 19 Dynamics Cassette ssssreserensnsrsnsnsnnsnnrnnnan 20 Operational ConsideratiOns cceeceeseeeeeeeeeuees 20 Channels Digital Converter System 0000s 21 Monitoring Digital Converter SysteM occcomm 22 Optional Software PackaGeGS ssssccceensssenneseenees 23 AUTO MAIN iia di 23 Recalieriai carr aa 23 Remote Access LogMeln Software ccssssenssenssenes 24 Wiring connections Setup for DAW Control 25 DAWControl aida ara 25 Genesys Computer Settings for DAW Control 25 Windows 7 Genesys COMPUTEL ccceeeeeeees 25 Windows Vista Genesys Computer 006 26 DAW Computer SettingS ccccceseeeeceee eee n ees 27 Mac OS X DAW COmputerr ccceceeeeeeeee eee eee 27 Windows 7 DAW Computer ccccceeeeeeeneaes 27
218. ight when DAW control has been established Each fader has a range of to 10dB These faders are always motorised regardless whether your console has manual or motorised channel faders CUT SOLO Each fader has a CUT SOLO button whose function is switched with the adjacent CUT buttons to solo an 8T group Alpha Display The four character alpha display above each fader is used for displaying 8T 1 8 or DAW track information TRANSPORT Keys An independent single fader controls the stereo main mix with a range of co to OCB The CUT button acts on both the L R of the Main Mix SEL GLIDE Only available on Automation faders SEL Allows you to select the automation modes locally GLIDE Used for manually locally gliding back faders to the previous play pass 00000 STOP PLAY REC TRANSPORT MASTER AUTOMATION buttons REWIND FAST FORWARD STOP PLAY and RECORD buttons control the DAW Each button lights yellow to confirm the function has been selected apart from PLAY lights green and REC lights red 2 The Master Automation keys are only present on consoles that have the optional Encore Plus Automation package fitted Each button lights yellow to confirm the function has been selected apart from PLAY Glide which light green and REC RUN TO END which light red 89 KEYPAD ie gt a E NIVIA A i E
219. ilable space in the console with the components facing down ensuring that the card s rear edge connector makes a firm contact with the connector on the console backplane gt Screw the faceplate back to the console chassis using the A screws making sure that all the connectors on the AD DA card BNC FireWire D subs etc clear the faceplate gt Screw the four jack posts either side of the D sub connectors plus the two nuts washers over the BNC connectors into place There is a small double ended spanner included with the kit of parts for this purpose On consoles with a different Channels faceplate manufactured before May 2010 you will also be sent a new faceplate with the AD DA card If applicable this should have the Dynamics cassette fitted to it before the AD DA card is fitted in the console 138 Please be aware that as you have a new computer and drive you will need to reset solo states default settings Trim values HUI details Encore preferences etc These can only be restored by setting them manually Monitor card This card will always come sub fitted underneath a new computer cassette so the whole assembly of computer cassette and Monitoring AD DA card will be fitted as one Before starting the following please make sure that all of your data is removed from the computer drive either by backing it up to a USB device or to a network location gt Ensure the power is r
220. in 11 discreet steps and has a range of 20dB to 70dB the level being displayed using internal leds It is also a 3 state toggle control and pushing the knob will cycle through e CHM Selects the Channel Mic input gain as outlined above DAW Selects CH DAW control when the automation option is fitted This can control several DAW parameters See chapter on DAW Control FNC If the console is in automation the encoder will display any previous written automation moves for the DAW monitor input or channel input if swapped e If not in automation and in record mode FNC can be used to control 4081 remote MIC PRES using the mic encoder and associated buttons NB Choosing control of the 4081 s or automation display with FNC can be set in the settings screen under Channel FNC Control The selected function will be displayed on the leds underneath It is possible to select a different function for each Channel Strip 48v Supplies 48 volts of phantom power to the Mic input Operation of phantom power takes 20 seconds to apply or remove to protect monitoring loudspeakers This is indicated by the led flashing as it increases or decreases the voltage As the led is flashing it is recommended not to alter the mic input again Once 48 volts is applied the led will light solid HI Z Impedance Makes allowance for the characteristics of differing microphones e The High Impedance electrically balanced i
221. ing 8T Loudspeaker Matrix and 8T Monitor Selection 00 j Mapped to Speaker Destination Front Left Front Right Spare can be configured as and when needed either as a stereo pair or two mono Surround rear Left Surround rear Right Centre CON AD UU BRI WN FP Sub Setting up Routing for Mixing on Earlier Consoles with Stereo Pans This tutorial will only concern itself with routing Channel 1 through the 40 Surround system gt Ensure that the same signal is being sent into the Channel Input and DAW Monitor input by feeding signal into the channel DAW input with the console DAW Monitor set to DAW On the first channel strip gt Route the channel to 8Ts 1 2 7 amp 8 route the DAW Monitor to 8T s 5 6 Press the gt 8T button until the adjacent led is yellow This routes the Monitor path to 8T 5 and 8T 6 gt By the Aux 1 control press the gt 8T 7 button provides centre feed to 8T7 buss Press the Aux 1 rotary knob to turn it On and then turn it up By the Aux 2 control press the gt 8T 8 button provides sub feed to 8T8 buss Press the Aux 2 rotary knob to turn it On and turn it up Make sure the auxes are set to Channel input Pre fade gt Move 8T faders 1 2 5 6 7 and 8 up to about 5dB gt On the Monitor panel set the 8T Metering to ST gt Push the fader up on Channel 1 to see signal on 8T 1 and 8T 2 Front
222. ion e The Email Address used to create the LogMeIn account e The LogMeIn Account Password e The Computer Access Code if LogMeIn required you to setup during installation Please send this information to csd ams neve com giving your full studio name Once LogMelIn is installed and you are connected to the internet then you may need to revert back to previous IP address settings in order to continue using the DAW control that is if you connect via a direct cross over cable to do DAW control Please refer to the Genesys Computer Settings for DAW Control section on page 25 to change the settings back to those prior to setting up LogMeln 24 Wiring connections Setup for DAW Control wn el To Genesys glide pad PS2 mouse DAW Control eg o ES O JEJE TE E JE TX_8T MONITOR FRA DEXT JN sX IDEO RCA el RLL O O UX 2T L R MIX L R OUT les SYNC IN OUT 2T I P SERIA L FIREWIRE MRDCLOMK Ethernet hub I To DAW There is only one Ethernet connection to be made to the Genesys computer This can then be fed in to an optional hub studio network where the second connection from the hub will go directly to your DAW computer Ethernet port Similarly the Genesys computer can be connected directly to the DAW computer Ethernet connector negating the use of a hub NB When using hubs only standard Ethernet cables should be used When not using a hub and connecting t
223. is activated anywhere on console this trim pot sets the amount by which the monitoring will dim This is a global setting that applies the same dim value when any of the Talkback to CUE1 CUE2 TB SLATE or TB ALL buttons are pressed It has a range of OdB to 40dB To set this value press and hold down any of the CUE1 CUE2 TB or SLATE buttons on the Talkback panel The value of the TB Trim will be displayed relative to the Monitor Level or Master Dim level on the Monitor Knob alpha display While holding the above button down turn the trimpot above the Master Dim button until the desired value is reached Factory set to 20dB Main Monitor Pot In it s default state this controls the monitoring level to the speakers the level being displayed underneath in the alpha display window The control ranges from OFF through 56dB to OdB However between 14db and 18dB the display of 15 refers to a fixed operating level of 85dB It is at this level that the control should be set when calibrating external speakers and amplifiers By pressing the knob it is possible to set up the DIM AFL PFL and SIF levels gt Press the knob to set the DIM level the DIM led will light The dim level will be shown on the alpha display and has a range of OdB to 36dB gt Rotate the knob to set the value Whenever DIM is pressed on the Control Room Monitor panel it will dim by this amount relative to the LS Monitor level
224. is on it will swap the Genesys faders between controlling the actual DAW fader level itself to controlling the Sends Aux or Pans or Plug ins levels positions The and P buttons will assign tracks to the DAW encoders four at a time 1 4 5 8 9 12 13 16 then back round again etc The tracks assigned to the encoders are indicated on the console surface by lighting a block of four SEL leds just above the Genesys faders left Tip When a block of 4 SEL buttons is lit in this way you can immediately set any other block of 4 to the encoders by pressing any one of the SEL buttons on the Genesys console 175 Ch Y Pot Select DAW Meters Refresh s 9315 A highlighted selected track in Logic Pro will also be shown in the Genesys DAW software screen in the top right corner in red LCD type font 01 02 48 The fader SEL button will also flash to indicate the selected track You can also set tracks 9 12 for example to the encoders by pressing any of the SEL buttons above faders 9 10 11 or 12 NB Where reference is made to the channel faders and channel fader SEL buttons these are only available on consoles which have the motorised channel faders installed Please be aware that when Genesys is the controlling DAW faders these fader levels will not form part of any Recall or snapshot file saved on Genesys and will therefore not be available for restoring at a later time through Genesys The DAW fader le
225. is right most or left most The diagram below shows where the two sets of jumpers are on the Master card just above the OUT and IN serial connectors and the numerical labelling on the pins themselves Ci2f4 01215 J31 and J33 are the jumpers to be set and the following applies regardless of how many Master and Slave cards there are in the console or whatever configuration they are in e The most left hand Master or Monitor card in the console should have both sets of jumpers over pins 1 amp 2 e The most right hand Master or Monitor card in the console should have both sets of jumpers over pins 1 amp 2 All other Master cards or Monitor should have their jumpers placed over pins 2 amp 3 If the Monitor card is at either far left or far right on the console rather than a Master card then it is the Monitor board that needs to have the jumpers set on pins 1 amp 2 instead of a Master card Slave cards do not have these jumpers fitted The following diagrams show consoles of different sizes and different configurations with the Master and Monitor cards in different locations 136 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 Monitor 33 40 41 48 49 56 57 64 Master Slave Master Slave Master Slave Master Slave xX xX xX Monitor 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 Master Slave Master Slave 1 8 9 16 Monitor 17 24 25 32 33 40 41 48 Master Slave Master Slave Master Slave xX xX Cards that need jumpers on pins 1 amp 2
226. ither choose a new plug in or edit a plug in on a different track or slot From the Mixer View you must press the Ch V Pot to edit a preselected plug ins parameters FADS and BANKS FADS allows a large session with lots of tracks to be seamlessly controlled from Genesys Press FADS the button will light gt Use the P buttons to move the DAW tracks up down the console surface a single track at a time gt If the BANKS button is lit using the gt buttons will move the DAW tracks up down the console surface eight tracks at a time The tracks currently under control will be displayed on screen AUTO AUTO allows the Automation Modes to be changed on any of the DAW tracks by using the fader SEL buttons gt Press the AUTO button gt Now press the fader SEL button on the console to change the 182 00000 STOP PLAY REC L__ TRANSPORT automation mode Pressing the fader SEL button repeated will cycle through the automation modes in your DAW for that track Turn off AUTO when not in use as the fader SEL buttons are used to control these functions and you may inadvertently change something CHAN CHAN puts the DAW tracks into Track Arm Record Enable mode and tracks can be armed on off by using the fader SEL buttons gt Press the CHAN button gt Now press the fader SEL button on the console to put the track into armed mode record enabled Pressing the fa
227. itor Panel then press RTE o JS oon M som SEL to enter Master SEL mode w sE The RTE SEL button will flash along with all of the console SEL leds 1 Most of the Monitor Panels buttons will have their functionality blocked CONTROL ROOM MONITOR LS SEL out apart from those indicated in white left Once Master SEL Mode has been switched on it switches the DAW EQ and DYN screen over to the Settings Screen display and suspends the operation of all the buttons on the Control Room Monitor panel apart from shown in white left ST e 2T e ST e MONO e CUT e Individual Loudspeaker Cuts e The Monitor Pot push switch A B M1 8 M2 The rest of the Control Room Monitoring panel s button display and functionality plus the ability to swap the control room monitoring is suspended If lit the D EXT AFL PFL amp RTB leds will also be suspended gt Make any desired changes gt Press RTE SEL again to exit Master SEL Mode Any changes you have made will be saved and the buttons display screen and audio will revert to their last selection To Tie a Set of Speakers to the Stereo DownMix It is possible to tie a set of loudspeakers to monitoring the Stereo DownMix so that selecting the speaker set automatically monitors the Stereo DownMix Press and hold down LOCK on the Main Monitor Panel then press RTE SEL to enter Master SEL mode The RTE SEL button will flash along with all of the con
228. ke its sync from either e Wordclock In e AES Sync ln e The DEXT L R input as embedded sync e Use internal clock Supported sample rates are e 44 1 kHz e 48 kHz e 88 2 kHz e 96 kHz e 176 4 kHz 192 kHz The audio word length is 24 bits wide The 2T Mix input can be used as a spare stereo analogue input to the console However it can carry the 2T Output path if you connect the 2T Input jack sockets to the 2T Output lines on the adjacent 25 way D sub connector 131 Connectors amp Switches AES TX 8T AES RX DEXT This connector outputs all of the 8Ts digitally plus accepts a digital 5 1 Surround External input into the Monitoring system Each connector handles two paths as a stereo pair Connector Seaapnainie Pin number Shield Hi Low 1 5 1 External L amp R input 25 24 12 2 5 1 External C amp Sub input 11 10 23 3 5 1 External Ls amp Rs input 22 21 9 4 5 8T 1 amp 2 Output 19 18 6 6 8T 3 amp 4 Output 5 4 17 7 8T 5 amp 6 Output 16 15 3 8 8T 7 amp 8 Output 2 1 14 AES TX AUX 2T L R MIX L R AES SYNC IN OUT This connector digitally outputs the Auxes 2T Mix and Main mix plus providing AES Sync In and Out connections Connector number Signal name Pin Shield Hi Low 1 Aux 1 8 2 Output 25 24 12 2 Aux 3 amp 4 Output 11 10 23 3 Aux 5 L amp R Output 22 21 9 4 Aux 6 L amp R Output
229. l all controls have been reset NB On automation desks the fader can be recalled automatically due to the presence of a fader motor and is part of the soft controls part of the Recall along with all of the led states On non automation desks the fader has to be matched by hand using the on screen graphic The software can either display each control in sequence from channel 1 so it can be reset in order Automatic mode or individual channels can be selected in any order where you only need to set certain controls on certain channels Hold mode Recall operates on the three main sections of the console each of which is further sub divided Monitor Panel This is nominally split into 1 Cues Master Meter Selects shown with grey background 2 Monitor Panel Console Status sections Greyed out sections indicate that they do not form part of the Recall system e Routing e Oscillator e Slate e Talkback e Monitor knob leds Dim AFL PFL SIF 113 Channel Section This is nominally split into 1 Channel input processing section 2 Auxes Section 3 Direct Output and Monitor Section 4 Channel fader and CUT button but not SOLO When applying a Recall file to the console sections 1 2 and 3 are displayed as three distinct sections see below Section 4 is only displayed on desks that do not have Automation faders fitted as the Fader will need resetting manually O HZ E gt A E
230. l systems 17 24 Off ON Off Cassettes may still be moved or but they will not function 25 32 ON ON Off All correctly unless the first three 33 40 Off Off ON OFF for 8 bit Off switches are set to reflect teis their new position in the 41 48 ON Off ON RG console 49 56 Off ON ON If in doubt please consult 57 64 ON ON ON AMS Neve 226 Alphabetical Index A UNO 56 2 2 WACK e o o aria EEN 154 rA Es heat ra rae dades 102 PA nats 22 62 73 80 82 87 131 132 152 203 223 ZIMIO Sr onda 223 RS is 132 ETA SA 62 EMO ada 62 86 ZUM sellos 60 83 5 A BE EE E sad A E TE E ETE E A T 132 S L Digital external riii e E RA 131 Y a 86 Dk MOdE ias odiado 82 85 102 SL MONO Na 104 8 GOCE ea ts 78 8T 16 22 36 42 44 55 59 60 62 73 80 83 105 107 114 132 154 oA E EE ES AE ida 91 OTS Taste E naonae 41 50 A E 50 OO ita ici 41 50 Ol TAC O 33 89 169 174 184 Ol INSEE aneneen ntanna aA 45 58 S Ted esaa a A 91 Slt Meter id uscar a a a A 41 ST MERS inca 62 Ol QUEPUES iras 42 60 82 86 131 152 ST SAFE ida 64 76 SO ida 33 ST SO LIA Mins ds 105 Oil TOMO Na 104 A A AAA AA AA 76 80 AD DA Cassette aia 105 AD DA Cassette aria a os tad 30 Advanced BIOS Features ccccccesseeeeuseeeneueseunes 198 PES inn das 148 AES CH SYNC nit 125 AES Channel LL aa 149 RES DEX E olas ias aio add 152 AES Digital Externa linia bid 154 AES Digital Line INDUt occ
231. l be sent to both 8T 7 amp 8T 8 as a stereo pair In it s default state the PAN and 8T 7 8 buttons apply to Aux 5 To set this to be Aux 6 press the PAN control The adjacent led will light It is not possible to make contributions to both Aux 5 and Aux 6 at the same time on the same channel When an Aux is sent to an 8T buss then the contribution to the Aux buss is disconnected but the ON led will still work as normal After exiting Master SEL Mode pressing the level control will turn the contribution to that Aux On Off 50 DIRECT OUTPUT Section Master Level Sets the level of the Direct Output and has a range of to 10dB In it s default state there will be no output and all of the associated leds will be unlit Off The control is a 6 state toggle and pressing it will cycle the Direct Output to be fed from 1 press e Channel input Pre processing Pre fader Pre CUT PRE led lit e Channel input Post processing Pre fader Pre CUT PRE amp CH leds lit e Channel input Post processing Post fader Post CUT CH led lit e Monitor input Post processing Pre fader Pre CUT PRE amp MON leds lit e Monitor input Post processing Post fader Post CUT MON led lit e OFF all leds unlit When in Mix mode the Channel input selection is not possible so as to prevent feedback via the DAW the PRE led will flash to indicate this Please note In early versions of software this contro
232. l indicate the function or mode you are in along with the current plug in P1 P2 P9 DAW control allows you to control up to 16 Logic plug ins per track Press the fader SEL button for Logic track 1 or the first assigned DAW track You have now selected DAW track 1 You will see in the top right corner the display indicator has changed to O1 if not already to indicate you have selected track 1 The fader SEL button will also flash gt F1 and F2 buttons are used to select which plug in you are controlling Now keep pressing F1 until you are see that you are controlling Plug in 1 plug in slot 1 P1 will be shown on the Genesys software gt F3 and F4 buttons are used to shift the plug in parameters up down the console surface the number of parameters depends on how many controls are associated with a plug in The Genesys software should now show the following information on the top most line Plug ins Inserts Mixer View P1 gt On the channel strip using the Ch V Pot large red encoder for the selected track turn the encoder and a new plug in will be selected Turn the Ch V Pot anti clockwise until you see a on the Genesys software 181 this removes the plug in Keep turning the Ch V Pot clockwise slowly one notch at a time and select a plug in e Fat EQ This will be shown on the Genesys software as you change the plug in selection Press the Ch V Pot like you would do to a push button a
233. l will work in a slightly different manner as it will always be in circuit taking it s feed from the Channel Input with no leds lit to indicate this selection However the subsequent toggle cycle of e Ch Pre e Ch Post e Mon Pre e Mon Post is still preserved 5f a MONITOR Section L RPan Pan control Classic 3dB centre line pan with S law shaping for earlier consoles and 4dB for LCR consoles gt Press to enable Mon Level Control Sets the monitor input level and has a range of to 10dB It is not possible to write automation data using this knob gt Instead when in automation press the SWP button below so this path is then on the fader instead Automation data can be written on the fader then once finished turn SWP off Press the level control knob to light the adjacent AUT led this means the previously fader written data will be played back the audio level is set by the automation and not by the physical position of the knob itself Press the level control to turn off the automation AUT led this means the previous fader written data will not be played back The audio level will then be set by the monitor knob AUT led gt Press the Monitor Level Control to select AUT On Off AUT is only selectable in automation and will be set to On if selected in the Encore Prefs Mix AUT enable when a mix is loaded As stated it is only available on consoles with the Automation option fi
234. ld Hi Low 1 AES RX 1 DLINE 1 2 25 24 12 2 AES RX 2 DLINE 3 4 11 10 23 3 AES RX 3 DLINE 5 6 22 21 9 4 AES RX 4 DLINE 7 8 8 7 20 5 AES TX 1 DAW 1 2 19 18 6 6 AES TX 2 DAW 3 4 5 4 17 7 AES TX 3 DAW 5 6 16 15 3 8 AES TX 4 DAW 7 8 2 1 14 AES RX DMON 25 way D type Connector A Pin number Shield Hi Low 1 AES RX 1 DMON 1 2 25 24 12 2 AES RX 2 DMON 3 4 11 10 23 3 AES RX 3 DMON 5 6 22 21 9 4 AES RX 4 DMON 7 8 8 7 20 5 E E E 6 E E 7 E z P 8 s a R a Serial 1 2283 CAT5 Should only ever be connected to the port of the same name on this card s corresponding Master card using standard off the shelf CAT5 cables Serial 1 goes to Serial 1 and so on 221 AD DA Monitoring cassette SMN 812 410 This single card regardless of console size is fitted beneath the Computer cassette L gt RS232 o A rn xX MIDI NGA T oor ng pl l yen a No loo VGA 2 i ae p ha ADN JA e S J RS485 pii AYNA SON UN ye O OUT o lO jG jo a JOE OC y a SVIDEO RCA z es F V JE IL T_T 1 A ER a O O O Ib O Le elle C LOIN ILL Inn O O AES TX_8T AES TX
235. led M1 LS O P this is the first set of stereo speaker outputs and the DAW audio connections are in place using the 25 way D type connectors on the rear of the console When the console is booted for the very first time the AMS Neve default Stereo Recording Setup will be sent to the console This sets the states of various controls routing metering and monitoring selections and presumes that the console will be used for Recording in stereo If you wish to change the default setup when the console is powered up or even create custom setups of your own select the relevant option in the Settings screen Now set the channel fader to 10dB and the channel strip monitor DAW knobs to the 12 o clock position With the default Stereo Recording setup the following states will be set on the main Master Panel Metering options e Channel meters set to CH I P e 8T meters set to MON e 2T meters set to MIX Cue Mix panel applies to both Cues e Utility set to MIX e AUX 1 6 setto 5 and On MASTER SEL panel e CH SEL set to MIC with mic gain set to about 20dB Control Room Monitor panel e MIX INT M1 and CUT will all be selected e The monitor level knob will be set to Off Solo System e CH SAFE MON SAFE and LATCH all selected MON SEL panel e Set to DAW SND Routing e All of the Monitor paths will be sent to the L and R Main Mix busses for all channels regardless of the actual console size e There will be no Surround
236. like you would do to a push button will toggle the Bypass for all 8 sends of the selected track Press F5 and FLIP should now be on With FLIP on the Genesys faders will now have the functionality of the Ch V Pots the DAW faders will now be controlled by the Ch V Pots gt With FLIP on pressing a tracks Ch V Pot will now toggle the Input Monitoring on off for that track PANS Press the PANS button and it will light up PANS is used to control Pans gt Make sure the F5 button is not on i e FLIP is off If FLIP is on press F5 to turn it off The Genesys software at the top will indicate the function or mode you are in Pans Mixer View Mode 188 gt F1 F2 or the fader SEL buttons are used to select DAW tracks gt F3 and F4 buttons are used to select the pans parameters left right and front rear Press F3 so you are controlling the left right parameter this will be Shown on the Genesys software gt Rotate a Ch V Pot and the pan position will change for that track Press a Ch V Pot and it will toggle the Input Monitoring on off for that track Press F5 and FLIP should now be on With FLIP on the Genesys faders will now have the functionality of the Ch V Pots the DAW faders will now be controlled by the Ch V Pots gt With FLIP on pressing a tracks Ch V Pot will still toggle the Input Monitoring on off for that track LI gt Press the PLI button and it will light up PLI is used
237. ling DAW faders via HUI these levels will not form part of any Recall file and will therefore not be available for restoring at a later time These DAW fader levels are actually stored in the DAW and not in the Genesys Recall files 039 0385 9580 ree O jajajajaja ua aaa Ite EN ee a Ne Y OTe oe OC JE Recall Overview Recall is an optional software package that not only enables the console to record led states in much the same way as a Snapshot does but to also record and recall the level of all rotary controls as well These values can then be sent back to the console either globally or selectively where rotary controls can be matched by hand following the on screen graphics and led and button states can be set with a single mouse click If the Recall software has been installed and licensed there will be a red letter R displayed in the top right of the timecode display If it is not fitted it will be displayed in grey as shown left Recall differs from a console snapshot in that while both of them record the state and position of all buttons leds and rotary controls a Snapshot can only replay led and button states back to the console Recall on the other hand will show a graphical representations of a control on the desk allowing the user to match it manually Once a control has been reset the next control in that strip will be displayed and so on unti
238. ll continue to display it s current analog meter level and selection This is a 14 step DAW metering indication and it is mainly used to show the max peak level indication from Logic rather than accurate the metering exactly as in Logic This will over ride any other metering selection already made on the desk Refresh s Genesys software This affects how often the Genesys software will be refreshed and updated with new data information coming in from the DAW and can be set between 0 2 to 10 seconds This rate is stored and reset to the previous value when the console is reset or rebooted If there is particularly dense fader automation coming from Logic to Genesys it may be necessary to set this a higher value Name Value Genesys software The Name Value button switches the DAW track information text shown in yellow on the Genesys screen between parameter values and parameter names This can be used to quickly interrogate which parameters are being changed When parameter values are displayed the DAW track information also displays DAW track labels These changes will also be reflected on the 4 character display on the Genesys faders It is recommended to revert back to parameter values after changing or interrogating parameter names so the DAW track labels are visible on the Genesys faders character displays Other considerations There may be problems displaying all of the DAW metering or Genesys software information dat
239. ls to respond you will be warned that it is not possible to update the firmware on this particular panel Glossary of on screen buttons Updates the panel s firmware that needs to be updated automatically Exits this screen and returns you to the System Diagnostics screen Resets the selected panel to the power up state In order for that panel to become part of the system again the console software will need to be re launched Checks the panel selected is present for comms and reports back the current firmware version loaded for that panel Selects the panel s to be reset checked or programmed Selects the panel s to be reset checked or programmed Manually programs the selected panel s Reports back which panel s are up to date or need updating It compares the current build of software loaded with that on the console computer Revision Notes Panel Display gt Click to show a rolling history of the software fixes amp new features leading up to the currently installed version 120 F This will Restart the Genesys Applications Software Are you sure x This will Restart the Genesys Computer Are you sure This will Shutdown the Genesys Computer Are you sure Note To Power OF the Console wait for Computer to power off then switch off power at the back E This will Quit the Genesys Software and exit to Windows Vista Are you sure Do you wish to Update the As Was Snapshot x This is a two
240. m The Wordclock sync is also output on the adjacent WCLK OUT BNC connector should it be needed to feed other pieces of equipment If the WCLK OUT connector is used it should be terminated by setting the 75Q switch as shown on page 127 214i AES Sync In Out DSub2 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 Monitoring 33 40 41 48 49 56 57 64 Master Slave Master Slave Master Slave Master Slave The card receiving the AES Sync is set on the main Configurator screen Please go to page 148 to see how this is set This AES sync is then internally distributed from this single point to all the other cards in the system This same AES sync is then output on connector 7 on the same D Sub connector should it be needed for other pieces of equipment Unlike WCLK sync AES sync does not need terminating if the Output is unused AES Ch 1 2 Sync DSub1 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 Monitoring 33 40 41 48 49 56 57 64 Master Slave Master Slave Master Slave Master Slave The AES sync can be derived from the AES channels 1 and 2 Line audio input using XLR connector 1 This has the advantage of not needing an extra cable to supply just the sync To set which of the cards receives the AES Channel 1 amp 2 Sync please go to the main software Configuration screen on page 148 to see how this is Set If you wish to take the sync input by the same method by on the Monitor card instead the AES sync is derived from the DEXT L am
241. m to OdB This screen will also show whether you are working in Group mode or 5 1 mode Mode displayed left and whether the 2Ts are fed Pre or Post fader displayed right Control of the 2Trk functions is only via the software screen Control with the four Monitor Panel encoders located at the bottom of the panel will be implemented in a future software release 85 5 1 Mixing Mode On screen icons will display e 5 1 as opposed to Group e Whether the feeds are sourced Pre or Post the 8T Faders e Trim values for the C S and LS RS e 2T output On or Off and 2T Output level EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore The 8T Outputs feed to the 2T Mixer in the following way 8T Output Surround Destination 2T Destination 1 Left Left 2 Right Right 3 not used not used 4 not used not used 5 Left Surround Left 6 Right Surround Right 7 Centre 5 a Left and Right The four encoders in the DAW Console centre section have the following function in 5 1 Mode Encoder Push switch function Rotary function 1 On Off contribution to C 10dB Trim 2 On Off contribution to S 10dB Trim 3 On Off contribution to LS RS 10dB Trim 4 2T Output On Off Level control to 0dB The Trim values will be displayed on screen as you set them Group Mixing Mode On screen icons will display e Group as opposed to 5 1
242. midity Operating 20 to 80 Non operating 5 to 90 Max wet bulb 28 C non condensing or 57 F non condensing Altitude Operating 0 to 2 000m Non operating Oto 12 000m A Each sixteen channel section has it s own PSU Power Supply Unit system located at the rear of the console Care must be taken not to place any accessories that could block the ventilation above or below the heat sinks at the rear of the console All PSU s will operate over an ambient temperature range of 10 C to 22 C 14 F to 72 F The console must not be powered up or operated with the dust cover still in place Health amp Safety Notice Ni FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY AND THE PROTECTION OF OTHERS PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING SAFETY HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS UN nay Y YV V V V V YV vV viv v v vy Yy READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS AND KEEP THEM HANDY HEED ALL SAFETY WARNINGS THE CONSOLE MUST BE EARTHED WHEN OPERATED DO NOT USE NEAR WATER CLEAN ONLY WITH A DRY CLOTH DO NOT INSTALL NEAR HEAT SOURCES DO NOT BLOCK VENTILATION OPENINGS THE AMBIENT ROOM TEMPERATURE SHOULD BE NO GREATER THAN 22 C 72 F PROTECT THE POWER CORDS USE ONLY ACCESSORIES SPECIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER UNPLUG WHEN UNUSED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME OR DURING LIGHTNING ORMS MODULES AND CARDS SHOULD NOT BE INSERTED OR REMOVED WITH THE POWER ON REFER ALL SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY THE CONSOLE MUST ONLY BE MOVED BY AT LEAST TWO PEOPLE NO USER
243. mode 8T and 2T on the internal monitor will still be interlocked INS Lights yellow and activates the 5 1 Monitor inserts ST or DownMix Collapses the 5 1 monitor mix into stereo by sending the Surround paths to form a Stereo mix Surround signal Stereo downmix Left Left Right Right Centre Left amp Right Sub Left amp Right Left Surround Left Right Surround Right It is also possible to tie a particular set of loudspeakers to the stereo DownMix so that selecting the particular speaker set will also select that DownMix to monitor See section below on Master SEL Mode NB It is possible to alter the level contribution to the Centre Sub Left Surround amp Right Surround by adjusting the factory set preset pots on the rear of the LS M1 Output cassette OL Inverts the phase of the Left side of the monitoring AFL PFL led This yellow led flashes if a Channel SOLO with CH SAFE selected ora Monitor SOLO with MON SAFE selected is pressed It will also light if the 8T SOLO is made safe via the Settings screen or if any of the AFL buttons on the Rev Returns are selected Indicates that the AFL is the solo source fed to the monitor loudspeakers 75 PFL Lights yellow and allows the PFL buss to be switched to the monitors whenever a SOLO is pressed on a Channel Monitor or 8T in Safe Mode It is enabled to be selected by either CH SAFE MON SAFE or 8T SAFE and is
244. mode first starts up in Mixer View mode Confirm this by looking at the top most line on the Genesys software Pans Surround Mixer View Mixer View allows you to edit a single Pan or Surround parameter on multiple channel strips laid out across the Genesys console surface On non surround DAW tracks Pan and Angle On Surround DAW tracks Surround Angle Diversity LFE and Spread Press the fader SEL button for Logic track 1 or the first assigned DAW track You have now selected DAW track 1 You will see in the top right corner the display indicator has changed to O1 if not already to indicate you have selected track 1 The fader SEL button will also flash gt F1 and F2 buttons are also used to select the DAW track gt F3 and F4 buttons are used to select the Pan Surround parameters gt On the channel strip using the Ch V Pot for the selected track turn the encoder and the Pan Surround selected parameter position will change This will be shown on the Genesys software as you change the parameter Pressing the Ch V Pot will set the Pan Surround position to centre Press F5 and FLIP should now be on With FLIP on the Genesys faders will now have the same functionality as the Ch V Pots Now with FLIP on move the Genesys fader for DAW track 1 The Pan Surround position will change confirm this by looking at Logic Pro and Genesys software When the aders display the Pan position they will have a range of 64 pan har
245. momentary to latching in TB Latch mode TB Output Enable This control if ticked will allow CUE1 and CUE2 to turn on the TB Relay allowing for an extra TB level control output to be sent to the studio TB system Lock Monitor Level When enabled this prevents the large main monitor knob from being able to set the DIM AFL PFL SIF values so pressing the knob will not light any of the leds underneath nor allow you to change their settings DLine Enable Only applicable on consoles that are fitted with at least one Channel AD DA cassette 105 Power Up OSC Setups Calibrate Power Lip et Ups Set By Store Calibrate When enabled this will take the DLN input and feed it into the DAW RTN path meaning that the digital line input can be monitored through the Monitor section If DAW is selected at the top of the channel strip when this option is ticked this input will be forced into DLN to prevent possible feedback Similarly with this option ticked DAW cannot be select as an input Instead when you toggle round the options by pressing the Trim pot the DAW led will flash once to show it cannot be selected and the input will be set to the next available selection On power up the console can be set to one of four states Default This is the AMS Neve default Read Only setup loads the 2T MIX setup As Was The console takes a snapshot of itself between every five to sixty minute
246. n e e e e e e e e e e li SoftWare etup Osc ore OFS ore at at a 97 aia O papas ES B B B B B B B B B B OS gt Loudspeakers a a a a a a a a a a leds Si gt Pink noise DC 26 0 226 26 r 26 r 226 0 26 r 26 r 26 26 Sh E loc ES lt op lt DAW pirates E EA AA AE E A a o Control LS 2T Mix 8T Ch m DAW Meters l ve Os Yel Yel Ya OS DAW METER SWITCHING A 91 _ ofp lt VU i gt oj el 1 el Meter Control Vu BARGRAPH ls opi lt PPM o gt 2T Tone fees PPM MASTER 7 Zone i Le e De E tH He A AA pa J web lt SET nd thats Se Se aE IK In dat O ES A IS A pr ci om x PEAK ps do AR HOLD c gt p a op lt DIM ioc a i eT Sire ct 8T o p s 1 8 gt e e f Cue 1 A A 1740 ee e RL Pa O ED sl i j al ines sot re Aux o p s 1 8 So l l elo hs F Sp A fh gt RTB Cut gt Cue2 TB DC O r lt AUX l l la 4 Yel l oTo eadb a a Cue 2 o DC l a AN A A da A A T pl o Rec Slate Q oR PHH A l l wE OO maaa HH oe ES poe Be Be rd r rd Be Be ae aaa ca eae VBDC Filename FR11731 sbk Eng has priority A W E L Owe ve DC gt e 00 La gt RTB Cut 1 o z gate 9 TB 0 P ol gt Lat Enable DC gt __ O gt K Light Q Remote ors gt TB DC Dim ri Spare Garret gt HE o pr PSU 1 2 3 4 5V 18V 18V 48V Red R
247. n Off and level control ranging from OdB to oo for the 2T Output In this mode the allocation of the group contributions to the 2T mix will be 8T Output to 8T 1 3 5 amp 7 Left 2T Mix 8T 2 4 6 amp 8 Right 2T Mix 5 1 mode You have individual On Off control and 10dB of Trim for each of the C S and LS RS contributions to the 2T Output plus a global On Off and level control ranging from OdB to for the 2T Output In this mode the allocation of the group contributions to the 2T mix will be 8T Speaker Destination Output to 8T 1 Left Left 2T Mix 8T 2 Right Right 2T Mix 8T 3 not used not used 8T 4 not used not used 8T 5 Left Surround Left 2T Mix 8T 6 Right Surround Right 2T Mix 8T 7 Centre l are S Left amp Right 2T Mix For details on how to swap between Group Mode and 5 1 Mode see chapter on Control Room Monitor panel 102 e DAW Setup and control for the Digital Audio Workstation DAW Please see chapter on Digital Audio Workstation DAW Control on page 169 for full operational instructions 103 Settings Contains system wide parameters regarding e 8T to Loudspeaker routing e Solo linking e Power Up status and TB Functions e Path calibration Level Settings e Loudspeaker settings e Console Utilities LS Settings All of the settings below can also be set in SEL Mon Mode using the Monitor
248. n each path DAW Lights red whenever the DAW button is pressed on the Control Room Panel and indicates that the 8T meters are being fed from the DAW metering and not the console metering PSU STATUS Indicates the state of the internal console power supplies If all power supplies to all sections of the console are healthy then all leds will be OFF The 1 2 3 amp 4 leds refer to a particular 16 channel section of the console As Genesys is scalable up to 64 faders each of the 1 4 leds refer to a block of 16 channels Led Console Fader Section 1 1 16 93 17 32 3 33 48 49 64 If a power supply should fail 2 or more leds will light e One ofthe 1 2 3 or 4 leds will indicate the section of the console e One of the 48v 5v 18v or 18v leds will indicate which Supply within that section For example if 2 and 48v were lit this would indicate there is no 48v phantom power supply on fader section 17 32 O O O 48 V 5V 1 8 Y 1 8 y 94 Master Screen EH The SETUP screen allows you to make console wide changes all in one action Oe Any changes made on the console surface in Master SEL Mode are Neve reflected when you open the Setup screen and any changes made on the Setup screen will be reflected on the console once you Exit innovative desktop control Common to all the screens is a large timecode display in the top right This
249. nd the selected plug in will be set Confirm this by looking at Logic Pro for track 1 Insert slot 1 After plug in selection the DAW control changes to Plug ins Inserts Channel View Editor mode automatically The Genesys software will display this mode gt All the plug in parameters will be laid out across the console surface DAW assigned faders Ch V Pots only gt Press F3 or F4 to shift the plug in parameters up down the console surface allowing you to edit all parameters associated with the plug in gt Using the Ch V Pots you can change the parameters associated with the plug in Press the PLI button again to return to Mixer View mode When you press the PLI button the plug ins window in Logic will automatically close gt Press F1 or F2 to change the plug in slot gt In a similar way you can choose a plug in slot change the plug in selection and edit the parameters for all other DAW tracks Press F5 and FLIP should now be on With FLIP on the Genesys faders will now have the same functionality as the Ch V Pots If you do not press the Ch V Pot after selecting a plug in to set it regardless of the FLIP mode any changes you have made will be lost when you change another parameter or plug in slot So always remember to press the Ch V Pot after changing the plug in selection gt Once you have finished editing a plug ins parameters always press the PLI button again to return to Mixer View mode to e
250. nected to their Slave cards by 3 x CAT5 connectors Serial 1 on the Master connects to Serial 1 on the Slave and so on There are two chains of CAT5 connectors for comms purposes shown at the bottom of the above diagram that start from the central Monitoring AD DA card one for the Left side and one for the Right side of the console gt From the central Monitoring AD DA connect Out to In Out to In etc spreading out from the centre of the console All of these connections are made on the rear of the AD DA cards themselves 140 CAT 5 connections on systems without AD DA Monitor card Channel Slave Audio Link Channel Slave Audio Link Channel Slave Audio Link Channel Slave Audio Link E USB to CAT5 converter cable into the first Serial In on 17 24 Master Genesys card then out of Serial Out into Serial In on 1 8 out of Serial Out to Serial In on computer 33 40 and so on On a system without a Monitor card the comms goes from the Genesys computers into the 17 24 Master card then this signal goes to 1 8 33 40 and finally 49 56 Wordclock Sync 9 16 17 24 25 32 Monitoring 33 40 41 48 49 56 57 64 Slave Master Slave Master Slave Master Slave The Wordclock Sync can only be accepted by the left hand most Master card or the Monitor card if this is left most using the WCLK IN BNC connector This Wordclock sync is then internally distributed from this single point to all the other cards in the syste
251. nectors amp Switches Overview Co olfof O E E A oO qo O Co CHANNEL AES RX DLINE AES RX DMON SLAVE AES TX CHANNEL SLAVE AUDIO LINK The Slave AD DA board provides 8 balanced analogue Inputs the Channel Direct Outputs 16 balanced analogue Outputs the Channels DLN amp DMON inputs 8 AES Outputs grouped in stereo pairs on 25 way D sub carrying Channel Direct Outputs signals 16 AES Inputs grouped in stereo pairs on 25 way D sub carrying DLN and DMON inputs These inputs have sample rate converters that convert any input sample rate frequency to the sample rate selected on the Genesys Provision to bypass these SRCs is provided on a pair of channels basis DLINE 1 2 DLINE 3 4 etc The Slave card is connected to its associated Master card by three CAT5 connectors called the Channel Slave Link The AD DA Slave cards only have two 25 way D type connectors and three serial ports and therefore do not have Wordclock In Out BNC connectors FireWire ports Switch blocks The AD DA Slave cards 25 way D type connectors carry the same audio Signals as the Master FireWire cards with the exception of the AES Sync In Out signals not being present as either an input or an output this is because a Slave card takes its sync from its associated Master card AES RX DLINE AES TX Connector Signal name Pin number system name Shield Hi Low 1 AES RX 1 DLINE 1 2
252. ng ENTER The Boot Menu left will now appear gt Ensure that EaseUS Todo Backup is highlighted and press ENTER gt When the menu left appears on your screen use your mouse to click on Disk Partition Recovery gt Using your keyboard hold down the ALT key and press R key at the same time gt On your screen you will see a new menu appear with various options gt Click on Computer gt The window will display different drives available on your computer left gt Open the first of these drives by clicking the drive icon then clicking the yellow folder and a drop down list of files will become available gt The file you should select is GenesysRecoveryImage PBD If this is not located in the first drive folder collapse this by re clicking the folder and open up the next folder Repeat this process until you find the correct drive folder with the GenesysRecoveryImage PBD file gt Click on this file to highlight it then using your keyboard hold down the ALT key and press the O key at the same time gt The menu left will now appear With the mouse click and select the option listed then use the computer keyboard and hold down the ALT key and press N key at the same time gt This action will then display a sub menu in which you need to use your mouse to click the tick box next to the disk option ensure that clicking this box selects all tick boxes gt Now hold down the ALT key and press
253. nge the IP DNS addresses to those supplied by your ISP if your ISP provides you with address settings to connect to the internet NB Once Check for Updates has finished and you are connected to the internet then you may need to revert back to previous IP address settings in order to continue using the DAW control that is if you connect via a direct cross over cable to do DAW control Please refer to the Genesys Computer Settings for DAW Control section on page 25 to change the settings back to those prior to running Check for Updates In certain circumstances the software maybe supplied via a download link from AMS Neve the downloaded file should be placed on the Genesys Windows desktop before installing Before installing the console software from the Genesys screen click System gt Exit to Windows Failure to close the software down in this way means the software will display error messages and consequently fail to install correctly You do not need to un install the previous version first you can simply install the new version on top of the old one Double click the downloaded file to open run the software installation wizard and follow the instructions detailed in the The Genesys Software Installation Wizard on page 193 sub section below Updating and Installing Genesys Software Automatically IMPORTANT Before checking for an update it is recommended you save a snapshot of the console settings From the Genesys software
254. nit will have an ID between 9 amp 16 NB Switch 1 is On when in the up position gt Remove the lid to the unit and set switch 1 to be ON then set the switches on the rear of the unit to the following fp Unit ID Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 9 Off Off Off 10 On Off Off 11 Off On Off 12 On On Off 13 Off Off On 14 On Off On 15 Off On On 16 On On On If a unit s ID is changed the 4081 must be switched off and on again for the remote control software to be aware of the new ID number If the ID number is set incorrectly a unit will either fail to respond or multiple units will respond to a single command 164 Connecting the 4081 to Genesys with USB Serial EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE on 0 SO Click R n USB to te Scan USB to sca on Use Manual Install to man al Driver USB Serial Driver Installation Re Scan USB Auto Install Manual Install Installing USB Serial Driver Please Wait 20 YOU ONLY NEED TO DO THIS THE FIRST TIME YOU CONNECT THE 4081 TO THE GENESYS CONSOLE gt Open up Genesys Software Click 4081 Mic in the Genesys main window Select USB Serial Options at the top of the screen NB Ensure you disconnect all USB serial cables from Genesys before doing this gt Click Auto Install in the pop up window gt Another window will appear Follow the on screen instructions to Auto
255. nitor Panels buttons will have their functionality blocked out Press 8T gt It is now possible to scroll through all of the 8T Outputs using the Monitor Knob the selected 8T appearing on the alpha display if there are routes already in place as you scroll through the 8T paths using the Monitor Knob these will be displayed via the Loudspeaker CUT buttons gt When you have selected the 8T you wish to configure select the loudspeaker you wish to send this path to using the individual LS CUT buttons The speaker button will light when selected It is possible to send any of the 8T Outputs to more than one speaker destination at a time Exit Master SEL Mode by pressing RTE SEL to lock these routes into place 2T Lights yellow and flashes when selected and allows setup of the 2T mixer When Master SEL mode plus 2T is selected it will open the 2T Setup screen as shown left al It is possible to set up the 2T mixer using the 2T Mon SEL or 2T screen to NEY configure the following genesy 5 1 mode or Group mode Group mode is useful for folding down stereo groups The 5 1 mode will set up your Down Mix of the 5 1 mix being made by the 8T system EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System Pre Post This selection allows the source to the 2T mixer to be Pre or Post the 8T faders Tone to 2T Indication that tone be selected to 2T or not is dependent on the selection in
256. nnect your Genesys computer to an internet connection If you have already connected the Genesys via your studio network or a hub with the ethernet connection then you may already have an internet connection If you have setup your console to connect to your DAW computer with a cross over direct linked cable then you will need to change the network IP address settings on the console to allow it to connect to the internet this will also depend on what settings your Internet Service Provider ISP requires for a valid connection contact your ISP if this is the case Please see the Genesys Computer Settings for DAW Control section on page 25 and change the settings either to gt Obtain an IP DNS address automatically or gt Manually change the IP DNS addresses to those supplied by your ISP if your ISP provides you with address settings to connect to the internet Once the Genesys is connected to the internet then create an account at http www logmein com You will need to supply an email address in order to be able to create an account this must be a valid email address as LogMeln will use it to validate your account with You can sign up to any free email provider if you prefer not to use your personal email address Select the LogMeln Free version unless you want to purchase the Pro version Once you have created the account you need to download and install the LogMeln software Then send AMS Neve the following informat
257. nning the installation Y P Double click Neve FireWire Installer to start the install MeveFirewWire Installer Setup Neve FireWire Card Welcome to the Neve FireWire Card Setup Wizard This will install Neve FireWire Card 3 5 2 8028 on your computer It is recommended that you close all other applications before continuing Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit Setup gt Click Next Setup Neve FireWire Card Select Destination Location Where should Neve FireWire Card be installed cl Setup will install Neve FireWire Card into the following folder To continue click Next If you would like to select a different folder click Browse C Program Files NeveF neWire At least 0 9 MB of free disk space is required gt Click Next Setup Neve FireWire Card Select Additional Tasks Which additional tasks should be performed Select the additional tasks you would like Setup to perform while installing Neve FireWire Card then click Next Additional icons Create a desktop icon gt Click Next Setup Neve FireWire Card Ready to Install Setup is now ready to begin installing Neve FireWire Card on your computer Click Install to continue with the installation or click Back if you want to review or change any settings Destination location C Program Files NeveFireWire Additional tasks Additional icons Create a desktop icon PET per ne gt C l i C k I n sta l l a 144
258. nput is 3 2K transformer balanced input is 3 1K e The Low Impedance electrically balanced input is 1 4K transformer balanced input is 1 3K The led will light when High has been selected PAD Reduces the mic input by 20dB Switches the phase of the incoming Channel signal 46 Pans 90Hz filter Switches a hi pass filter in the channel path with a 90Hz threshold with a 12dB per octave slope INPUT TRIM This supplies 15dB of trim to the incoming Channel signals Press the control to cycle the input selection through MIC LN DAW DLN shown on the adjacent leds NB DLN is only available if a Neve FireWire card is present and fitted If you have later LCR channel strips L C R Pan Pan control Press to enable The adjacent led will light yellow if it is set to work as a conventional L R pan or red if set to work as an L C R Pan as set in the Routing Screen If this control is not enabled the Pan control will have no effect on the audio level that is sent to the routed destinations If the Pan is set to work as an LCR Pan and routed to 5 1 destinations for example to Left Centre Right then there will be 9dB of divergence between Centre and Left Right For earlier Stereo Pan Channel Strips L R Pan control Classic 3dB centre with S law panning for earlier consoles and 4dB for later LCR consoles Press to enable will light yellow only If the control is not
259. o Tools will only support 32 channels of DAW control 4 MIDI Ports The number of Channels should be set to 8 for all ports gt Click OK to apply the settings gt Once all the above has been set pressing the DAW button will establish communication between Genesys to Pro Tools providing there is already a session open in Pro Tools 169 AMEE a fe IIE lll I GaAs COAL EQ DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System Operation The following presumes you are in DAW mode and the DAW button is lit and the Genesys is a 16 channel console The DAW led will light below the 8T faders to show valid communication has been established If Pro Tools has been configured incorrectly or there is no DAW communication the message Waiting for DAW Port x will be displayed on each panel when you press the DAW button where x is the number of MIDI Port assigned to that panel Due to the limitation of the 4 character display on the faders the Pro Tools track names will be truncated when displayed on Genesys The four DAW encoders found at the bottom of the Monitor Panel as Shown in the image to the left in red are used to control DAW parameters levels and buttons The console faders on Genesys control the DAW faders NB Where reference is made to the channel faders and channel fader SEL buttons these are only available on consoles which have the motorised channel faders inst
260. o controls on Strip 1 that require resetting the graphic will show the first channel strip where this is the case DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System 115 Keyboard Shortcuts Tab turns Hold mode on and off see below O Directly displays the Monitor Panel when Recall is active Auto mode Left Arrow will advance the on screen display by 1 channel If there are no controls to be reset on this channel it will advance to the next channel that does Right Arrow will decrease the on screen display by 1 channel If there are no controls to be reset on this channel it will have no effect Hold mode Left Arrow will advance the on screen display by 1 channel Right Arrow will decrease the on screen display by 1 channel The Channel Strip being displayed on screen will also be shown on the console surface with the relevant SOLO led for that Channel strip being lit Where a control on the surface matches that held in the Recall file there will be no purple mark around it and the control will appear lighter in colour The fader display will only be shown on consoles where it is not possible to set these levels automatically so on consoles with automation faders these levels will be set automatically The graphic on the right side of the screen is an enlarged version of the first control that requires resetting The four buttons above the large control di
261. o the number of externals that can be monitored at any one time To exit this mode press both of the lt and gt buttons again then press RTE SEL D EXT led gt The D EXT led will light on the second press of EXT 2 It is possible to have two sets of six wide Externals on EXT 2 The second set can be selected by pressing the EXT 2 button again gt ist press takes the 1st set of External feeds from the Analogue inputs EXT 2 will light gt 2nd press takes the 2nd set of External feeds from the Digital Inputs if these are present EXT 2 and the D EXT led will light The D EXT led will only light if an AD DA cassette has been detected If there is no cassette it will not be possible to select D EXT INT gt Lights yellow when selected and makes possible the selection of the internal monitors Auxes Cues etc to the control room loudspeakers 74 EXT gt Will light yellow when selected and makes possible the selection of the External monitors EXT 1 etc to the control room loudspeakers INT and EXT are interlocked If SUM is selected the interlock between INT and EXT is cancelled SUM gt Lights yellow when selected and affects the INT and EXT as described above so a collection of Internal and External sources can be heard at Once It will also enable all of the internal and external LS buttons including INT and EXT monitor selections to be turned on and off individually In this
262. od bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over gt Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time gt Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE WARNING THIS APPARATUS HAS CLASS I CONSTRUCTION AND SHALL BE CONNECTED TO A MAINS SOCKET OUTLET WITH A PROTECTIVE EARYTHING CONNECTION WARNING WHERE THE MAINS PLUG OR AN APPLIANCE COUPLER IS USED AS THE DISCONNECT DEVICE THE DISCONNECT DEVICE SHALL REMAIN READILY OPERABLE Symbols used in this manual and on rear of console IRA A A Please refer to the manual before operating Danger of electric shock Disconnect from the MAINS before opening cover Heat source No user serviceable parts inside Environmental considerations Cooling Temperature Operating 5C to 22 C 41 F to 72 F Non operating 20 C to 50 C 2 F to 122 F Max Gradient 15 C Hour 59 F Hour Relative Hu
263. ollowing the instructions in sub section Manual FireWire USB Serial Driver Installation Auto Install FireWire USB Serial Driver USB Serial Driver Installation Auto Install Installing USB Serial Driver Please Wait 20 a Manual Install YOU ONLY NEED TO DO THIS THE FIRST TIME YOU INSTALL THE FIREWIRE CARDS IN THE GENESYS CONSOLE From the Genesys Software main screen gt Go to Settings FireWire Setup and clicking USB Options NB Ensure you disconnect all USB serial cables from Genesys before doing this Always follow the on screen instructions gt Click Auto Install in the pop up window gt Another window will appear Follow the on screen instructions to Auto Install USB driver As the installation process begins a progress bar will appear left If an error message appears stating that installation has failed please repeat these steps again to Auto Install gt Once USB Driver installation is complete reconnect the FireWire USB serial cable ONLY Click OK Follow the on screen instructions until another progression bar appears showing the progress of the connection gt Once the connection has been established you can reconnect all other USB cables Manual FireWire USB Serial Driver Installation Before installing the FireWire driver please unplug all serial USB devices from the Genesys computer apart from mouse and keyboard All the drivers listed below are av
264. ootROM PXERPL Option PXE Current VIA MAC Address is Q03018 xxxxxx VIA MAC Address Input Press Enter Menu Level gt gt AC97 Sound Device Auto 1 Move Enter Select Item PU PD Value F10 Save ESC Exit Fi General Help F5 Previous Values F6 Optimized Defaults F7 Standard Defaults gt In this menu you need to find the USB section highlighted above and ensure that all USB options are ENABLED If all the USB options are ENABLED press the ESC Escape key twice to return to the main menu and continue to the next section USB Disk Selection on page 198 below otherwise follow the steps below gt If any of the USB options within this menu are DISABLED use the Arrow keys on the keyboard to scroll down to the DISABLED option and use the Page Up Page Down keys until the option says ENABLED 197 USB Disk Selection gt On the next reboot the system will then recognize and display the name of the USB disk recovery stick below this menu If you have completed this process but the option USB Storage Legacy Support remains disabled or was disabled when you first entered this menu press F10 on the keyboard then press the Y key and then press ENTER which will restart the process from the start gt You will now need to repeat the steps from the beginning of the recovery section again on page 195 If this process fails after several attempts please contact AMS Neve for technical support Award
265. or DIM button It will also dim the CUE mixer level so that Talkback can clearly be heard over the Cue Mix If RTB is on M2 SEL then the action of talking to CUE 1 or CUE 2 will temporarily suspend RTB whether it is selected locally or externally As stated it is possible to talk to the Cues externally in which case each Cue light will flash along with DIM to show remote control Selecting Auto TB in the settings screen will make CUE 1 and 2 latching until Play from the Transport controls is selected at which point CUE TB is cancelled Once Play is stopped CUE 1 and 2 will be reinstated allowing CUE TB to continue SLATE This level control and momentary push switch can be used to set the Slate level to Channel Output 8T 2T and Main Mix Outputs It has a range of to OCB It will also turn on the DIM button and the monitoring will be dimmed by an amount set by TB DIM SLATE can also be set to include tone from the oscillator to provide a tape oscillator slate this is done via the Settings screen by ticking Osc With Slate If this is the case when pressing the Slate knob it will also be sent to CH 8T and 2T MIX As stated it is possible to Slate the console Outputs by external operation in which case the SLATE light will flash along with DIM to show remote control If RTB is on M2 then Slating will also temporarily suspend the RTB Talkback TB This level control and momentary push switch can be used to set
266. or removed from the console Removing Modules Firstly ensure the computer has been shut down correctly and the power has been removed from the console Remove the console wide thin metal strip attached to the bottom of the meter strip that also keeps the channel modules securely in place The modules cannot be removed while this is in place Remove the two screws on the module you wish to remove one each at the top and bottom of the module gt Screw the two module extraction tools into the top and bottom of the module These are two black plastic rods about 10cms in length that have been supplied with your console part number 727 013 gt Apply even pressure to both extraction tools and pull the module gently from the console taking care not to catch it on the adjacent modules Inserting Modules Firstly ensure the computer has been shut down correctly and the power has been removed from the console gt Guide the bottom module edge between the two runners at the bottom of the module gt Slowly slide the module into the console taking care not to catch the edges on any of the adjacent modules When inserting modules into the console chassis care must be taken so that equal pressure is applied the whole length of the module rather than just applying pressure to each end of the module gt When the back of the module reaches the backplane apply a slow even pressure to the entire length of th
267. our studio company network Select Obtain an IP address automatically Select Obtain DNS server address automatically gt Finally click OK and close the Local Area Network Control Panel windows DAW Control over Ethernet Driver ipMIDI With the hardware configured and the IP addresses set then the only other remaining thing that needs to be done is to download the ipMIDI driver from www nerds de This is a 3 party driver that allows communication data to be sent between Genesys and DAW computer This driver only needs to be installed on your DAW computer not the Genesys computer There will be two available one for Windows and one for Mac OS X The Mac OS X driver is fully functional and free to download The Windows driver is a trial version and works for 60 minutes after its first use After every reboot it will work again for an additional 60 minutes You can purchase the fully functional version from the www nerds de website gt Download and install the one applicable to your DAW system 28 A y 16 49 q pMIDI taskbar icon After installation the driver ports needs to be setup correctly in order to have maximum use of all ports available with ipMIDI Below are instructions showing you how to do this for both OS X and Windows Vista 7 Windows Vista 7 DAW Computer Close all open applications and windows including all DAW programs From the Windows Start Menu select All Programs
268. p R input signal 142 FireWire From DAW 00 0 es ee es en CARR A HC Q0 00 00 QA A B A B A B A B A B 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 Monitoring 33 40 41 48 49 56 57 64 Master Slave Master Slave Master Slave Master Slave There are a pair of FireWire ports on each Master card and Monitor card labelled A and B The FireWire cable connects from your DAW into the first Master card then forms a simple daisy chain through the Monitoring and all the other Master cards in the system The FireWire chain can be started at any point in the console it does not necessarily have to start with the first AD DA card as shown above Before cabling the FireWire please ensure the the Genesys and the DAW are switched off 143 FireWire DAW Driver Before you run the Configuration software on Genesys and use the FireWire system you will need to install a driver on your DAW This can be found on the supplied CD There are two drivers available one for a PC and one for Mac These drivers are also available from the AMS Neve website at www ams neve com Goto the Genesys products page and select the appropriate driver for your DAW computer Installing the DAW FireWire driver on a PC Drag the Neve FireWire Installer file from the CD onto the Windows Desktop of the DAW computer or download the driver from the AMS Neve website to the DAW computer desktop and ensure that there are no other programmes running before begi
269. parately and at a different time from the console and customers therefore need to install these cards themselves If this is the case please start on page 127 and work through the section in the order it is written For consoles where the cards were delivered at the same time and were already fitted into the console chassis please start from the section on Cabling on page 140 For full operational instructions only please turn to page 148 Installation Summary Set the dip switches on the card s page 127 Install FireWire driver on Genesys page 134 Set the Wordclock jumpers on the card s page 136 Install cards into console frame page 138 Fit all card cabling page 140 Install FireWire driver on your DAW page 144 Set board mapping page 147 Connect audio cables to cards D Subs and or FireWire Set Configuration screen to match audio cabling page 148 oO o ae Parts list Cables accessories included length e 3 x Channel Audio CATS5 Link cables per set of Master Slave cards 50cm each e 1x RS485 converting cable per system 90cm e 1 x FireWire cable per system 90cm e 1x CATS cable per system 1m e 1x custom spanner per system for BNC and 25 way D Sub fittings e 1x CD containing manuals necessary drivers etc e 1 x FireWire 400 to FireWire 800 converting cable newer computers only have a FireWire 800 port Operating Level The AD DA cards are set to give OdBFS when the analogue signal is
270. paths in each channel strip with an trim control for each path 15dB Historically the Monitor path was used to send and return to an analogue tape machine but these days this is more likely to be a Digital Audio Workstation such a Pro Tools Nuendo Cubase etc This means there are two main sources of sound in the studio one is from the musicians you are recording the other from the tracks already recorded on your multitrack tape or DAW these have a Send To and a Return From path either one of which can be listened to e When Recording with Genesys the Channel path is used for sending Microphones or line sources to the DAW Tape Machine and the monitor path is used for listening to the output of the DAW Tape Machine Having these two paths in each Input module allows you to have fader control of the recording and to use the monitor path fader to start a rough mix at the same time e When Mixing with Genesys the Channel path becomes your first series of returns from the DAW to the console and the Monitor path via I P2 allows more inputs to be brought back into the mix For example a 16 fader Genesys when mixing allows 32 inputs to the mix buss for mixing 16 inputs on the channel path and 16 inputs on the monitor path You will need to be able to listen to all the individual channels and tracks that form the input and the monitor signals on your control room loudspeakers On the Monitor Panel when in Routing mode
271. perties When not using a hub studio network and connecting the Genesys computer directly to the DAW computer using a cross over cable SIJE Select Use the following 1P address and set your DAW computer to these settings e IP Address 192 168 99 183 e Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 e Make sure the Default gateway DNS settings are blank If a direct connection is not made i e you are connecting via a router or hub through your studio company network gt Select Obtain an IP address automatically gt Select Obtain DNS server address automatically gt Finally click OK and close the Local Area Network Control Panel windows Windows Vista DAW Computer gt On your Windows Vista DAW computer from the Start Menu select Control Panel Category View Network and Internet Network Sharing Centre Manage network connections Local area Connection Properties Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 from the list make sure the tick box remains selected and click Properties When not using a hub studio network and connecting the Genesys computer directly to the DAW computer using a cross over cable gt Select Use the following IP address and set your DAW computer to these settings e IP Address 192 168 99 183 e Subnet Mask 295 4 299 299 0 Make sure the Default gateway DNS settings are blank If a direct connection is not made e you are connecting via a router or hub through y
272. r A B M1 or M2 For each of the six speakers you now have 10dB of Trim to apply in 0 1dB steps Use the up down arrows to scroll the value for each speaker Channel to 8T If ticked the Channel Solos are linked to the 8T Solos so that pressing any Channel SOLO will also cut the 8Ts and all the 8T CUT leds will light If unticked the 8Ts are safe from the Solo system Monitor to 8T If ticked the Monitor Solos are linked to the 8T Solos so that pressing any Monitor SOLO will also cut the 8Ts and all the 8T CUT leds will light If unticked the 8Ts are safe from the Solo system 8T If ticked means the 8T busses are safe so the 8T Mix is not affected whenever an 8T SOLO is pressed If unticked the Solo is destructive and all of the other 8T busses are put into Cut and all of their CUT leds will light Other Options AUTO TB with Play Delay Sets CUE 1 and 2 Talkback see page 83 to latching until Play is selected from the Transport controls at which point CUE TB is cancelled immediately The Play command is transmitted after the delay in seconds has elapsed Once Play is stopped CUE 1 and 2 will be reinstated allowing CUE TB to continue with constant hands free communication to the TB destinations TB Latch Interlocked with Auto TB If ticked will turn CUE 1 and CUE 2 from momentary to latching even if Play is being cycled on the DAW Remote operation of the CUES will also be changed from
273. r the Master Mix fader The push switch is a 4 state toggle e Defaults to CRM where the headphone feed follows whichever source is selected to the Left and Right Control Room Monitors EXT where whichever External is selected on the Control Room Monitor panel is sent to the headphones If a Surround External is selected then just the Left and Right will be sent e CUE 1 Output L amp R e CUE 2 Output L amp R 57 8T AUXES Section ISO LOOO Isolates the 8T from the Solo system so that when any other 8T SOLO or CH or MON solo as link selected in the Settings screen is detected on the console that 8T path is not cut SEL As there is only a single SEL button for a pair of 8T paths e A fast single press of SEL will enable the odd numbered 8T routing e A fast double press of SEL will enable the even numbered 8T routing e SEL and the adjacent PRE button pressed together will enable the Rev Return routing INS gt Switches the 8T Insert On Off PRE gt Sets whether the 8T Insert is Pre or Post the 8T fader It also works in conjunction with SEL to set the Reverb routing see above The led will be lit when set to PRE and unlit when set to POST 58 Master SEL mode on the 8T AUXES Section To Set Which Auxes Are Fed by the 8Ts Aux 1 Aux 2 gt Press and hold down LOCK on the Main Monitor Panel then press RTE SEL to enter Master SEL mode All of the console SEL leds will
274. re in London With GENESYS the widest possible range of studios can now legitimately claim to be a Neve facility The future begins here AMS Neve Ltd Billington Road Burnley Lancashire England BB11 5UB Phone 44 0 1282 417 011 Fax 44 0 1282 417 282 London Office 44 0 2074 323 858 Email info ams neve com Web www ams neve com Please check the AMS Neve website periodically for the latest issue of this manual 2008 2013 AMS Neve Ltd own the copyright of all information and figures contained in this manual which are not to be copied or reproduced by any means or disclosed in part or whole to any third party without written permission As part of our policy of continual product improvement we reserve the right to alter specifications without notice but with due regard to all current legislation Disclaimer The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate at the time of publication However no responsibility is taken by AMS Neve Ltd for inaccuracies errors or omissions nor any liability assumed for any loss or damage resulting either directly or indirectly from use of the information contained within Trademarks All trademarks are the property of their respective owners and are hereby acknowledged Table of Contents IMPORTANT SAFTY INSTRUCTIONG 00sssceeesenees 2 Symbols used in this manual and on rear of CONS aint leida 4 Environmental COnSiderat
275. reWire Sends the DMON signal from DAW through FireWire to the AES TX transmitters This means the AD DA card to be used as a FireWire to AES converter without those signals contributing to the audio busses in the console gt Once set click Apply to reconfigure the FireWire buss with your selection l GEE AUX 1 6 BM main mix amp 2TL R al AES Receiver Select the Monitor radio button at the top of the screen to show the Monitor card input and output options To DAW via FireWire gt Select whether you want the 8Ts Auxes AES DEXT or MIX 2T audio to be sent digitally from the console to your DAW via the FireWire cable These options are not interlocked and all can be selected dependent on the total FireWire bandwidth not being exceeded All of the Auxes both mono and stereo are selected with a single tick e All of the 8Ts 1 8 are selected with a single tick e The MAIN MIX and 2T MIX are selected with a single tick e The digital 5 1 Externals that come into the console via the AES receivers can also be sent to the FireWire gt Once set click Apply to reconfigure the FireWire buss with your selection Into Monitor section D EXT Input Select where you want the 5 1 surround digital input to be taken from and fed into the monitoring system either from the D EXT 5 1 from DAW via FireWire or from the AES D EXT Receiver 5 1 gt Once set click Apply to reconfigure the FireWire buss with
276. ressed this control acts as Pan e When the MONO button is not pressed this control acts as a 6dB Balance Control MONO Turns the stereo signal into mono where each of the Reverb L and R are sent to the Mix Outputs L and R equally ON Switches the Reverb Return On Off The On Off can be automated via the Encore Automation System It can also be switched off by CH MON or 8T solo systems in Destruct Mode if selected ISO Isolates the Rev Return from the Solo System so that when any other Solo is detected on the console the Reverb Return is not Cut Press to enable AFL Switches the AFL for the Reverb Return into the Main monitoring 55 Master SEL mode on the REV RETURN Section To Set How the Rev Returns Feed The Cues The Rev Return can be sent to either Cue or both of them Press and hold down LOCK on the Main Monitor Panel then press RTE SEL to enter Master SEL mode All of the console SEL leds will flash Most of the 8T strip controls will have their functionality blocked out apart from those indicated in white left The 1 2 led is tri state in colour and uses these colours to indicate which Cue s the Rev Return is routed to e Cue 1 Red e Cue 2 Green e Both cues Yellow For each press of the TO CUE level control you will cycle round the following feeds the PRE led will light when you are sending these Cues Pre Pan Bal or Width control otherwise they are fed Post controls e
277. rnal 2 Input Centre 21 9 22 4 External 2 Input Sub 7 20 8 5 External 2 Input Left Surround 18 6 19 6 External 2 Input Right Surround 4 17 5 7 External 4 Input Left 15 3 16 8 External 4 Input Right 1 14 2 210 rT P So MONITOR EXTERNALS LS 0 PE MONTOR NSERTS CONSGLE DUTPUTS AT INSERTION Loudspeaker Outputs A amp M1 25 way D type Signal Name dit Hi Lo Screen 1 Loudspeaker A Left Output 24 12 25 2 Loudspeaker A Right Output 10 23 11 3 Loudspeaker A Centre Output 21 9 22 4 Loudspeaker A Sub Output 7 20 8 5 Loudspeaker A Left Surround Output 18 6 19 6 Loudspeaker A Right Surround Output 4 17 5 7 Loudspeaker M1 Left Output 15 3 16 8 Loudspeaker M1 Right Output 1 14 2 Loudspeaker Outputs B amp M2 25 way D type Signal Name de Hi Lo Screen 1 Loudspeaker B Left Output 24 12 25 2 Loudspeaker B Right Output 10 23 11 3 Loudspeaker B Centre Output 21 9 22 4 Loudspeaker B Sub Output 7 20 8 5 Loudspeaker B Left Surround Output 18 6 19 6 Loudspeaker B Right Surround Output 4 17 5 7 Loudspeaker M2 Left Output 15 3 16 8 Loudspeaker M2 Right Output 1 14 2 211 t a aK lows MONMOR NMSERTS hs MONITOR EXTERAALE LS 0 PE So e Jo a COASOLE OUTPUTS AT INSERTION RETURN Monitor Insert Send 25 way D type Signal Name
278. rround mix in the console loudspeakers using 8T Loudspeaker Matrix and 8T Monitor SelectiOD cccocccocccnnco so 40 Setting up Routing for Mixing on Earlier Consoles With Stereo PAN Sie ss 40 Mixing with Stereo Pans in Surround 06 41 To set up Surround LS Monitoring both in Stereo Pan Surround and LCR Pan Surround 42 MONITO FNG 44 Channel Strip CHANNEL Secta ciiriaisnacinda ca 46 a E a aY A E E EA EE E E E E EE EEIE PE 46 a AO AE PORE E EEEE O E AEA E tateene 46 PAD tala a A dora oia 46 O A 46 SOR Z Tienes e E EET A nes 47 INPUT TBR Mess siete EEEN 47 POS a 47 AER iio 47 AR A O a dl 47 PROCESSING Section EQ DYN INS cceeesssees 48 ORD Interrogatorio 48 Master SEL mode on the PROCESSING section 48 To Enter and Exit Master SEL Mode on the Channel A hens 48 To Allocate Processing Elements Across Channel and Monitor PEIN Sula oia 48 To Set the Order of Processing on the Channel and MONTO ROTA Sata o 48 Channel and Monitor Path Drag and Drop Order Processing ORD Button ssssss2222 49 AUXES Seca 50 Master AUX Leyenda 50 sO TDU OM Sarai 50 Master SEL mode on the AUXES SectiOD ooccooo oo 50 To Set How the Channel and Monitor Paths Feed the PRIX SS it DA E E bi tin 50 Setting the AUX pre PoOSt cccesseeeeeeeeeeseneeseueees 50 DIRECT OUTPUT SectiOn ccccnccccnnncccnnecenueennennenn 51 Master Leve a li oil 51 MONITOR Se CtiOn ccccccc
279. s including all routing pre post states etc and it is this snapshot that will be loaded when the console is first powered up See the Settings Services sub section of the manual for details on setting up the As Was snapshot frequency Last Store Made Loads the last store that was created NB this is the last store Saved not the last one Loaded Custom Store The user can set up a default store and have this loaded every time the console powers up as a custom starting template These four options are interlocked Osc With Slate Sends osc tone with the Talkback when Slate is selected Osc to 2T Without this option ticked enabling the Tone and pressing the 2T MIX button will only send tone to MIX With this option ticked Tone will be sent to both the MIX and 2T busses Set by Store This allows the settings for LS Settings 8T Solo Linking Osc and Tie Ch SEL to be reset if a store is loaded with different data from Power Up or if new stores are loaded If this option is unticked then these settings will remain unchanged on Reset Allows you to calibrate all of the audio paths on the console with up to 1 5dB of trim Click any of the top row of buttons to select the path type these buttons are interlocked 106 NB 1 When setting levels using the Calibrate screen the Channels 8Ts Main Mix fader and the Reverb encoders should be set to the 0dB position The monitor pots should be
280. s l l LS OP M1 XLR y with 2T yy 000 000 To 8T and Al Meters E i l L LS OP M2 yel Monitor S i r Cue an ixes l Di l 2 T R Insertion 0 Esp wh i 41008 Trim Q y fe fe le A RLS OPA DC gt O From 8T Monitor NY 4 D gt RLS OPB el E lt al software Z Q l e i i LS O et u SER a j Setup fy i i RLS OPM INTZEXT l H l o i gt RLS OP M1 XLR l Ye 6 RS To 8T Meters i ah gt __ RLS OP M2 Monitor l n E ale il a Pi Sub LS 10dB Tri h h 8T 1 8 To l ST Reduction 000 El ON Em 8T 1 8 gt gt gt gt gt 4 SN LERSLSRS D Ta Do 8 Trims 3 to 12dB al i p 1 i CLSOPA l Se DC l l y i La ANE CLSOPB E 1 O ios Y oO l I l To 8T Meters i lt gt SoftWare d Setup 0 y F l l l I
281. s sent to the console when it powers up and e every time you shut the computer down you will be asked if you wish to update this snapshot e Click Yes or No as desired Console Debug Window This is for use by AMS Neve only FireWire Setup For setup and operation of the AD DA system please refer to the FireWire section on page 123 of the user manual 108 FILING ze DYN 4081Mic ORD 2Track DAW Settings Filing RTE Encore Recall System Provides facility to Save and Load Automation and Snapshot Recall files either to from the local hard drive or local USB port e The upper half of the screen is the Destination drive and can be set to different locations e The lower half of the screen is always the Genesys drive and allows you to name select files This is the Source drive where all Genesys Automation and Recall files are saved to by default If you are logged on to Automation and you create a Recall file it will use the same Client Project Title Mix filing hierarchy so that Recall Store files are always kept with the Automation files in the same folder This is for ease of use especially when backing up files For more information on the Filing Structure please see the chapter on the Automation System NB Filing can also be selected from the Monitor Panel by pressing either Load or Save Load gt To Load an automation file under the Client heading double click a Client and a list of Proje
282. s to Auxes will be affected by the CUT SOLO A Channel SOLO will override any CUT that is already in place Alpha Display Only available on Automation faders The four character alpha display above each fader is used to display The automation modes e DAW track information e User path names SEL GLIDE Only available on Automation faders SEL Allows you to select the automation modes locally GLIDE Used for manually locally gliding back faders to the previous play pass SOLO CUT SOLO CUT SOLO CUT SOLO CUT SOLO CUT SOLO CUT SOLO CUT SOLO CUT O AF Ae AP AP oP AM ol d 8T1 8T2 813 814 8T5 8TG 8T7 8T8 MIX L o CUT DODODODOODODDoOnDO g O O E C O The 8T faders Master faders can either control the TO 8T fader levels or a block of 8 DAW faders the red ail led underneath the faders will light when DAW control has been established Ss A al O Sl oy SY 2 aan lox Q E Cee eee o O The main output fader always controls the Main Mix Output vas S a a OAS ee ee SLL O of NJ 88 8T Faders MAIN MIX Fader The 8T faders can either control the 8T levels or a block of 8 DAW tracks the red DAW led underneath the faders will l
283. s will install Genesys Applications v3 3 on your computer It is recommended that you close all other applications before continuin g IMPORTANT Please use the default settings options provided by this installer and continue wil changing anything The default settings are recommended For all users Only make changes if you know what you are doing and they t AMS Neve if you have any questions S Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit Setup Car AN Setup Genesys Applications o mesa Select Components MN Which components should be installed Select the components you want to install clear the components you do not want to install Click Next when you are ready to continue v Genesys Applications Hex files are always Installed 25 8 MB XP CE Support 400 board only 0 8 MB Current selection requires at least 33 2 MB of disk space lt Back Cancel N Ea 17MB gt A pop up will appear on screen left to inform you that the system is checking for updates If the latest version of the software is already installed a window will appear informing you of this left gt Click OK You do not need to do anything further You may check again for updates at a later time If an update is found a window will appear showing the current version installed e V3 3 Build 7 and also the version which is available to download IMPORTANT Ensure you read through the Release Notes
284. set to the 2 o clock position The 2T LS and AFL amp PFL will be only be set in software as they do not have a physical fader position 2 Use the Calibrate screen in conjunction with the factory level setting procedure this is available on request Channel FNC Control Console Utilities Console Utilities e CH selects the channel paths within each channel to be trimmed e Click the top button again so the lower row of buttons display 9 16 17 24 etc MON selects the monitor paths within each channel to be trimmed e Click the top button again so the lower row of buttons display 9 16 17 24 etc e ST selects the 8T paths within each 8T module to be trimmed e MIX selects the Left and Right mix outputs to be trimmed e 2T selects the Left and Right 2T outputs to be trimmed e A P Selects the AFL and PFL outputs to monitor to be trimmed e LS selects the Loudspeaker outputs to be trimmed REV selects the Reverb return paths to the Main Mix within each 8T module to be trimmed gt Once the path type has been selected click the 1 8 boxes underneath aS appropriate and the selected box will be shaded blue these buttons are interlocked There is now 1 5dB of calibration available for each path in 0 05dB steps Use the arrows to set a value for each path gt If you wish to reset any trim value to zero right click on the appropriate blue box When ticked to
285. sole SEL leds Most of the Monitor Panels buttons will have their functionality blocked out apart from those indicated in white left gt Press ST the RTE SEL and ST buttons will flash Turn the Monitor Knob The display will show SUB gt Press the Monitor Knob and a Y or a X will be displayed in the last position of the alpha display indicating that Sub is or is not fed to the Stereo Mix gt Subsequent turns of the knob will display A B M1 and M2 For each of these displays pushing the knob will display either a Y or a X to indicate that the stereo downmix is tied not tied to that speaker set For those speaker sets you have tied to the stereo downmix pressing those speaker set buttons will automatically swap the monitoring to the Stereo DownMix gt Press RTE SEL to exit Master SEL Mode 80 To Lock Relative Levels Within a Loudspeaker Set It is possible to apply 10dB of trim to each loudspeaker feed within each speaker set gt Press and hold down LOCK on the Main Monitor Panel then press RTE SEL to enter Master SEL mode The RTE SEL button will flash along with all of the console SEL leds Most of the Monitor Panels buttons will have their functionality blocked out Select the loudspeaker set either A B M1 or M2 the button will flash gt Using the loudspeaker CUT buttons select the element you wish to alter either L C R LS S or RS the button will flash when pressed
286. splay allow you to set which sections of the desk to be reset and verified Select as appropriate For example if you only have Ch selected then no controls for the 8T or Monitor sections will be displayed on screen or included in the verify procedure gt Each time you click Ch 8T Rev or Mon the Recall software to start to scan those sections of the console and display any differences so they can be reset By default this will be set to All until another selection is made Turn each control on the desk until it matches the purple mark Once a control has been set the next control down on that particular channel strip will be displayed on the right hand side gt Continue to match all the controls as they are displayed Please note that you do not have to set the controls on a channel strip in the order that they are displayed If you select another control other than is currently displayed on the right side of the screen the display will change to show whichever control you are resetting Once a particular section on the desk has been set that section on the left side of the screen will clear until all controls for all three sections on a channel strip have been set The screen will then swap to showing all the controls for Channel Strip 2 that require resetting and the SOLO led for Channel 2 will light on the surface and so on until all the Channel Strips and 8T Strips have been reset gt Continue to m
287. sses For example if you have the Compressor set to take it s sidechain from the External Key Input then the Gate and Exp will also automatically be set to the External Key Input If you change this selection on one process it will impact that same selection on other available processes on the same Channel or Monitor path Gate Expander The Dynamics screen is only available if you have at least one of the optional Dynamics cassettes fitted The Gate Expander controls are accessed by pressing the DYN button and then pressing the 1 encoder to swap the processing screen over to the Gate Expander view e If the EXP button to the left of the Channel number press 4 encoder is pressed it is operating as an Expander e If the EXP button is not pressed as shown left press 4 encoder it is acting as a Gate Both processes operate identically on screen using the same parameters The rotary controls on screen map directly to the first three encoders on the Monitor Panel gt The 1 encoder sets the Range of the Gate or Exp and runs from Odb to 50dB The 2 encoder sets the Threshold at which the Gate or Exp should operate and runs from 30dB to 10dB gt Pressing the 2 encoder selects where the Sidechain Input is sourced from either sourced from the Channel itself the EQ output on that Channel or from the Key Input via the 25 way D type connector on the Dynamics cassette e Both leds OFF m
288. ssing but can be Post Insert if the Inserts are set Pre Dynamics Only functions if at least one Dynamics processing cassette is fitted in the console When the DYN button is selected it will bring up the last Dynamics display used on screen gt Using the lt 8 gt buttons on the Monitor panel select the channel you want to control The selected path will be displayed on the right of the screen gt You can select to control DYN a different way by quickly double pressing a channel SEL button which will bring up the dynamics screen for that channel Once the DYN screen opens the channel SEL button led will light solid on that channel to show that those Dynamics are being controlled by the encoders If the Dynamics are linked to any other Dynamics then the SEL buttons on those linked channels will flash to show they are part of that link The encoders above the small TFT screen are used to control e Ratio Threshold amp Release when controlling the Compressor e Range Threshold amp Release when controlling the Gate Pressing the first encoder will toggle the control screen between Compressor and Gate Expander functions gt Turning on the x5 button will speed up the turns of the encoders When linking Dynamics across paths it is all of the dynamics functions that are linked ie Gate Compressor amp Expander Compressor The three controls shown on screen are operated by the first three enco
289. stead be 9 10 11 12 13 14 amp 15 16 etc These options are only selectable as pairs The SRC Enable options are not interlocked and all are selectable They are all enabled by default If desired untick as appropriate to disable the sample rate converters for each pair of paths To DAW via FireWire This covers the channels output from the Genesys to the DAW via FireWire There are three options available e Channels Direct Output outputs the eight channel Channel Direct Outputs to the FireWire e AES Receivers DLINE Outputs the AES DLINE Receivers to the FireWire e AES Receivers DMON Outputs the AES DMON Receivers to the FireWire At sample rates of 96kHz or lower LO and MID bitrates two of these three options are available at one time At sample rates above 96kHz HI bitrate only one of these options is available at one time If no FireWire cable has been detected all of these options will be unavailable gt Once set click Apply to reconfigure the FireWire buss with your selection 150 MIC LN pel L CH SEL aed STATUS C lu ol E DAW DAW I P SND RTN 2 DWON W L ION SE Channels DLINE Input This covers which audio is sent into the 8 Channels digital line DLN inputs There are two options available only one of which can be selected at a time e DLINE from DAW via FireWire Takes the audio from your
290. sys console with the channel faders Ch V Pots 1 16 assigned to the DAW control Ch V Pots 1 8 control send levels for sends 1 8 respectively on the selected track Ch V Pots 9 16 control send activate on off for sends 1 8 respectively on the selected track gt Press F4 to change to the second group of send parameters The Ch V Pots are now controlling Ch V Pots 1 8 control pre post fader mode for sends 1 8 respectively on the selected track Ch V Pots 9 16 control destination of the send signal for sends 1 8 respectively on the selected track gt Press F3 to return to the first group of send parameters The DAW control assigns the send parameters to the surface in the following manner for a 32 channel Genesys console with the channel faders Ch V Pots 1 32 assigned to the DAW control Ch V Pots 1 8 control send levels for sends 1 8 respectively on the selected track Ch V Pots 9 16 control send activate on off for sends 1 8 respectively on the selected track Ch V Pots 17 24 control pre post fader mode for sends 1 8 respectively on the selected track Ch V Pots 25 32 contro destination of the send signal for sends 1 8 respectively on the selected track gt F3 and F4 are not used in 32 channel or above DAW assigned console set ups because the DAW control can assign all the send parameters onto the surface in one go gt Rotate the Ch V Pot to set or change the send parameters Pressing any of the Ch V Pots
291. t 15 Abbreviations amp Acronyms 8T AFL CAL CH CHM CRM DAW D EXT DLN DYN DMON EXT FNC GR HI Z HUI I L IMR INS INT ISO LN LS LS RS Mi M2 MON MST MTR ORD PFL PLI 8 Track After Fader Listen Calibrate Channel Channel Mic Control Room Monitor Digital Audio Workstation Digital External s Digital Line s Dynamics Digital Monitor External s Function Gain Reduction High Impedance Human User Interface Interlock Insert Mix Return Insert Internal Isolate Line Loudspeaker Left Surround Right Surround Stereo Monitor Loudspeakers 1 amp 2 Monitor Master Multi track Recorder Order Pre Fade Listen Plug Ins PSU RET REV RTB SEL SIF SIG SND SWP TB UTIL SRC RX TX wos Power Supply Unit Return Reverb Return Talkback Sub Select Solo In Front Signal Send Swap Talkback Utility Sample Rate Converter Receive Transmit The Computer Cassette SS Gm PALF Co Gy Ie ees O li a e ON E O1C III INO 0 ol ES AES TX BT AES TX AUX 2T L R MIX L R L R chee a ae MONITOR AES RX DEXT AES SYNC IN QUT 2T 1 P SERIAL AREWRE E 22 WORDCLOCK IMPORTANT Before powering up the console please connect an external monitor screen to the VGA 2 connector The console software cannot be used without a screen connected Ethernet Standard Ethernet port used for internet connection to download new software releases an
292. t both systems are properly configured as outlined on page 25 This involves Setting the IP addresses on Genesys and the DAW computer e Connecting the network ethernet cabling e Installing the ipMIDI driver Genesys Setup Go to Settings Services and make sure Pro Tools is selected at the top of the screen as the DAW Type gt For 1 select the MIDI Port then the console 8 block of faders on which you wish these DAW tracks to appear NB The 8T faders are referred to in the pull down list of options as Master gt Repeat for all the other available MIDI Ports and fader blocks on the console NB This mapping must match that set in Pro Tools The same MIDI Port cannot be used more than once including the one set for Midi Timecode The 8 block of faders can only be linked to a single MIDI Port and not repeated gt Once set click OK Follow the on screen instructions to re launch the software to apply the new changes Pro Tools Setup After opening a session in Pro Tools go to Setup Peripherals MIDI Controllers Using Port 1 configure as follows e Type HUI e Receive From ipMIDI Port x e Send To pMIDI port x e Ch s 8 Set pMIDI port x same as Genesys Setup MIDI Port 1 above gt Ports 1 2 3 and 4 should be set in the same way making sure that the Receive From and Send To ipMIDI ports are both set to the Same MIDI Ports which were set in the Genesys Setup section above Pr
293. t of where they are currently assigned then releasing the mouse button will assign the element to where you want it to go At the bottom is the EQ In SideChain indicator section This is an indication only to show whether the EQ is in the Dynamics sidechain gt Once the EQ is in the sidechain it cannot be dragged or dropped You can still click the BYPASS button to bypass the EQ whilst in the sidechain You cannot drag and drop elements into this section such as DYN or INS1 INS2 Below the DAW button on the Monitor Panel there are two buttons one with an arrow pointing left and the other with an arrow pointing right Pressing these will allow you to change the channel you are currently on gt Double clicking on the EQ or DYN element in the ORD screen will open the EQ or Dynamics screen on that channel for fast interrogation and control of the selected element 49 AUXES Section Master Aux Level Sets the output contribution of the Aux It has a range of to OCB Press to enable and the adjacent led will light gt 8T buttons Sets the destination and level control for sending the Auxes to the last two 8T busses Different destinations apply depending on whether the Aux is mono or stereo e Aux 1 and Aux 3 will be sent to 8T 7 e Aux 2 and Aux 4 will be sent to 8T 8 gt Press the gt 8T button next to the Aux to send it to it s associated 8T buss the led will light Aux 5 and Aux 6 wil
294. tch settings have been set correctly for this card s position See Appendix A for the Switch Settings on page 226 e Remove the ventilation facing plate on the rear of the console and remove the Key Input blanking plate in the centre Slide the Dynamics cassette into the middle slot and push the card firmly to the rear until the connectors mate securely onto the backplane e Screw the faceplate back into place ensuring the Key Input D type connector and two adjacent pillars comfortably clear the faceplate surface e Secure the Key Input D type connector in place through the faceplate using the pillars and two screws Operational Considerations If you have an EQ processing cassette installed it will only be possible to place the EQ on the Channel path or the Monitor path on a channel not across both Likewise the Compressor and Gate can only exist on the Channel or Monitor path It is not possible to have the Compressor on the Input and the Gate on the Monitor path or vice versa 20 Channels Digital Converter System Part number SMN 812 409 Master and Slave L O f 1 ON A na Y f O O d ws KEY I P 1 8 l It Ld ofp CHANNEL AES RX DLINE MASTER AES TX DAW SEND AES
295. that opens once you go into DAW mode all depends on the type of DAW selected How the DAW software and console buttons behave all depends on the DAW as selected in the Setup screen on page VE i NT Y 4 Pay gt J om f Le 5 JL Ls Jf Once in DAW mode the lower row of DAW buttons become active Lo b bes fo Le mms lt gt NB Pa I DAM CONSOLE CONTROL It is still possible to select EQ DYN or 2T when DAW is selected When this happens the console and screen will be swapped over to control the selected function but the DAW light will still be lit and faders and mutes etc will still be controlled As the alpha display can only show 4 characters it will show truncated versions of the DAW names Providing the DAW control has been set up correctly in Console Utilities Services as shown on page 107 then the DAW fader levels will be initially shown on the faders 87 Faders Keypad Channel Faders Automated Manual Fader Fader FL OC d 503 cur i T 5 I 10 E 20 JE a0 4c 40 on Master Faders Each fader has a range of to 10dB with it s own CUT and SOLO button There are two types of faders motorised and manual The motorised faders are used by DAW Control and Encore Automation Depending on your console you will have either the manual or motorised faders fitted below all the channel strips CUT Cuts the paths audio In Mix Mode Pre fade contribution
296. the Genesys metering can be switched over to showing the metering for the DAW tracks as they are laid out on the console surface including any that may be assigned to the 8T Master section To enable DAW metering tick the DAW Meters box in the Genesys software This will be confirmed by the DAW indicator on the Master Meter being lit to show DAW Metering Any fader sections not set up to control DAW tracks will continue to display it s current analog meter level and selection This is a 14 step DAW metering indication and it is mainly used to show the max peak level indication from the DAW rather than accurate the metering exactly as in the DAW This will over ride any other metering selection already made on the desk Refresh s Genesys software This affects how often the Genesys software will be refreshed and updated with new data information coming in from the DAW and can be set between 0 2 to 10 seconds This rate is stored and reset to the previous value when the console is reset or rebooted If there is particularly dense fader automation coming from the DAW to Genesys it may be necessary to set this a higher value Name Value Genesys software The Name Value button switches the DAW track information text shown in yellow on the Genesys screen between parameter values and parameter names This can be used to quickly interrogate which parameters are being changed Bars Beats TC Genesys software The Bars Beats T
297. the monitoring system The AD DA system hardware can be synced to either AES Sync Embedded AES Sync Wordclock or set to sync to own internal clock Sample rates supported are 44 1 48 88 2 96 176 4 192kHz Sample rate converters can be enabled on all AES Receiver inputs with a word length of 24 bits A single FireWire cable connects the Genesys to your DAW The AES Receivers amp Transmitters D type digital audio connections adhere to the Tascam AES wiring convention so can be purchased off the shelf A real time FireWire fuel gauge tells how much of the FireWire bandwidth still remains as you assign paths to the FireWire busses All cards can be user installed and require no commissioning In Recording mode the cards convert the console Outputs into digital and sends them to the DAW via FireWire In Mix mode the cards convert the digital mix signals into analogue and outputs them via DLINE and DMON A mixture of both can also be set Max Number of FireWire Channels as determined by Sample Rate Sample Rate kHz Maximum number of channels Bit rate 44 1 48 96 LO bit rate 88 2 96 48 MID bit rate 176 4 192 24 HI bit rate Using the FW643 OHCI chipset on the target DAW Three FireWire audio configurations can be saved one for each for the Lo Mid and Hi Sample rate settings e125 2 This section tells you how to install and configure the AD DA cards where the cards were purchased se
298. the positions of the first block of faders Ch V Pots For example on a 16 channel Genesys console with the faders 1 8 and 9 16 mapped to the DAW control to change the Pans Surround parameters for DAW track 16 press the fader SEL button assigned to that track Genesys faders Ch V Pots 1 8 will now be controlling the Pans Surround parameters for DAW track 16 Genesys faders Ch V Pots 9 16 will mimic what is being set applied to Genesys faders Ch V Pots 1 8 This ts different to Channel View mode in AUX mode where the parameters are laid out across the console surface Here only the first block of 8 faders are assigned to controlling the parameters FLIP mode and Ch V Pot push button functionality in Channel View mode is exactly the same as detailed in the Mixer View mode above LI gt Press the PLI button and it will light up PLI works in two modes Mixer View and Channel View PLI is used to control Logic Pro Plug ins Inserts gt Make sure the F5 button is not on i e FLIP is off If FLIP is on press F5 to turn it off gt PLI mode first starts up in Mixer View Confirm this by looking at the top most line on the Genesys software Plug ins Inserts Mixer View Mixer View allows view and edit the plug ins associated with a particular Insert slot for all DAW tracks laid out across the Genesys console surface We always use Mixer view to select a plug in and Channel View to edit it The Genesys software at the top wil
299. tis itt eee RS485 Cable It is possible to daisy chain multiple units together so they are controlled via USB on a Mac or PC gt The first unit on the chain should be connected to the Mac or PC by a USB cable not supplied gt The blue USB RS485 button on the rear of this first unit should be pushed in to select USB gt Subsequent units are connected from the RS 485 OUT of the 1st unit to the IN on the 2nd from the OUT of the 2nd to the IN of the 3rd and so on these subsequent units should all have the blue USB RS485 button on the rear pushed out to select RS485 control gt The RS 485 communication protocol uses RJ9 connectors for connecting cables where multiple units can be chained together going from OUT to IN as described above cabling not supplied NB This cable should be wired pin to pin Please note that when connecting multiple units each 4081 should have a unique ID as shown left The procedure for setting these IDs is described in 4081 unit ID dip switches section Cable Specification The RS 422 specification recommends 24AWG twisted pair cable with a Shunt capacitance of 16 pF per foot and 100 ohm characteristic impedance These recommendations should be used for RS485 systems as well We also recommend using shielded cable There are many cables available meeting the recommendations of RS 485 made specifically for this application Another choice is the same cable commonly use
300. to control Inserts Plug ins gt Make sure the F5 button is not on i e FLIP is off If FLIP is on press F5 to turn it off The Genesys software at the top will indicate the function or mode you are in Plug ins Inserts Channel View Mode DAW control allows you to control up to 8 plug ins per track gt Press the fader SEL button for DAW track 1 or the first assigned DAW track You have now selected DAW track 1 You will see in the top right corner the display indicator has changed to 01 if not already to indicate you have selected track 1 The fader SEL button will also flash gt F1 F2 or the fader SEL buttons are used to select which DAW track you are controlling When a plug in is active and shown on the DAW use the fader SEL buttons to select the DAW tracks gt F3 and F4 buttons are used to select the plug ins parameter pages The number of parameter pages depends on the number of controls on a plug in and the size of the DAW assigned console surface The Genesys software will display on the track information text the pages parameters under control gt The DAW control assigns the plug ins parameters pages to the console surface For smaller consoles the pages will be more in number for consoles larger than for example 32 channels the plug ins parameters may be completely laid out across the DAW assigned console surface therefore there maybe no pages to shift up down to for certain plug ins gt Press F3 until
301. to reconfigure the FireWire buss with your selection gt This input is selected on the console surface by pressing the IP2 button near the bottom of the channel strip until the adjacent DMON led lights blue This input will only be available for selection if an AD DA card is fitted in that section of the console If you wish to swap ALL of the DAW inputs to the DMON inputs then on the MON SEL section of Master Monitor Panel make sure that none of the DAW SND DAW RTN or I P2 buttons are selected Only once all these three options are switched off will the input will be set to the digital monitor in 151 I Channels Direct Output E DLINE from DAW via Firewire gt AES Transmitters E DMON from DAW via FireWire gt Monitor Section The adjacent blue DMON led will light to confirm this selection plus the DMON led will light on each channel strip that has an AD DA card fitted AES Transmitters These show what can be sent from the console on the 8 AES transmitters per card There are three options available only one of which can be selected at a time e Channels Direct Output Sends the channel Direct Outputs to the AES TX transmitters e DLINE from DAW via FireWire Sends the DLINE signal from DAW through FireWire to the AES TX transmitters This means the AD DA card to be used as a FireWire to AES converter without those signals contributing to the audio busses in the console e DMON from DAW via Fi
302. tted and when you are actually logged onto the automation system When selected the led will light and the path will ignore the actual level of the control instead taking it s level from previously written automation This previously written automation will be displayed on the large encoder at the top of the channel strip providing it has been set to FNC If AUT is not selected automation data will be ignored and as stated it will be possible to control the level of the Monitor path using the knob when the AUT led is not lit DAW gt Press to swap the Monitor between the SND and RET I P 2 When selected splits away the monitor path from the channel DAW return and creates a second input into the monitor to create more mix inputs e The led will be On when the second inputs are selected e The led will be Off when DMON is On NB The DMON led will only light with an optional AD DA card fitted ate Oe CH Allows you to send the Channel input to monitor and is a 3 state toggle switch e Press to listen to the Channel input Post fader led lights red e Press to listen to the Channel input Pre fader led lights green e Press to return to the Monitor path led off ISO Isolates the Channel path Monitor path or both from the Solo system When other Solos are detected on the console a CUT will not be applied to any path that has been isolated e For any path not in ISO the CUT will be destructive and t
303. tware to the latest version 193 AN Setup Genesys Applications 4 Neve A bo JO 3 Completing the Genesys Applications Setup Wizard Setup has finished installing Genesys Application computer The application may be launched by s installed icons s on your electing the Note To install the FireWire USB Serial Driver please se lect From the Genesys Software Settings gt FireWire Setup gt USB Options gt Auto Install The PC Mac FireWire Audio Driver can be downloaded from the Genesys Products page at www ams neve com Thi install e com driver is installed on your own PC Mac which connects to the Genesys Click Finish to exit Setup gt When the window left appears make sure Launch Genesys Applications is selected gt Click Finish Genesys software will now relaunch automatically Updating Firmware To ensure that the console Firmware is up to date once the new software is installed from the Genesys software screen gt Click System then click Update Firmware gt IMPORTANT Now follow the instructions in the Update Firmware One Click Programming for all Modules sub section on page 118 to automatically update your console firmware to the latest version 194 USB Recovery Complete Software Recovery Solution The Genesys computer system runs on the Microsoft Windows operating system If for any reason your system crashes or you cannot access the Genesys softw
304. urned to AMS Neve for upgrading it is possible to temporarily route Channel and DAW Monitor inputs to the Main Mix buss via the console surface gt Press and hold the SEL button on the desired channel gt With the SEL button held press the DAW level knob The adjacent DMON led will light blue to show the Channel input has now been sent to the Main Mix L amp R gt With the SEL button still held press the DAW knob again The adjacent AUT led will light red to show the DAW input has now been sent to the Main Mix L amp R gt With the SEL button still held press the DAW knob again The adjacent DMON and AUT leds will both light to show that both the Channel input and DAW input have been sent to the Main Mix L amp R gt With the SEL button still held press the DAW knob again The adjacent DMON and AUT leds will both turn off to show that both the 69 Channel input and DAW input are no longer being sent to the Main Mix L amp R gt You are now back to the beginning of the process with no routing and the above steps are repeatable to re route to the Main Mix L amp R NB These temporary routes will be overwritten by the console snapshot settings once the computer cassette has been replaced and the console has been powered on with the computer cassette NB It is only when there is no computer cassette detected in the console do the DMON and AUT leds take on this second function of displaying routing Routing
305. vels are stored by the DAW and do not form part of the Genesys Recall or snapshot files However the underlying levels of the Genesys audio input faders will be stored amp recalled even though they might not have been available for control when the Recall store or snapshot was taken The Genesys software screen display shows information relating to Logic Pro parameters levels positions etc The screen indicates the selected DAW track and the current parameters being edited or controlled The text information in yellow indicates track information the top line shows the track name and the line below it shows the parameter position level The large red encoder at the top of the Genesys channel strips acts as a Ch V Pot Channel Virtual Pot control push button control It works in exactly the same way as the DAW encoders on the Monitor Panel and its advantage over the DAW encoders is that it also has LED indicators to show a visual display of the current DAW parameter level position when in Aux Pans Plugins mode These large encoders will be referred to in the manual as the Ch V Pot differentiating them from the Monitor Panel DAW encoders Turn the encoder to set the level position Press the encoder and it acts as a push button when in DAW mode The next section details how to use the Ch V Pot control as a push button and its functionality Ch V Pot Select Genesys software From the Genesys software a tick box labelled Ch V
306. will be lost The system is not designed to run without the computer powered up it should always be in constant communication with the console surface 121 The Windows Taskbar Full Genesys Reboot Console Reboot DAY Reboot Console Debug Window DAW Debug Window Remote Keys Controller Settings VISTA Support Not 400 Board Stop All Applications Exit This section is for the use of AMS Neve Engineers ONLY When the Genesys software is running a red Neve logo will be displayed on the Windows taskbar next to the time display along with other icons The taskbar by default is hidden and minimised To show the taskbar move the mouse pointer down to the bottom of the screen gt Right click this logo to open a small fly out menu of options Most of these options are also available on the Settings screen as detailed in previous sections Full Genesys Reboot As detailed above in Restart Software Console Reboot As detailed above in Restart Software DAW Reboot This will reboot the communications between Genesys and the DAW that may be attached Please note this will not reboot the DAW machine itself but rather reboot and restart the DAW communication between the DAW and the Genesys console Console Debug Window For AMS Neve use only Console Debug Window For AMS Neve use only DAW Debug Window For AMS Neve use only Vista Support This option should only be ticked if you have at
307. wn position Serial Enables the communications to be daisy chained and must be set to the up position Reset For AMS Neve use only In normal operation this switch should be in the down position Switchblock 2 Board ID S 00O These 2 switches should only be set once the card has been installed in aos the console e 0 e 1 switch in the Up position switch in the Down position The first second switches set the card s ID and tells the card where in the system it is 127 Master Card ID 1 switch ID O switch 1 0 0 2 0 1 3 1 0 4 1 1 These IDs are used by the Board Mapping software window to determine which physical positions the Master cards occupy Monitor section It is only the Master card that needs to have its position within the console set In the diagram above each numbered Master card is shown with its Slave in position on a 64 fader console along with the ID switch settings for each Master card Please note this is a typical configuration and customers may decide to put Master cards in different positions The Monitor Section card does not require ID switches to be set Once you have set these ID switches please see the section on Board Mapping on page 147 WCLCK 750 Termination Set this switch to the up position if you have Wordclock sync coming into this card This will terminate the Wordclock input signal 128 Channel Slave Con
308. y for this card s position See Appendix A for the Switch Settings on page 226 e Remove the entire ventilation facing plate on the rear of the console by removing the two screws shown above e Slide the EQ cassette into the top most available slot and push it to the rear until the connectors mate securely onto the backplane e Screw the faceplate back into place 19 Dynamics Cassette Part number SMN 812 412 The assembly number is either AM 5583 8 bit systems or AM 5645 32 bit systems i AM 5583 8 bit systems SMN 812 412 DYNAMICS i or e PA HO o AM 5645 32 bit systems E Cera E E y H 7 i N A 0 oA AES RX DLINE ra j i j AES RX DMON 2 3 N ER 1 2 MASTER AES TX DAW SEND AES SYNC IN OUT SERIAL BRE FIREMRE o o e saf IN OUT 2 WORDCLOCK The Dynamics cassette provides 8 channels with Dynamics processing Compressor and Gate including the provision of an external Key Input This external Key Input is available on both the Gate and Compressor Without this card the DYN button and led on each channel strip will not function The DYN button under the on the Monitor Panel will also be locked out When the Dynamics cassette is present the parameters are set using the four encoders on the Monitor Panel Installation Instructions e Remove the power to the console Ensure the swi
309. ync Section The configuration software auto detects the number and type of cards in the system so all selectable options are available In a 64 channel console there is a maximum of 4 Master FireWire boards and 4 Slave FireWire boards plus a FireWire Monitor card Audio routing on a Master or Slave board as defined by the configuration software can be either e Analogue signal to FireWire or FireWire to analogue signal e Analogue signal to AES or AES to analogue signal e A mix of AES and analogue signal to FireWire or FireWire to a mixture of AES and analogue signals e FireWire to AES or AES to FireWire FireWire detected The above screen reflects a system where the FireWire has been detected so all of the available FireWire routing options are available taking into account the limitations of the FireWire protocol This section of the screen will display the state of e FireWire whether it has been detected or not e System Clock Whether it is locked or not Ext Sync Section The card where the sync source should be connected to When the FireWire cable is connected and detected by Genesys the Sample rate is controlled by the DAW No FireWire detected On a system where there is no FireWire cable detected all of the FireWire options will be unavailable for selection and the following fixed configuration will be put in place e AES Receivers DLINE to Channels DLINE Input e AES Receivers DMON to Channels DM
310. you have set up the 4081 ID s depending on the setups you will see it on screen The 4081 will show 8 MIC channels 2 racks at one time The Gain can be set by clicking the gain control by hovering over the gain control until a hand cursor appears and clicking and holding down the left mouse button Drag upwards downwards will now enable you to change the gain The Gain value for Mic and the Gain value for Line will be remembered for each so that swapping between Mic and Line will show the previously set gain value The Phantom Pad Phase Impedance Mic Line selection and Insert can all be set by clicking on the appropriate button on screen Phantom Pad and Impedance can only be selected if Mic is selected first Assigning 4081 MIC Channels to Genesys gt Click the option Genesys Channel Assign gt Each 4081 can be controlled by 4 Genesys Channels Click the drop down arrow to select which channel i e Rack 1 1 4 Rack 2 5 8 Rack 3 9 12 Rack 4 13 16 etc gt Click OK In green at the bottom of the main screen it will now state which selected Genesys channels as above the channel racks are connected to gt You can now put Genesys Channel Encoder into 4081 mode 166 Click Settings Within Software on the Genesys menu bar gt In Settings in the section labelled Channel FNC Control select the option 4081 MIC Control by clicking the tick box gt Return to the 4081 screen 1
311. your selection 152 HES Receivers Enable Sample Rate Convertors D EXT 5 1 Input On the console surface the digital externals are selected into the monitoring system by double pressing the EXT 2 button first making sure you have selected EXT just to the right Only once both of these buttons are lit will the adjacent D EXT blue led light to show you are monitoring the digital externals To AES Transmitters All of these paths that feed into the AES Transmitters will be in circuit all of the time and require no user intervention e 8Ts 1 8 sent in pairs e AUX 1 amp 2 sent as a pair 3 amp 4 sent asa pair 5 L amp R 6 L amp R e 2TL R sent as a pair e MIX L R sent as a pair This screen is for information only and contains no settable elements AES Receivers Sample Rate Converters gt Untick the D EXT 5 1 Input box to disable the automatic sample rate converters on all the external 6 wide digital inputs into the monitoring system By default these converters will be ticked and therefore in circuit without any user intervention 153 Genesys Path Names sent to the DAW via FireWire Once the FireWire has been configured and the options are ticked or unticked on the main configuration screen shown above the Genesys audio path name will also be sent to the DAW and displayed there The following table shows the list of path names as displayed on your DAW with a max of 8 ch
312. ype DAW recording play backs or DAW mixing Signal Name ae Hi Lo Screen 1 DAW Return 1 24 12 25 2 DAW Return 2 10 23 11 3 DAW Return 3 21 9 22 4 DAW Return 4 7 20 8 5 DAW Return 5 18 6 19 6 DAW Return 6 4 17 5 7 DAW Return 7 15 3 16 8 DAW Return 8 1 14 2 216 a re gt G Breum RETURN A jm 1 P2 TAPE MEON DAW T F NS 3 INS 1 Channel Insert 2 Send 25 way D type Signal Name A Hi Lo Screen 1 Channel Insert 2 Send 1 24 12 25 2 Channel Insert 2 Send 2 10 23 11 3 Channel Insert 2 Send 3 21 9 22 4 Channel Insert 2 Send 4 7 20 8 5 Channel Insert 2 Send 5 18 6 19 6 Channel Insert 2 Send 6 4 17 5 7 Channel Insert 2 Send 7 15 3 16 8 Channel Insert 2 Send 8 1 14 2 Channel Insert 2 Return 25 way D type Signal Name dk Hi Lo Screen 1 Channel Insert 2 Return 1 24 12 25 2 Channel Insert 2 Return 2 10 23 11 3 Channel Insert 2 Return 3 21 9 22 4 Channel Insert 2 Return 4 7 20 8 5 Channel Insert 2 Return 5 18 6 19 6 Channel Insert 2 Return 6 4 17 5 7 Channel Insert 2 Return 7 15 3 16 8 Channel Insert 2 Return 8 1 14 2 217 a la SEND i OSEN O SSS A a CO O jo ea on I P2 TAPE MON DAW O ING 2 INS 1 Channel Insert 1 Send 25 way D type Signal Name ihe Hi Lo Scre
313. ys to these settings IP Address 192 168 99 186 e Subnet Mask NAS 29570 e Make sure the Default gateway DNS settings are blank If a direct connection is not made i e you are connecting via a router or hub through your studio company network Select Obtain an IP address automatically Select Obtain DNS server address automatically gt Click OK close the Local Area Network Control Panel windows and all open windows gt Finally from the desktop double click the Genesys Applications icon or from the Windows Start Menu click All Programs Genesys Applications Genesys Applications The Genesys software will now launch 26 DAW Computer Settings Mac OS X DAW Computer gt On your Mac DAW computer from the Apple menu select System Preferences Network From the resulting screen When not using a hub studio network and connecting the Genesys computer directly to the DAW computer using a cross over cable Select Ethernet 1 or the primary connected ethernet connection in the left hand window and select Manually from the pull down menu next to Configure IPv4 gt Now set your DAW computer to these settings e IP Address 192 168 99 183 e Subnet Mask 259 r299 29970 e Make sure the Router setting is blank If a direct connection is not made i e you are connecting via a router or hub through your studio company network gt Select Ethernet 1 or the primary connect

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  Por favor haga clic aquí para descargar manual de Instalación y    Manual de Usuario Teletramitación Cambio de Local tipo B  Philips Forecast I Beam  User manual - Trade Connect  Remington S-1009 User's Manual  Sea Gull Lighting 41120-820 Installation Guide  Dynamic Series Catalog  Page 1 Page 2 TGB-5====B-5"" ー ブイのデジタル化を実現 ーTGB  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file